IOM RTAG+50Hz 572517440002 K

Installation, Operation and Maintenance
RTAG Air-Cooled Helical

Rotary Liquid Chillers
Models: RTAG
085-440 ton units (50Hz)
572517440002
! SAFTY WARNING 7
Only qualified personal should install and service the equipment. The installation, starting up, and servicing of heat-
ing, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous and requires specific knowledge and training.
Improperly installed,adjusted or altered equipment by an unqualified person could result in death or serious injury.
When working on the equipment, observe all precautions in the literature and on the tags, stickers, and labels that
are attached to the equipment.
Dec 2022 RTAG-SVX001K-EN

Confidential and proprietary Trane information
Introduction ments for handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling of
certain refrigerants and the equipment that is used in these
service procedures. In addition, some states or municipalities
Read this manual thoroughly before operating or servicing may have additional requirements that must also be adhered
this unit. to for responsible management of refrigerants. Know the
applicable laws and follow them.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notices
Note that warnings, cautions and notices appear at appropri-
ate intervals throughout this manual. Warnings are provided
to alert installing contractors to potential hazards that could
result in death or personal injury. Cautions are designed to
alert personnel to hazardous situations that could result in WARNING!
personal injury, while notices indicate a situation that could Contains Refrigerant!
result in equipment or property-damage only accidents.
System contains oil and refrigerant under high pres-
Your personal safety and the proper operation of this ma- sure. Recover refrigerant to relieve pressure before
chine depend upon the strict observance of these precau- opening the system. See unit nameplate for refrigerant
tions. type. Do not use non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant
substitutes, or refrigerant additives.
ATTENTION: Warnings, Cautions and Notices appear at
appropriate sections throughout this literature. Read these Failure to follow proper procedures or the use of
carefully: non-approved refrigerants, refrigerant substitutes, or
refrigerant additives could result in death or serious
Indicates a potentially hazardous situ- injury or equipment damage.
! WARNING
ation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury. WARNING !
! CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situ- USING PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIP-

ation which, if not avoided, could result MENT (PPE)!
in minor or moderate injury. It could
also be used to alert against unsafe Dealing with refrigerant, Please always refer to the
practices. appropriate safety data sheets (MSDS) and the occupa-
tional safety and health (OSHA) guidelines, use proper
Indicates a situation that could result breathing apparatus, pay attention to the eyes and
NOTICE in equipment or property-damage only body protection.Otherwise may cause serious injury or
accidents. death.
Important Environmental Concerns

WARNING !
Scientific research has shown that certain man-made chem-
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS MAY BE
icals can affect the earth’s naturally occurring stratospheric
ozone layer when released to the atmosphere. In particular,
CHARGED!
several of the identified chemicals that may affect the ozone Installation, testing, maintenance and fault disposal
layer are refrigerants that contain Chlorine, Fluorine and of this equipment may need to be charged.Must be
Carbon (CFCs) and those containing Hydrogen, Chlorine, licensed qualified electrician or other formal charged
Fluorine and Carbon (HCFCs). Not all refrigerants contain- operation training of personnel to perform the task. If
ing these compounds have the same potential impact to the charged operation did not follow all electrical safety
prevention measures, may result in serious injury or
environment. Trane advocates the responsible handling of
death.
all refrigerants-including industry replacements for CFCs and
HCFCs such as saturated or unsaturated HFCs and HCFCs.
Important Responsible Refrigerant

Practices
Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are
important to the environment, our customers, and the air
conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants
must be certified according to local rules. For the USA, the
Federal Clean Air Act (Section 608) sets forth the require-
©2022 Trane RTAG-SVX001K-EN

Introduction
NOTICE
Using towing hook for container trans-
port
RTAG unit is shipped with container, there are towing
hooks on base at nameplate side.Must using these tow
hooks to pull the unit out of the container.Dragging the
unit from somewhere else caused the breakdown of the
unit. Trane is not responsible.
Copyright
This document and the information in it are the property of
Trane, and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in
part without written permission. Trane reserves the right to
revise this publication at any time, and to make changes to
its content without obligation to notify any person of such
revision or change.
Trademarks
All trademarks referenced in this document are the trade-
marks of their respective owners.
Notice
Uncharging refrigerant before welding, filled with nitrogen for
protection, and use cooling method to protect the electron
component. TRANE is not responsible for the equipment
damage due to improper welding.
Revison History
• RTAG-SVX001A-EN (September 2017), new manual.
• Change to Symbio800 platform
• Add copper fin data information
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 3
Contents
Model Number Descriptions..................................... 9
Figure 6. Dimension - RTAG 225/230 Extra/
Unit Model Number............................................... 9 Premium efficiency unit.............................. 26
CHHP Compressor Model Number......................11 Figure 7. Dimension - RTAG 255/285 High/
Premium efficiency unit.............................. 27
CHHW Compressor Model Number.....................11
Figure 8. Dimension - RTAG 255 Extra,
Overview.................................................................. 13 310/340 High/Premium efficiency unit........ 28
Preface................................................................ 13 Figure 9. Dimension - RTAG 285/310 Extra
Warranty.............................................................. 13 efficiency unit............................................. 29
Unit Description................................................... 13 Figure 10. Dimension - RTAG 340 Extra

efficiency unit............................................. 30
Inspection Checklist............................................ 13
Figure 11. Dimension - RTAG 375/400 High/
Storage................................................................ 13 Premium efficiency unit.............................. 31
Unit Identification - Nameplates.......................... 14 Figure 12. Dimension - RTAG 375/400
Extra, 440 High/Premium efficiency unit.... 32
Unit Nameplate............................................. 14
Figure 13. Dimension - RTAG 410/440
Figure 1. Unit Nameplate.......................... 14 Extra, 420 Premium efficiency unit............. 33
Compressor nameplate................................. 14 Installation - Mechanical......................................... 34
General Data....................................................... 15 Installation Responsibilities................................. 34
Table 1. General data - 100 - 205 Ton 50Hz Table 8. Installation Resposibilities............ 34
Unit - High efficiency (fixed speed fan)...... 15
Attention Items.................................................... 34
Table 2. General data - 085 - 205 Ton 50Hz
Unit - Extra efficiency (fixed speed fan)..... 16 Figure 14. Installation platform................. 35
Table 3. General data - 085 - 205 Ton 50Hz Storage Requirement.......................................... 35
Unit - Premium seasonal efficiency (variable Clearance............................................................ 35
speed fan).................................................. 17
Figure 15. Installation clearance............... 36
Table 4. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz
Unit - High efficiency (fixed speed fan)...... 18 Drainage.............................................................. 36
Table 5. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz Unit Lifting........................................................... 36
Unit - Extra efficiency (fixed speed fan)..... 19 Figure 16. Unit lifting schematic (4 points).37
Table 6. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz Figure 17. Unit lifting schematic (6 points).37
Unit - Premium seasonal efficiency (variable
speed fan).................................................. 20 Figure 18. Unit lifting schematic (8 points).37
Table 7. General data - 125 - 205 Ton 50Hz Table 9. Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions
Unit - Standard seasonal efficiency (variable - Non-copper fins........................................ 38
speed fan)......................................................21 Table 10. Lifting Weights and CG
Dimension................................................................ 22 Dimensions - Copper fins........................... 39
Figure 2. Dimension- RTAG 100 High, Isolator Installation.............................................. 40

085/100 Extra/Premium efficiency unit....... 22 Figure 19. Isolator location....................... 41
Figure 3. Dimension - RTAG Figure 20. Ruber isolator dimension......... 42
125/145/155/170 High/Standard efficiency
Table 11. Unit Isolators.............................. 42
unit............................................................. 23
Table 12. Unit Isolator Selections - Non-
Figure 4. Dimension- RTAG
copper Fins................................................ 43
125/145/155/170 Extra/Premium , 190/205
High/Standard efficiency unit..................... 24 Table 13. Unit Isolators Selections - Copper
Fins............................................................ 44
Figure 5. Dimension - RTAG 190/205/225
Extra/Premium efficiency unit..................... 25 Evaporator Water Piping..................................... 45
4 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Contents
Emergency Stop............................................ 56
Figure 21. Water side heat exchanger
typical piping connection schematic........... 45 External Auto/Stop........................................ 57
Figure 22. Water flow switch installation External Chilled Water Setpoint (ECWS) Op-
schemetric.................................................. 46 tion................................................................ 57
System Minimum Water Volume......................... 46 External Current Limit Setpoint (ECLS) Option.
Water Flow Switch............................................... 46 57
Table 14. Target slice length...................... 47 Figure 26. Wiring Examples for ECLS and
ECWS........................................................ 58
Figure 23. Water flow pressure drop curve...
47 Chilled Water Reset (CWR).......................... 58
Water Treatment.................................................. 48 Communications Interface options...................... 59
Table 15. Water quality requirements........ 48 Table 25. Wire size.................................... 59
Freeze Protection................................................ 48 LonTalk Communications Interface for Chillers
(LCI-C).......................................................... 59
Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout and Gly-
col Requirements.......................................... 49 BACnet Communications Interface for Chillers
(BCI-C).......................................................... 59
Table 16. Ethylene glycol — low refrigerant
temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water Table 26. LonTalk Points List..................... 60
temperature cutout(LWTC)......................... 49 Table 27. Descriptions and configurations.61
Table 17. Propylene glycol — low refrigerant Controls.................................................................... 65
temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water
temperature cutout(LWTC)......................... 50 Symbio800 Overview.......................................... 65
Installation - Electrical............................................ 51 Figure 27. Front View of Symbio800........ 65
General Recommendations................................. 51 Figure 28. Wiring locations and connection
ports........................................................... 65
Installer-Supplied Components........................... 51
Tracer AdaptiView TD7 Display........................... 65
Power Supply Wiring..................................... 51
Operator Interface......................................... 65
Table 18. Electrical data - High Efficiency at
all ambient operation.................................. 52 Figure 29. TD7 screens............................ 66
Table 19. Electrical data – Extra Efficiency at Home Screen................................................ 66

all ambient operation.................................. 52 Figure 30. Home screen........................... 66
Table 20. Electrical data – PSE at all Table 28. Home screen items.................... 66
ambient operation...................................... 53
View Operating Modes.................................. 66
Table 21. Electrical data – SSE at all
Figure 31. Chiller operating modes.......... 66
ambient operation...................................... 53
Table 29. Operating modes - chiller........... 67
Figure 24. Power Entrance of fixed panel.54
Table 30. Operating modes - circuit........... 68
Figure 25. Power Entrance of AFD panel.54
Table 31. Operating modes - compressor. 69
Control Power Supply................................... 55
Alarms........................................................... 70
Table 22. Pump Realy Operation.............. 55
Figure 32. Alarm screen........................... 70
Alarm and Status Relay Outputs (Programmable
Relays)................................................................ 55 Reports.......................................................... 70
Table 23. Alarm and Status Relay Output Figure 33. Report screen.......................... 70
Configuration Table.................................... 56 Figure 34. Edit custom report screen....... 71
Relay Assignments Using Tracer TU................... 56 Figure 35. Report evaporator screen........ 71
Table 24. Default Assignments.................. 56 Table 32. Report evaporator screen items.71
Low Voltage Wiring.............................................. 56 Figure 36. Report condenser screen........ 71
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 5
Contents
starting....................................................... 82
Table 33. Report condenser screen items.71
Figure 59. Sequence of operation: running
Figure 37. Report compressor screen...... 71
(lead compressor/circuit start and run)....... 83
Table 34. Report compressor screen items...
Figure 60. Sequence of operation: running
72
(lag compressor/circuit start and run)......... 84
Figure 38. Report motor screen ............... 72
Figure 61. Sequence of events: satisfied
Table 35. Report motor screen items........ 72 setpoint....................................................... 85
Equipment Settings....................................... 72 Figure 62. Sequence of events: Unloading
Figure 39. Setting screen......................... 72 unstaging.................................................... 86
Figure 40. Equipment setting screen (Chiller Figure 63. Sequence of events: normal
setting shown)............................................ 73 shutdown to stopped or run inhibit............. 87
Figure 41. Chilled water reset type screen... Figure 64. Sequence of events: immediate
73 shutdown to stopped or run inhibit............. 88
Figure 42. Changed chilled water setpoint Diagnostics.......................................................... 89
screen........................................................ 73 Diagnostic Name (Text) and Source............. 89
Table 36. Settings screen items................ 74 AFD Diagnostics........................................... 90
Service Settings............................................ 74 Table 37. AFD diagnostics......................... 90
Figure 43. Warning message.................... 74 Starter Diagnostics........................................ 90
Figure 44. Service settings screen........... 74 Table 38. Starter diagnostics..................... 90
Display Settings............................................ 74 Main Processor Diagnostics.......................... 92
Figure 45. Display preference screen....... 75 Table 39. Main processor diagnostics....... 92
Figure 46. Date format page..................... 75 Communication Diagnostics........................ 100
Laungage Settings........................................ 75
Table 40. Communications diagnostics... 100
Figure 47. Language page....................... 75 Operating Principles............................................. 104
Date and Time Settings................................. 76
Refrigerant Circuit............................................. 104
Figure 48. Date and time screen.............. 76
Figure 65. System schematic................. 104
Figure 49. Countdown screen.................. 76
Refrigerant Cycle............................................... 104
Security Settings........................................... 76
Figure 66. Pressure Enthalpy (P-h) diagram
Figure 50. Security screen - disable......... 77 of RTAG.................................................... 104
Figure 51. Security settings screen.......... 77 Figure 67. Pressure Enthalpy (P-h) diagram
Figure 52. Log in screen........................... 77 of RTAG with Economizer........................ 105
Figure 53. Log out confirmation screen.... 77 R134a/R513A Refrigerant................................. 105
Tracer TU...................................................... 78 Compressor....................................................... 105
Figure 54. Tracer TU................................ 78 Figure 68. Compressor inner configuration..
106
Sequence of Operation....................................... 78
Figure 69. Compressor with Auxiliary Inlet
Software Operation Overview....................... 78
Port........................................................... 106
Figure 55. Software operation overview... 79 Condenser Fan.................................................. 106
Timelines....................................................... 80
Evaporator......................................................... 106
Figure 56. Sequence of operation: power up
Expansion Valve................................................ 107
diagram...................................................... 80
Oil Separator..................................................... 107
Figure 57. Sequence of events: power up to
starting....................................................... 81 Oil system.......................................................... 107
Figure 58. Sequence of events: stopped to
6 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Contents
Pre-Start Checkout................................................ 108 Oil Loss Troubleshooting............................. 121
Installation Checklist.......................................... 108 Internal Oil Filter Replacement.................... 121
Check precedure............................................... 108 Evaporator Oil Return Pipe Filter Re-
place-ment.................................................. 122
Figure 70. Ball Valve Open/Close status.108
Unit Voltage Imbalance..................................... 109 Coil Cleaning..................................................... 122
Unit Voltage Phasing......................................... 109 Water-side Heat Exchanger Maintenance......... 122
Water System Flow Rates..................................110 Figure 74. Oil Filter Replacement........... 122
Chemical Cleaning of Water-side Heat Ex-
Water System Pressure Drop.............................110
changer....................................................... 123
Unit Start Up and Shut Off Procedures................111
Figure 73. Chemical Cleaning................ 123
Start Up..............................................................111 Mechanical Cleaning of Water-side Heat Ex-
Table 41. Unit Running Status..................111 changer....................................................... 123
Seasonal Unit Startup Procedure.......................111 Tubes Replacement of Water-side Heat Ex-
changer....................................................... 123
System Restart after Extended Shutdown.........112
Compressor Replacement................................. 123
Temporary Shutdown and Restart......................112
Fan Replacement.............................................. 124
Extended Shutdown Procedure..........................112
Coil Assembly or Single Coil Replacement....... 124
Seasonal Unit Startup Procedure.......................112
Water side heat exchanger replacement........... 125
Periodic Maintenance........................................... 113
Drive....................................................................... 126
Weekly Maintenance .........................................113
TL390 Series Drive Overview............................ 126
Monthly Maintenance.........................................113
Product Information..................................... 126
Annual Maintenance...........................................113
Figure 75. Designation Rules and
Table 42. RTAG Start-up Test Log............114
Nameplate example................................. 126
Table 43. RTAG Unit Configuration..........115
Figure 76. Drive Outline Sizing............... 126
Table 44. RTAG Chiller Log......................116
Figure 77. Components Layout for 90KW–
Maintenance Procedures...................................... 118 160KW .................................................... 127
Refrigerant and Oil Charge Management..........118 Mechanical and Electrical Installation......... 128
R134a/R513A Field Charging Procedure...........118 Figure 78. Clearance around of 90–160kW.
Vacuum Procedure.......................................118 128
Figure 79. Lifting Locations for 90–160kW
Factory (initial) Refrigerant Charging Proce-
Drive......................................................... 128
dure .............................................................118
Table 45. Power Terminals of Drive Main
Adding charge .............................................119 Loop......................................................... 128
Refrigerant Recovery...................................119 Figure 80. Power terminals for 90-160kW....
Refrigerant Filter Replacement Procedure...119 129
Compressor Oil................................................. 120 Operation and Display................................. 129
Oil Separator Oil Level Check..................... 120 Figure 81. Diagram of the operation panel...
129
Figure 71. Oil Level Measure of Oil
Function Codes........................................... 129
Separator................................................. 120
Compressor Oil Charging............................ 120 Table 46. function codes description....... 129
Figure 82. Function code operation........ 130
Figure 72. Oil Charge of Compressor..... 121
Maintenance................................................ 130
Draining Compressor oil.............................. 121
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 7
Contents
Figure 83. Remove air duct cover plate of Table 56. Direct Free cooling- Variable
fans.......................................................... 130 Speed Compressor Units......................... 154
Figure 84. Remove Power Wires and Fans.. Table 57. Glycol-Free Free cooling- Fixed
130 Speed Compressor Units......................... 154
Safety Information and Precautions............ 131 Table 58. Glycol-Free cooling- Variable
Speed Compressor Units......................... 155
Common Faults and Solutions.................... 132
Installation and Operating Announcement ....... 155
Table 47. Solution to the faults of the TL390.
132 Figure 93. Free Cooling – Direct System
drain valve................................................ 156
Table 48. Common Faults and Solutions.134
Figure 94. Free Cooling – Glycol Free drain
CA300 Series Overview.................................... 135
valve......................................................... 156
Product Information..................................... 135 Figure 92. Free Cooling Coil Box Drain
Figure 85. AC drive components (75 to Valve........................................................ 156
160kW)..................................................... 136 Table 59. Freezing point temperature of
Figure 86. AC drive components (200 to antifreeze liquid........................................ 157
220kW)..................................................... 136 Lifting ................................................................ 157
Table 49. Product models and electrical Figure 95. Unit Lifting Schematic............ 157
parameters............................................... 137
Table 60. Free Cooling Unit Lifting Weights
Table 50. Technical specifications........... 137 and CG Dimensions................................. 158
Figure 87. Outline dimensions (75 to Isolator installation............................................. 159
160kW)..................................................... 139
Figure 96. Isolator location..................... 159
Figure 88. Outline dimensions (200 to
220kW)..................................................... 139 Figure 97. Isolator dimension................. 159
Wiring.......................................................... 140 Table 61. Free Cooling Unit Isolators
Location.................................................... 159
Panel Operation ......................................... 142
Table 62. Free Cooling Unit Isolators Part
Figure 89. Details of the operating panel.142 Extension Color........................................ 160
Table 51. Indicators on the operating panel.. Operation Mode................................................. 162
143
Free Cooling Working Condition....................... 162
Trouble Shooting......................................... 144
Figure 98. Free Cooling Active/Inactive.. 162
Table 52. Symptoms and diagnostics...... 145
User Interface.................................................... 163
Table 53. Faults and diagnostics............. 146
Table 63. Free cooing parameters and range.
Maintenance................................................ 150
163
Function Code............................................. 151 Diagnsotics of Free Cooling.............................. 163
Table 54. Function code.......................... 151 Table 64. Diagnsotics.............................. 163
Free Cooling........................................................... 152 Schematic Diagram List........................................ 164
Overview........................................................... 152
System Schematic of Two Types Free Cooling .152
Figure 90. Direct Free Cooling System
Schematic................................................ 152
Figure 91. Glycol-free Free Cooling System
Schematic................................................ 153
General Data of Free Cooling........................... 153
Table 55. Direct-Free cooling - Fixed Speed
Compressor Units.................................... 153
8 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Model Number Descriptions
Unit Model Number
An example of a typical unit model number is:
RTAG 190 E C A 0 X 0 A L W S F F N L 1 S B X X X E M 0 X G R Y 0 C 1 A N I X N X X
1~4 5~7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Model number digits are selected and assigned in accordance with the following definitions using the model number example
shown above.
Digit 1-4 - Unit Model C = Chinese Pressure Vessel Code

RTAG = Air Cooled Series chiller
Digit 15 - Sound Treatment
Digit 5-7 - Unit Nominal Tons S = Standard
085 = 85 Nominal Tons X = Medium Low Noise (compressor or tube sound attenua-
100 = 100 Nominal Tons tion)
125 = 125 Nominal Tons L = Low Noise(compressor + tube sound wrap)
145 = 145 Nominal Tons M = Low Noise+night noise set back
155 = 155 Nominal Tons
Digit 16 - Unit Application
N = Standard Ambient 14 -114.8°F (-10 ~ 46°C)
H = High Ambient 14-125°F(-10 ~ 52°C)
L = Low Ambient 0-114.8°F(-18 ~ 46°C)
W = Wide Ambient 0-125°F(-18 ~ 52°C)
255 = 255 Nominal Tons Digit 17 - Relief Valve Option
285 = 285 Nominal Tons S = Single Relief Valve
310 = 310 Nominal Tons D = Dual Relief Valve With 3 Way Valve
Digit 18 - Flow Switch
X = No Flow Switch
F = Field Installed Flow Switch
440 = 440 Nominal Tons Digit 19 - Water Connection
F = Flange
Digit 08 - Unit Voltage
M = Flanged connection with mating flanges
C = 380V/50Hz/3Ph
D = 400V/50Hz/3Ph Digit 20 - Evaporator Application
6 = 415V/50Hz/3Ph N = Standard Cooling (above 4°C)
P = Process Cooling (4~ -10°C)
Digit 09 - Manufacturing Location
C = Taicang, China Digit 21 - Evaporator Water Pressure
B = Bangkok,Thailand L = 150psi
H = 300psi
Digit 10,11 - Design Sequence
XX = Factory/ABU Assigned Digit 22 - Evaporator Configurations
1 = 1 Pass Evaporator
Digit 12 - Unit Type
2 = 2 Pass Evaporator
H = High Efficiency
X = Extra Efficiency Digit 23 - Thermal Insulation
P = Premium Seasonal Efficiency S = Standard Thermal Insulation
S = Standard Seasonal Efficiency Digit 24 - Condenser Options
Digit 13 - Safety Agency Listing T = Copper tube/Al Fin Coil
0 = No Safety Agency Listing B = Copper tube/Al Fin Coil, with black coated
C = Copper tube/Copper Fin Coil
Digit 14 - Pressure Vessel Code
E = E-Coated Tube Fin (Complete Coat Epoxy Coated Fins)
A = ASME Pressure Vessel Code
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 9
Unit Model Number
Digit 25 - Heat Recovery N = No Appearance Options
X = No Heat Recovery
Digit 40 - Unit Isolation Installation Accessory
Digit 26 - Pump Package X = None
X = Pump Signal On/Off I = Neoprene Isolators
Digit 27 - Free Cooling Digit 41- High Static Pressure
F = Free Cooling_Direct X = None
T = Free Cooling_Glycol Free without valve M = Middle Static Pressure (50Pa)
I = Free Cooling_Glycol Free with valve S = High Performance (0Pa for SSE)
X = None H = High Static Pressure/High Performance (0, 50~150Pa)
Digit 28 - Unit Operator Interface Language Digit 42 - Free Cooling Glycol Charge
C = Chinese F = 40% Ethylene Glycol Charge
E = English N = None Glycol Charge in Factory
Digit 29 - Remote Communications Options Digit 43 - Refrigerant Type
X = None X = R134a
B = BACnet Interface A = R513A
M = Modbus Interface
Digit 44 - Special
L = Lontalk Interface
X = None
Digit 30 - Easy Remote Controller S = Special Order
0 = Without
Model number discretion here only list RTAG standard units
Digit 31 - External Set Points & Capacity Outputs
available option. There will be more options in future.
X = None
S = Rapid restart – No UPS Main options implementation scheme:
A = External Set Points & Capacity Outputs
Medium low noise option of Sound Treatment use sound
B = Rapid Restart, No UPS;External Set Points & Capacity
wrap depends compressor configuration: N5, N6 use tube
Outputs
sound wrap, N6E2 use compressor sound box. this option is
Digit 32 - Refrigerant Charge only for unit nominal tonnage >225.
F = Full Charge
Low noise option of Sound Treatment use sound wrap to re-
N = Nitrogen
duce the compressor, suction and discharge line, oil separa-
P = 12kg Charge
tor noise; low noise with night noise setback is implemented
Digit 33 - Factory Tests with both sound wrap and variable speed fan, adjust fan
R = Standard Functional Test speed.
P = Non-witnessed Performance Test,With Report
For Unit Application, High Ambient option is added oil cooler
W = Customer-witnessed Performance Test,With Report
base on Standard ambient configuration; low ambient option
Digit 34 - Compressor Motor Starter Type implement with variable speed fan; and wide ambient tem-
V = VFD perature have both oil cooler and variable speed fan. But
W = VFD high temperature units with VFD or economizer always have oil cooler.
Y = Wye-delta Closed Transition
Alarm relay outputs can be connected to the sound & light
Digit 35 - Harmonic Filter alarm warning elements. It is highly recommended that users
0 = None install the corresponding alarm elements with this function,
so that when the unit encounters a fault, they can get the
Digit 36 - Power Line Connection Type
information in time and go to the troubleshooting.
T = Terminal Block Connection
C = Circuit Breaker High static option, middle static pressure selection will not
D = Mech Disconnect Switch change combination, unit can sustain 50Pa static pressure.
High performance (0Pa for SSE) is option only for standard
Digit 37 - Incoming Power Line
seasonal efficiency unit, which improve fan configuration not
1 = Single Point Power Connection
for high static pressure but to enhance unit performance.
2 = Dual Point Power Connection
Select high static pressure/high performance option, all
Digit 38 - Control Output Accessories Options size units with AC fan will improve fan configuration, which
A = Alarm Relay Outputs can sustain 0~150Pa static pressure, unit nominal tonnage
<=255ton and with EC fan will also improve fan configura-
Digit 39 - Appearance Options
tion, which can sustain 0~100Pa static pressure; unit nominal
10 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Unit Model Number
tonnage>255ton and with EC fan will not change fan, which
can sustain 0~100Pa static pressure. Unit performance will
CHHP Compressor Model Number
decrease correspondingly at difference static pressure. if unit
Digit 1~4 Compressor Type
operated at high static and high ambient temperature, EC
CHHP = GP2 compressor series
fan speed may be reduced.
Digit 5~7 Size Designation
RTAG free cooling option have copper tube aluminum fin
0N2 = 120 TON
coil attached on refrigerant coil outside. Free cooling glycol
0N1 = 100 TON
charge operation is only for Glycol-free option, 40% Eth-
0M2 = 85 TON
ylene glycol can meet the anti-freeze requirements of -20°C
0M1 = 70 TON
environment. Cumster must select right antifreeze solution
0L2 = 60 TON
according the lowest temperature unit operates and stores.
0L1 = 50 TON
The problem caused by improper concentration of antifreeze
0K2 = 40 TON
fluid on site is not within the scope of warranty.
0K1 = 35 TON
Depending on the ambient temperature and the set value of
Digit 8 Motor Voltage
refrigerant carried by the unit, the free cooling can operate
A = 200-60-3
independently or simultaneously with the mechanical refrig-
R = 220-50-3
eration of the compressor. See the free cooling section for
C = 230-60-3
more information.
D = 380-60-3
Compressor motor starter type with VFD high temperature H = 575-60-3
option is only for 225, 310, 340, 440 premium seasonal effi- T = 460-60-3 or 400-50-3
ciency units, which have bigger VFD and compressor motor
Digit 9 Internal Relief
comparing with VFD starter option, and lead to unit can
K = 450 psid
operate at full load in higher ambient temperature.
Digit 10~11 Design Sequence
** = Factory assigned
Digit 12 Capacity Limit
N = Standard Capacity Controls
NOTICE
Unit Application! Digit 13~15 Motor KW Rating
112 = 112 kW (N2/50Hz)
RTAG products has been tested in lab at -18ºC starting. 093 = 093 kW (N1/50Hz)
But if unit need to start up and running in low tempera- 077 = 077 kW (M2/50Hz)
ture (≤-15ºC) frequently, especially in the case of low 065 = 065 kW (M1/50Hz)
wind speed >2m/s, building wall around equipment
058 = 058 kW (L2/50Hz)
installation area to keep out the wind is needed. it is
048 = 048 kW (L1/50Hz)
only verified in lab with wind speed <2m/s, exceed
this limitation, unit may fail to build the pressure dif- 041 = 041 kW (K2/50Hz)
ference and can start properly. Contact TRANE local 036 = 036 kW (K1/50Hz)
office,TRANE can provide the corresponding special Digit 16 Volume Ratio
solution based on customer’s operation characteris-
A = High Volume Ratio
tics.
N = Low Volume Ratio
CHHW Compressor Model Number

Digit 1~4 Compressor Type
CHHW = GP2.5 compressor Family
Digit 5 Economizer Port Detail
0 = No economizer port
E = Economizer port
Digit 6 Frame Size
N = N Frame
Digit 7 Compressor Capacity
5 = GP2.5 Smaller capacity (minor)
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 11
Unit Model Number
6 = GP2.5 Large capacity (major)
Digit 8 Motor Voltage
T = 400/460-50/60-3 used for 380-50-3
K = 460-60-3 (N6 only)
D = 380-60-3
Digit 9 Internal Relief
K = 450 pisd
Digit 10~11 Design Sequence
** = Factory assigned
Digit 12 Capacity Limit
N = Standard capacity
Digit 13~15 Motor KW Rating
093 = N5 50Hz
112 = N5 60Hz
112 = N6 50Hz
134 = N6 60Hz
Digit 16 Volume Ratio
A = High Volume Ratio
12 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Overview
be smaller than 95%RH, no water condenses, the detail
Preface measurement for the application of exceed these limitation
This manual includes RTAG air cooled screw chiller instal- and other information please refer to the drive section. And
lation, operation and maintenance.Related services shall be variable speed unit Total Harmonic Distortion of Current at
done by a qualified professional and technical personnel. rating point full load < 40%.
The shell-and-tube type evaporator is manufactured in accor-
Warranty dance with ASME standards. Each evaporator is fully insu-
lated and is equipped with water drain and vent connections.
Warranty scope is suitable for the TRANE company's general Packaged units have heat tape and plug-in heater protection
terms and conditions.If without Trane’s written authorization, to -20°C as standard.
any equipment repair, modification, or operation beyond the
operating limits of equipment, or modification of the equip-
ment control system, and electrical wiring, the consequences Inspection Checklist
are out of place in the warranty.User’s wrong operation, lack In order to avoid the unnecessary losses in the transport
of maintenance and the guidance of the TRANE company process of goods, please complete the following check when
breach will lose the warranty rights. the arrival of the Unit:
● W
hen the unit arrival, please make sure the unit name-
Unit Description plate is consistent with order.
RTAG air cooled screw chiller (50Hz) have totally 19 mod- ● C

heck the appearance of arrival goods and packaging
els: 085,100,125,145,155,170,190,205,225,230,255,285 materials have obvious damage or not.If there is damage,
,310,340,375,400,410,420 and 440.Each model has four notify the carrier immediately, and indicate unit damaged
efficiency options (Units nominal tonnage not in region of status on carriers shipping records.
125ton~205ton don’t have standard seasonal efficiency, 230,
● B
efore storage, please check whether the unit is internal
420 only have premium seasonal efficiency, 085 doesn’t
damage as soon as possible. deliver written report to the
have high efficiency; 410 only have extra efficiency). RTAG
carrier about the discovered internal damage within 15
085 and RTAG 100 use one compressor, it’s single refrig-
days from arrival of the goods.
erant cycle, single water loop; all other models have dual
refrigerant cycle,which shares one water loop. ● If discover the inner damage, please stop to remove the
packing, also don't move away the damage the parts
RTAG Units are helical-rotary type, air-cooled liquid chillers,
from the scene, try to take photos of the related damage.
with efficient brass finned air side heat exchanger, TRANE
At the same time provide actively evidence that damage
patent CHIL water side heat exchanger, and TRANE propri-
is not occurred after the arrival of the goods.
etary Symbio800 control. The compressor circuits are com-
pletely assembled, hermetic packages that are factory-piped, ● N
otify carriers immediately about founded damage,
wired, leak-tested, dehydrated, and tested for proper control check the damage with combination of the carrier. In-
operation before shipment. form TRANE local office at the same time.Please DON’T
repair or install any damaged units before carriers check
Chilled water inlet and outlet openings are covered for ship-
it.
ment. Each compressor has a separate compressor motor
starter. The RTAG series features Trane's exclusive Adaptive ● T
he attachment check. Follow the delivery list, check the
ControlTM logic, which monitors the control variables that accessories and detachable parts, including specifica-
govern the operation of the chiller unit. tions and other documents, and other options which are
placed in electrical control cabinet.If found any missing
For fixed speed compressor unloaders are solenoid actuated
or damaged, please notify the carrier and TRANE local
and oil pressure operated. For variable speed compres-
offices.
sor has one more VFD unloader. Each refrigerant circuit is
provided with filter, electronic expansion valve, and charging
valves. Storage
Variable speed compressor installation has requirement Extended storage of the outdoor unit prior to installation
about elevation, temperature and relative humidity. Elevation requires the following pre-cautionary measures:
should be lower than 1000 meter; temperature should be
within the range of -18°C ~ +52°C; relative humidity should ● Store the outdoor unit in a secure area.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 13
Overview
● A
t least every three months (quarterly), check the pres-
sure in the refrigerant circuits to verify that the refrigerant
charge is intact. If it is not, contact a qualified service
organization and the appropriate Trane sales office.
Unit Identification - Nameplates

RTAG nameplates: unit nameplate, compressor name-plate,
evaporator nameplate and oil separator nameplate.
RTAG nameplate stick on the outer surface of the control
panel, compressor nameplate stick on the compressor hous-
ing, evaporator nameplate stick on the heat exchanger shell,
where its insulation has been open to look at it, oil separator
nameplate stick on oil separator shell.
Unit Nameplate Figure 1. Unit Nameplate
Unit nameplate include following information, as Figure 1

Unit Nameplate: Compressor nameplate
● Compressor model number.
● Model number
● Compressor serial number.
● Serial number
● Compressor electrical characteristics.
● Nominal tonnage
● Utilization range.
● Compressor quantity
● Recommended refrigerant
● Fan quantity
● Rated Voltage / frequency / phase
● Rated power
● Refrigerant charge and type
● Oil charge and type
● Unit weight
● Unit dimension
14 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Overview
General Data
Table 1. General data - 100 - 205 Ton 50Hz Unit - High efficiency (fixed speed fan)
Model RTAG 100 125 145 155 170 190 205
Refrigerant R134a
Compressor
CHHW CHHP CHHP CHHW(N5) CHHW CHHW CHHW
Model
(N6) (M2+L2) (M2+M2) +CHHP(M2) (N5+N5) (N6+N5) (N6+N6)
Type Horizontal semienclosed screw compressor
Starter YDEL
Circuits 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 30% 15% 15% 15% 15% 15% 15%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 240 166 166 201 201 240 240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A - 116 166 166 201 201 240
Evaporator
Type Shell & Tube (CHIL)
Rating flow gpm 257.7 323.7 374.7 403.2 436.6 479.5 517.1
Rating WPD psid 6.2 5.6 7.5 7.3 5.7 6.8 6.2
Min flow gpm 130 174 174 200 230 230 265
Max flow gpm 476 625 625 731 835 835 956
Water storage lb 119 157 157 183 207 207 238
tube size inch 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
Air side heat exchanger
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 6 8 8 8 8 10 10
power kW/per 1.5
Fan speed RPM 950
Single fan Airflow CFM 10,584
Unit Max RLA(Max Compr+Fan+Control)
Control panel 1 A 269 319 369 405 441 489 528
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 406 371 413 513 543 576 609
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 207 176 168 168 168 179 181
ckt 2 lb - 137 168 168 168 179 181
Oil charge (the oil type show on unit nameplate)
ckt 1 gal 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
ckt 2 gal - 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
Dimension
Length inch 151 198 198 198 198 244 244
Width inch 88.4
Height inch 98.5
Weight - Non Copper Fin
Shipping weight lb 6,184 8,426 9,105 9,202 9,570 10,360 10,578
Operation weight lb 6,526 8,920 9,621 9,747 10,146 10,959 11,211
Weight - Copper Fin
Shipping weight lb 6,885 9,687 10,692 10,789 11,158 11,936 12,154
Operation weight lb 7,227 10,181 11,208 11,334 11,733 12,535 12,787
Note:
1. Data Containing : Temperature of Inlet/outlet : 54/44 oF, Ambient Temperature: 95oF, Scaling factor: 0.001 ft2⋅oF⋅h/Btu.
2. Minimum start-up / operating ambient based on a 5 mph wind across the condenser.
3. Detail components structure / location please see Dimension sector.
4. Electric type could be selected according to unit voltage, but the current value in table is based on 380V/50Hz/3Ph.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 15
Overview
Table 2. General data - 085 - 205 Ton 50Hz Unit - Extra efficiency (fixed speed fan)
Model RTAG 085 100 125 145 155 170 190 205
Refrigerant R134a
Compressor
CHHW CHHW CHHP CHHP CHHW(N5) CHHW CHHW CHHW
Model
(N5) (N6) (M2+L2) (M2+M2) +CHHP(M2) (N5+N5) (N6+N5) (N6+N6)
Starter YDEL
Circuits 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 30% 30% 15% 15% 15% 15% 15% 15%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 201 240 166 166 201 201 240 240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A - - 116 166 166 201 201 240
Evaporator
Rating flow gpm 222 267 335.3 388.1 418.1 452.7 492.4 535.2
Rating WPD psid 5.3 6.3 4.3 6.5 6.7 5.8 6.8 5.3
Min flow gpm 120 130 190 190 200 230 230 290
Max flow gpm 430 476 685 685 731 835 835 1049
Water storage lb 108 119 170 170 183 207 207 262
tube size inch 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 6 6 10 10 10 10 12 12
power kW/per 1.5
Fan speed RPM 950
Control panel 1 A 230 269 327 377 413 449 496 536
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 373 406 371 413 513 543 576 609
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 207 220 196 187 187 187 198 201
ckt 2 lb - - 157 187 187 187 198 201
ckt 1 gal 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
ckt 2 gal - - 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
Dimension
Length inch 151 151 244 248 248 248 291 291
Width inch 88.4
Height inch 98.5
Shipping weight lb 6,041 6,415 9,405 10,161 10,245 10,613 11,114 11,354
Operation weight lb 6,367 6,766 9,954 10,732 10,829 11,228 11,753 12,050
Weight - Copper Fin
Note:
16 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Overview
Table 3. General data - 085 - 205 Ton 50Hz Unit - Premium seasonal efficiency (variable speed fan)
Model RTAG 085 100 125 145 155 170 190 205
Refrigerant R134a
Compressor
CHHW CHHW CHHP CHHP CHHW(N5) CHHW CHHW CHHW
Model
(N5) (N6) (M2+L2) (M2+M2) +CHHP(M2) (N5+N5) (N6+N5) (N6+N6)
Starter VFD
Circuits 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 36% 36% 18% 18% 18% 18% 18% 18%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 201 240 166 166 201 201 240 240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A - 116 166 166 201 201 240
Evaporator
Rating flow gpm 218 261 335.3 388.3 413.9 443.6 483.3 524.4
Rating WPD psid 5.3 6.3 5.1 6.8 6.9 5.9 6.9 5.3
Min flow gpm 120 130 190 190 200 230 230 290
Max flow gpm 430 475 685 685 730 835 835 1050
Water storage lb 108 118 171 171 182 208 208 263
tube size inch 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 6 6 10 10 10 10 12 12
power kW/per 1.5
Fan speed RPM Max. 910/Min. 200
Control panel 1 A 230 269 326 377 413 449 496 535
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 195 269 326 377 413 449 496 535
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 207 220 196 187 187 187 198 201
ckt 2 lb - 157 187 187 187 198 201
ckt 1 gal 2.1 2.1 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
ckt 2 gal - - 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
Dimension
Length inch 156 156 249 249 249 249 296 296
Width inch 88.4
Height inch 98.5
Weight - Copper Fin
Note:
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 17
Overview
Table 4. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz Unit - High efficiency (fixed speed fan)
Model RTAG 225 255 285 310 340 375 400 440
Refrigerant R134a R134a/R513A R134a R134a R134a/R513A R134a
Compressor
CHHW CHHW
CHHW (N5, CHHW (N5, CHHW (N6, N6 CHHW (N6E2, CHHW (N5, N6 CHHW (N6,N6
Model (N6E2 + (N6E2,N6E2 +
N5 + N5 ) N6 + N6 ) + N6E2) N6E2 + N6E2) + N5, N6 ) + N6,N6)
N6E2) N6E2,N6E2)
Starter YDEL
Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 15% 10% 10% 10% 10% 7.5% 7.5% 7.5%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 240/- 201/201 201/240 240/240 240/240 201/240 240/240 240/240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A 240/- 201/- 240/- 240/- 240/- 201/240 240/240 240/240
Evaporator
Rating flow gpm 584 663 750 829 872 973 1,045 1,163
Rating WPD psid 6.45 7.12 7.25 7.06 7.78 7.56 7.17 5.86
Min flow gpm 292 332 375 415 436 487 522 581
Max flow gpm 877 995 1,125 1,244 1,308 1,460 1,567 1,744
Water storage lb 263 234 265 301 301 332 369 455
tube size inch 6 8
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 12 14 14 16 16 18 18 20
power kW/per 1.5 1.65
Fan speed RPM 950 970
Single fan Airflow CFM 10,584 11,772
Control panel 1 A 536 445 493 542 542 493 533 537
Control panel 2 A - 226 270 270 270 493 533 537
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 753 631 714 753 753 714 747 747
Control panel 2 A - 441 524 524 524 708 741 747
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 216 309 309 348 384 326 326 403
ckt 2 lb 216 152 152 165 165 326 326 403
ckt 1 gal 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
ckt 2 gal 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2
Dimension
Length inch 291 354 354 399 399 445 445 465
Width inch 88.4
Height inch 98.5 97.6
Weight - Copper Fin
Note:
18 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Overview
Table 5. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz Unit - Extra efficiency (fixed speed fan)
Model RTAG 225 255 285 310 340 375 400 410 440
Refrigerant R134a R134a/R513A R134a R134a R134a/R513A R134a
Compressor
CHHW CHHW CHHW (N5, CHHW CHHW CHHW
CHHW (N5, CHHW (N5, CHHW (N6,
Model (N6E2 + (N6E2, N6E2 N6 + N5, (N6,N6 + (N6,N6 + (N6E2,N6E2 +
N5 + N5 ) N6 + N6 ) N6 + N6E2)
N6E2) + N6E2) N6 ) N6,N6) N6,N6) N6E2,N6E2)
Starter YDEL
Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 15% 10% 10% 10% 10% 7.5% 7.5% 7.5% 7.5%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 240/- 201/201 201/240 240/240 240/240 201/240 240/240 240/240 240/240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A 240/- 201/- 240/- 240/- 240/- 201/240 240/240 240/240 240/240
Evaporator
Rating flow gpm 597 677 777 842 892 992 1,066 1,098 11,90
Rating WPD psid 5.68 7.42 7.76 7.27 8.14 6.48 6.35 6.73 6.14
Min flow gpm 298 339 388 421 446 496 533 549 595
Max flow gpm 895 1,016 1,165 1,263 1,338 1,488 1,598 1,647 1,785
Water storage lb 289 234 265 301 301 369 403 403 455
tube size inch 6 8
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 14 16 18 18 20 20 20 24 24
power kW/per 1.5 1.65
Fan speed RPM 950 970
Single fan Airflow CFM 10,584 11,772
Control panel 1 A 543 453 507 547 556 498 537 547 547
Control panel 2 A - 226 275 275 275 498 537 547 547
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 759 637 720 753 759 717 747 753 753
Control panel 2 A - 441 530 530 530 717 747 753 753
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 229 344 364 366 437 368 368 384 445
ckt 2 lb 229 152 170 183 181 368 368 384 445
ckt 1 gal 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
ckt 2 gal 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
Dimension
Length inch 339 399 445 445 465 465 465 585 585
Width inch 88.4
Shipping weight lb 13,076 16,965 18,250 18,439 19,121 22,007 22,291 23,808 24,943
Operation weight lb 13,364 17,198 18,514 18,742 19,423 22,375 22,694 24,211 25,397
Weight - Copper Fin
Shipping weight lb 15,280 19,484 21,085 21,275 22,271 25,973 26,257 27,589 29,703
Operation weight lb 15,569 19,718 21,350 21,577 22,573 26,341 26,661 27,992 30,157
Note:
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 19
Overview
Table 6. General data - 225 - 440 Ton 50Hz Unit - Premium seasonal efficiency (variable speed fan)
Model RTAG 225 230 255 285 310 340 375 400 420 440
Refrigerant R134a R134a R134a/R513A R134a R134a R134a/R513A R134a
Compressor
CHHW
CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW CHHW
(N6E2,
Model (N6E2 + (N6E2 + (N5, N5 + (N5, N6 + (N6, N6 + (N5, N6 + (N6,N6 + (N6,N6 + (N6E2,N6E2 +
N6E2 +
N6E2) N6E2) N5 ) N6 ) N6E2) N5, N6 ) N6,N6) N6,N6) N6E2,N6E2)
N6E2)
Starter VFD
Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 18% 18% 12% 12% 12% 12% 9% 9% 9% 9%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 240/- 240/- 201/201 201/240 240/240 240/240 201/240 240/240 240/240 240/240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A 240/- 240/- 201/- 240/- 240/- 240/- 201/240 240/240 240/240 240/240
Evaporator
Rating flow gpm 584 597 652 743 822 865 967 1037 999.8 1155
Rating WPD psid 6.45 5.7 6.89 7.12 6.94 7.66 7.46 7.06 5.6 5.78
Min flow gpm 292 298 326 372 411 432 483 518 548.5 577
Max flow gpm 877 895 978 1115 1233 1297 1450 1555 1647 1732
Water storage lb 263 289 234 265 301 301 332 369 455 455
tube size inch 6 8
Fan type Axial flow
Quantity 12 14 14 14 16 16 18 18 24 20
power kW/per 1.5 1.65 2.8 1.65
Fan speed RPM 910/200 970 / 200 970 / 200 970 / 200
Single fan Airflow CFM 10,036 11,772 13,529 11,772
Control panel 1 A 536 543 445 493 542 542 493 533 570 537
Control panel 2 A - - 226 270 270 270 493 533 570 537
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 546 462 631 670 753 753 631 747 764 747
Control panel 2 A - - 226 226 226 226 631 747 764 747
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 216 229 309 309 348 384 326 326 445 403
ckt 2 lb 216 229 152 152 165 165 326 326 445 403
ckt 1 gal 2.1 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
ckt 2 gal 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
Dimension
Length inch 296 343 362 362 408 408 455 455 465 465
Width inch 88.4
Shipping weight lb 12,641 14,134 16,471 16,956 18,470 18,506 21,081 21,411 24,866 22,921
Operation weight lb 12,904 14,423 16,705 17,220 18,772 18,808 21,414 21,779 25,269 23,376
Weight - Copper Fin
Shipping weight lb 14,533 16,338 18,675 19,160 20,990 21,026 23,916 24,246 29,626 26,888
Operation weight lb 14,795 16,627 18,909 19,425 21,292 21,328 24,249 24,615 30,029 27,342
Note:
20 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Overview
Table 7. General data - 125 - 205 Ton 50Hz Unit - Standard seasonal efficiency (variable speed fan)
Model RTAG 125 145 155 170 190 205

Refrigerant R134a
Compressor
CHHP CHHP CHHW(N5) CHHW CHHW CHHW
Model
(M2+L2) (M2+M2) +CHHP(M2) (N5+N5) (N6+N5) (N6+N6)
Starter VFD
Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Min load % 18% 18% 18% 18% 18% 18%
Must hold current(1A/1B) A 166 166 201 201 240 240
Must hold current(2A/2B) A 116 166 166 201 201 240
Evaporator
Type
Rating flow gpm 323.7 374.7 403.2 436.6 479.5 517.1
Rating WPD psid 5.6 7.5 7.3 5.7 6.8 6.2
Min flow gpm 174 174 200 230 230 265
Max flow gpm 625 625 731 835 835 956
Water storage lb 157 157 183 207 207 238
tube size inch 5 5 5 6 6 6
Fan type
Quantity 8 8 8 8 10 10
power kW/per 1.5
Fan speed RPM 910/200
Control panel 1 A 319 369 405 441 489 528
Unit start up amps
Control panel 1 A 285 327 357 387 420 453
Refrigerant charge
ckt 1 lb 176 168 168 168 179 181
ckt 2 lb 137 168 168 168 179 181
ckt 1 gal 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
ckt 2 gal 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.1 2.1 2.1
Dimension
Length inch 203 203 203 203 249 240
Width inch 88.4
Height inch 98.5
Shipping weight lb 9,264 9,943 10,040 10,408 11,197 11,416
Operation weight lb 9,758 10,459 10,584 10,984 11,796 12,049
Weight - Copper Fin
Shipping weight lb 10,525 11,530 11,627 11,995 12,774 12,992
Operation weight lb 11,019 12,046 12,172 12,571 13,373 13,625
Note:
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 21
Dimension
L L
H1 H2 W1 W2 L1 L2 Water (High and (Premium
Water box
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) pipe Extra eff) seasonal eff)
(mm) (mm)
RTAG 085 X 150PSI 468 478 1252 992 3619 3619 4” 3840 3970
RTAG 085 P 300PSI 443 508 1233 1013 3813 3713 4” 3840 3970
150PSI 468 478 1252 992 3619 3619 4" 3840 ---
RTAG 100 H
300PSI 443 508 1233 1013 3813 3713 4" 3840 ---
RTAG 100 X 150PSI 468 478 1252 992 3619 3619 4" 3840 3970
RTAG 100 P 300PSI 443 508 1233 1013 3813 3713 4" 3840 3970
Figure 2. Dimension- RTAG 100 High, 085/100 Extra/Premium efficiency unit
22 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
L
L
H1 H2 W1 W2 L1 L2 Water (Standard
Water box (High eff)
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) pipe Seasonal eff)
(mm)
(mm)
RTAG 125 H
RTAG 145 H 150PSI 492 500 1260 985 3905 3905 5" 5020 5150
RTAG 155 H
RTAG 125 S
RTAG 145 S 300PSI 492 500 1260 985 4249 4099 5" 5020 5150
RTAG 155 S
RTAG 170 H 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 5" 5020 5150
RTAG 170 S 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 5" 5020 5150
Figure 3. Dimension - RTAG 125/145/155/170 High/Standard efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 23
Dimension
L L
Water box
(mm) (mm)
RTAG 125 X 150PSI 492 500 1260 985 3905 3905 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 125 P 300PSI 492 500 1260 985 4249 4099 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 145 X 150PSI 492 500 1260 985 3905 3905 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 145 P 300PSI 492 500 1260 985 4249 4099 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 155 X 150PSI 492 500 1260 985 3905 3905 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 155 P 300PSI 492 500 1260 985 4249 4099 5" 6200 6330
RTAG 170 X 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 6200 6330
RTAG 170 P 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 6200 6330
RTAG 190 H 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 6200 6330
RTAG 190 S 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 6200 6330
RTAG 205 H 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 6200 6330
RTAG 205 S 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 6200 6330
Figure 4. Dimension- RTAG 125/145/155/170 Extra/Premium , 190/205 High/Standard efficiency unit
24 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
L L
Water box
(mm) (mm)
RTAG 190 X 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 7380 7510
RTAG 190 P 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 7380 7510
RTAG 205 X 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 7380 7510
RTAG 205 P 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 7380 7510
RTAG 225 H 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 3938 3938 6" 7380 7510
RTAG 225 P 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 4250 4100 6" 7380 7510
Figure 5. Dimension - RTAG 190/205/225 Extra/Premium efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 25
Dimension
H1 H2 W1 W2 L1 L2 L
Water box Water pipe
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
RTAG 225 X 150PSI 450 465 1275 970 5118 5118 6" 8600
RTAG 230 P 300PSI 450 465 1275 970 5430 5280 6" 8730
Figure 6. Dimension - RTAG 225/230 Extra/Premium efficiency unit
26 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
L L
H1 W1 L1 L2 (High and (Premium
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) Extra eff) seasonal eff)
(mm) (mm)
150PSI 450 1120 2698 1593 6" 8995 ---
RTAG 255H
300PSI 450 1120 2447 1343 6" 8995 ---
150PSI 450 1120 2698 1593 6" 8995 ---
RTAG 285 H
300PSI 450 1120 2447 1343 6" 8995 ---
150PSI 450 1120 2698 1593 6" --- 9210
RTAG 255 P
300PSI 450 1120 2447 1343 6" --- 9210
150PSI 450 1120 2698 1593 6" --- 9210
RTAG 285 P
300PSI 450 1120 2447 1343 6" --- 9210
Figure 7. Dimension - RTAG 255/285 High/Premium efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 27
Dimension
L L
(mm) (mm)
150PSI 450 1120 3877 1593 6" 10130 ---
RTAG 255 X
300PSI 450 1120 3627 1343 6" 10130 ---
RTAG 310 H 150PSI 450 1120 3877 1593 6" 10130 10390
RTAG 310 P 300PSI 450 1120 3627 1343 6" 10130 10390
RTAG 340 H 150PSI 450 1120 3877 1593 6" 10130 10390
RTAG 340 P 300PSI 450 1120 3627 1343 6" 10130 10390
Figure 8. Dimension - RTAG 255 Extra, 310/340 High/Premium efficiency unit
28 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
H1 W1 L1 L2 L
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
RTAG 285 X 150PSI 450 1120 5058 1593 6" 11310

RTAG 310 X 300PSI 450 1120 4807 1343 6" 11310
Figure 9. Dimension - RTAG 285/310 Extra efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 29
Dimension
H1 W1 L1 L2
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
150PSI 450 1120 4758 2473 6"
RTAG 340 X
300PSI 450 1120 4508 2222 6"
Figure 10. Dimension - RTAG 340 Extra efficiency unit
30 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
L L
(mm) (mm)
RTAG 375 H 150PSI 453 1120 3882 2703 8" 11310 11560
RTAG 375 P 300PSI 453 1120 3647 2469 8" 11310 11560
RTAG 400 H 150PSI 453 1120 3882 2703 8" 11310 11560
RTAG 400 P 300PSI 453 1120 3647 2469 8" 11310 11560
Figure 11. Dimension - RTAG 375/400 High/ Premium efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 31
Dimension
L L
(mm) (mm)
150PSI 453 1120 3582 3582 8" 11810 ---
RTAG 375 X
300PSI 453 1120 3348 3348 8" 11810 ---
150PSI 453 1120 3582 3582 8" 11810 ---

RTAG 400 X
300PSI 453 1120 3348 3348 8" 11810 ---
RTAG 440 H 150PSI 453 1120 3582 3582 8" 11810 11810
RTAG 440 P 300PSI 453 1120 3348 3348 8" 11810 11810
Figure 12. Dimension - RTAG 375/400 Extra, 440 High/Premium efficiency unit
32 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Dimension
H1 W1 L1 L2
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
150PSI 453 1120 5062 5062 8"
RTAG 410 X
300PSI 453 1120 4828 4828 8"
150PSI 453 1120 5062 5062 8"
RTAG 420 P
300PSI 453 1120 4828 4828 8"
150PSI 453 1120 5062 5062 8"
RTAG 440 X
300PSI 453 1120 4828 4828 8"
Figure 13. Dimension - RTAG 410/440 Extra, 420 Premium efficiency unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 33
Installation - Mechanical
Installation Responsibilities
Table 8. Installation Resposibilities
Type Trane Provide Trane Provide Field Provide

Trane install Field install Field install
Base • Meet the requirements of installation base
Lifting • Safety chain,u -joint adapter,hanging beam
Isolator • Rubber isolator(option)
Electrical • T
erminal block connection,- • The circuit breaker or fuse way switch (option)
mech disconnect switch and • Electric line to connect the unit starter
circuit breaker(option,premi- • Wire specifications follow the requirement of NEC standard and unit
um unit only have last two attachments
type) • Terminal box
• Control panel • Ground wire
• Bas wiring (optional)
• The control voltage wiring
• Chilled water pump contactor and wiring, including interlock
• Optional relay and wiring
Water pipe • V
end point and purge valve • Water flow switch(option, • Pressure gauge and coupling on water pipe
on water box attached) • Temperature sensor
• Filter
• Hose
• Globe valve and balance valve on water pipe
• Drain pipe:connect to water box
• Water pipe insulation
• Water pipe support
Relief valve • D
ual-relief valve or single
relief valve(option)
Insulation • Unit insulation • External water pipe insulation
Attention Items evaporator.

● Provide all connection electric wire.
Pre-installation, the contractor must realize the following
items: ● Install evaporator heater and separated water pipe and
other parts, make sure unit can run at low ambient tem-
● Build a sufficient bearing rigidity, smooth installation plat-
perature.
form as Figure 14, to support the equipment operation
weight.
● If unit is shipped by container, unit will be equipped with
several nylon pads under the base,which can protect the
base from wear during transportation. Be sure to remove
these nylon pads before installation.
● After the unit is in place, adjust the levelness of unit, the
levelness deviation must be controlled within 6.0 mm
(1/4 "). Trane company is not responsible for the equip-
ment problem caused by the unreasonable foundation
design.
● Suggest to leave enough space for coil cleaning. Install
the attached sensor and connect to Symbio800.
● Contractor must provide flow switch or differential pres-
sure switch which could interlock with water pump to
make sure system water flow.
● Install drain valve at bottom of evaporator water box.
Install vent valve at top of evaporator water box.
● Install filter and flow switch at inlet of water pump and
34 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
● Close the discharge and liquid line isolation valves.
Note: Report any damage incurred during handling or

installation to the Trane sales office immediately.
Clearance
Provide enough space around the outdoor unit to allow the
installation and maintenance personnel unrestricted access
to all service points. Refer to submittal drawings for the unit
dimensions. A minimum of 4 feet (1.2 m) is recommended
for compressor service. Provide sufficient clearance for the
opening of control panel doors. Refer to Figure 15 for min-
imum clearances. In all cases, local codes which require
additional clearances will take precedence over these rec-
ommendations.
Unobstructed flow of condenser air is essential to maintain
chiller capacity and operating efficiency. When determin-
ing unit placement, give careful consideration to assuring
Unit Tonnage Efficiency L (mm)
High 3880 a sufficient flow of air across the condenser heat transfer
085; 100 Extra 3880 surface. Two detrimental conditions are possible and must
Premium 4010 be avoided if optimum performance is to be achieved: warm
125; 145; 155; 170 High 5060
air recirculation and coil starvation.
High 6240
190; 205
Standard 6370 Warm air recirculation occurs when discharge air from the
Extra 6240
125; 145; 155; 170 condenser fans is recycled back to the condenser coil inlet.
Premium 6370
Extra 7420
Coil starvation occurs when free airflow to (or from) the con-
190; 205 denser is restricted.
Premium 7550
High 7420
225
Premium 7550
Both warm air recirculation and coil starvation cause re-
225 Extra 8640 duction in unit efficiency and capacity due to the in-creased
230 Premium 8770 head pressures.
High 9035
255; 285
Premium 9250 Debris, trash, supplies etc. should not be allowed to ac-cu-
255 Extra 10170 mulate in the vicinity of the unit. Supply air movement may
High 10170 draw debris into the condenser coil, blocking spaces be-
310; 340
Premium 10430
tween coil fins and causing coil starvation. Special consid-
285; 310 Extra 11350
340 Extra 11850 eration should be given to low ambient units. Condenser
High 11350 coils and fan discharge must be kept free of snow or other
375; 400
Premium 11600 obstructions to permit adequate airflow for satisfactory unit
375; 400 Extra 11850
operation.
High 11850
440
Premium 11850 In situations where equipment must be installed with less
410; 440 Extra 14860
clearance than recommended, such as frequently occurs in
420 Premium 11860
retrofit and rooftop applications, restricted air flow is com-
Figure 14. Installation platform mon. The Main Processor will direct the unit to make as
much chilled water as possible given the actual installed con-
ditions. Consult your Trane sales engineer for more details.
Storage Requirement
If unit will be stored before installation,please follow require-
ment below:
● Store the outdoor unit in a secure area.
● At least every three months (quarterly), check the pres-
sure in the refrigerant circuits to verify that the refrigerant
charge is intact. If it is not, contact a qualified service
organization and the appropriate Trane sales office.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 35
Working clearance per National

Electric Code Article 110-26
No obstructions recommended. Area required for

unit operation, maintenance, access panel, and X(1)
1219mm
airflow. Tube Removal Clearance Area
(Non Control Panel End)
TD7 side
2250 mm
1100 mm
No obstructions recommended. Area required for

unit operation, maintenance, access panel, and 1219mm(2)
airflow.
Note:
1.Tube removal clearance area (recommend the side far from operation interface), please keep enough space for tube removal:
NTON<=225ton tech tube length is 2200mm, NTON> 225ton tech tube length is 4000mm, and need remove the control panel at this side.
2.if coil box need hoisted out from the side for maintenance, please leave a space of 2250mm for maintenance.
Figure 15. Installation clearance
NOTICE Unit Lifting

No block above unit vent and no ventilating duct.Make Please read unit lifting label before any operation:
sure there isn't any heat cource within 5 meter distance
of the unit, such as air compressor exhause duct, boil- 1.Only lifting unit at unit marked position,Do not fork lift unit.
er and so on. The inlet air temperature shall not exceed Lifting must use the corresponding appliance, refer to Fig-
the unit selection of condenser temperature range. ure 16 ~ Figure 18.
If the installation filed is limited, can not meet the 2.Lifting chains/cables will not be the same length. Adjust to
min-inum service room, or the unit surrounding and top keep unit level while lifting. The minimum lifting Angle (Angle
have wall or other blocks, please contract Trane local
between the sling and the horizontal plane) is 60°. follow the
agency, to make sure it is feasible.
Figure 16, Figure 17, Figure 18 and Table 9,Table 10.
Drainage 3.Make sure each cord and lifting plug capability is bigger
than unit shipping weight.
Provide a large capacity drain for water vessel drain-down
during shutdown or repair. The evaporator is provided with a 4.Protect the coil surface to avoid fin damage during lifting
drain connection. All local and national codes apply. The vent 5.Lifting carefully, raising unit slowly and stable, no vibration
on the top of the evaporator water-box is provided to prevent and tilt.
a vacuum by allowing air into the evaporator for complete
drainage 6.Remove the lifting instrument after unit take its the place
CAUTION !
Electrical Dangrous !
No ponding in installation field, make sure the drain
pipe is unobstructed to avoid water entering the control
panel, and damage the unit or lead to electric leack-
age,and people injury or death.
In heavy snowflow region or long-term ambient tem-
perature below 0oC region, must raise the unit to avoid
the snows..
36 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
G,H (H at opposite)
C,D (D at opposite)
E,F (F at opposite)
Y
C,D (D at opposite)
A,B (B at opposite) Y
X
A,B (B at opposite)
X
Z
Z
Figure 16. Unit lifting schematic (4 points) Figure 18. Unit lifting schematic (8 points)
E,F (F at opposite)
C,D (D at opposite)
Y
A,B (B at opposite)
X
Figure 17. Unit lifting schematic (6 points)
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 37
Table 9. Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions - Non-copper fins
A B C D E F G H Shipping Xcg Ycg Zcg

Tonnage Efficiency
(kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) weight (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm)
100 High 911 580 751 564 - - - - 2805 1789 914 -911
125 High 1080 828 887 1027 - - - - 3822 2394 944 -1085
145 High 1117 878 950 1185 - - - - 4130 2443 946 -1117
155 High 1139 885 960 1190 - - - - 4174 2438 941 -1111
170 High 1173 917 999 1251 - - - - 4341 2449 926 -1117
190 High 826 613 925 994 640 701 - - 4699 2711 941 -1100
205 High 832 617 943 1043 646 718 - - 4798 2718 933 -1109
085 Extra 875 571 735 559 - - - - 2740 1796 924 -922
100 Extra 933 601 782 594 - - - - 2910 1797 935 -918
125 Extra 764 590 822 825 619 646 - - 4266 2708 984 -1080
145 Extra 784 608 871 955 670 721 - - 4609 2749 987 -1108
155 Extra 800 611 885 960 670 721 - - 4647 2742 983 -1103
170 Extra 823 628 925 1014 683 742 - - 4814 2741 968 -1108
190 Extra 775 555 1096 1216 690 709 - - 5041 3029 995 -1101
205 Extra 780 561 1122 1276 691 720 - - 5150 3029 985 -1110
085 Premium 1053 749 696 521 - - - - 3020 1639 929 -940
100 Premium 1112 779 744 556 - - - - 3190 1677 923 -943
125 Premium 994 817 796 800 606 634 - - 4646 2497 972 -1082
145 Premium 1013 833 846 931 657 709 - - 4989 2550 976 -1107
155 Premium 1027 837 861 936 657 709 - - 5027 2545 971 -1103
170 Premium 1049 854 899 992 670 730 - - 5194 2550 958 -1108
190 Premium 1009 779 1068 1188 678 699 - - 5421 2824 994 -1100
205 Premium 1015 782 1093 1248 683 710 - - 5530 2828 985 -1108
125 SSE 1306 1047 857 992 - - - - 4202 2186 948 -1077
145 SSE 1343 1098 920 1149 - - - - 4510 2245 949 -1106
155 SSE 1365 1104 930 1154 - - - - 4554 2242 945 -1101
170 SSE 1398 1136 970 1216 - - - - 4721 2259 931 -1106
190 SSE 1054 835 895 983 628 683 - - 5079 2517 933 -1092
205 SSE 1060 839 914 1031 634 700 - - 5178 2527 925 -1101
225 High 801 581 1168 1321 728 754 - - 5354 3030 982 -1112
255 High 841 1109 1205 1064 651 885 560 806 7121 4292 925 -1214
285 High 860 1154 1228 1093 673 925 572 836 7341 4299 923 -1221
310 High 598 742 1518 1504 785 913 816 1152 8028 5142 952 -1201
340 High 600 744 1520 1506 787 915 818 1154 8044 5142 952 -1201
375 High 926 1171 1407 1325 1004 1170 1244 964 9212 5882 939 -1126
400 High 934 1178 1449 1344 1018 1205 1255 980 9362 5885 933 -1126
440 High 1143 1465 1341 1155 1176 1320 1441 1155 10197 5893 973 -1120
225 Extra 308 350 1239 952 954 1268 440 419 5931 3858 988 -1129
255 Extra 588 721 1432 1428 754 880 791 1101 7695 5141 955 -1201
285 Extra 779 914 1323 1418 794 867 889 1294 8278 6006 1005 -1214
310 Extra 780 915 1362 1435 808 871 896 1296 8364 5999 1001 -1208
340 Extra 792 971 1414 1455 732 831 1042 1434 8673 6039 1004 -1210
375 Extra 1125 1450 1293 1130 1150 1270 1426 1138 9982 5893 981 -1120
400 Extra 1134 1456 1330 1142 1162 1308 1432 1147 10111 5893 973 -1120
410 Extra 1192 1457 1410 1340 1327 1426 1435 1213 10799 7357 1012 -1120
440 Extra 1285 1504 1484 1384 1400 1468 1530 1260 11314 7357 1032 -1120
225 Premium 1036 805 1140 1293 717 744 - - 5734 2840 982 -1110
230 Premium 308 350 1239 952 954 1268 440 419 5931 3858 988 -1129
255 Premium 942 1211 1190 1049 628 863 673 916 7471 4297 913 -1209
285 Premium 960 1255 1213 1079 650 903 684 946 7691 4304 912 -1217
310 Premium 712 860 1494 1477 774 901 913 1249 8378 5136 943 -1198
340 Premium 714 862 1496 1479 776 903 915 1251 8394 5136 943 -1198
375 Premium 1029 1277 1386 1313 1000 1159 1342 1057 9562 5871 930 -1126
400 Premium 1036 1283 1435 1331 1007 1194 1353 1074 9712 5875 924 -1126
420 Premium 1238 1500 1343 1574 1561 1360 1471 1266 11279 7357 1030 -1117
440 Premium 1205 1530 1330 1140 1159 1306 1507 1219 10397 5893 964 -1120
225 Premium-H* 1056 825 1140 1293 737 764 - - 5814 2840 982 -1110
310 Premium-H* 712 860 1494 1477 774 901 933 1269 8418 5136 943 -1198
340 Premium-H* 734 882 1496 1479 776 903 935 1271 8474 5136 943 -1198
440 Premium-H* 1348 1554 1319 1168 1184 1291 1532 1362 10757 5893 964 -1120
Premium-H* premium units with VFD High temperature starter type
38 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Table 10. Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions - Copper fins
A B C D E F G H Shipping Xcg Ycg Zcg

Tonnage Efficiency
(kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) weight (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm)
100 High 990 659 830 644 - - - - 3123 1789 914 -911
125 High 1223 971 1030 1170 - - - - 4394 2394 944 -1085
145 High 1297 1058 1130 1365 - - - - 4850 2443 946 -1117
155 High 1319 1065 1140 1370 - - - - 4894 2438 941 -1111
170 High 1353 1097 1179 1431 - - - - 5061 2449 926 -1117
190 High 945 732 1044 1113 759 821 - - 5414 2711 941 -1100
205 High 951 736 1062 1162 765 837 - - 5513 2718 933 -1109
085 Extra 955 651 815 639 - - - - 3058 1796 924 -922
100 Extra 1041 708 889 701 - - - - 3339 1797 935 -918
125 Extra 883 709 941 944 739 765 - - 4981 2708 984 -1080
145 Extra 934 758 1021 1105 820 871 - - 5509 2749 987 -1108
155 Extra 950 761 1035 1110 820 871 - - 5547 2742 983 -1103
170 Extra 973 778 1075 1164 833 892 - - 5714 2741 968 -1108
190 Extra 918 698 1239 1359 833 852 - - 5899 3029 995 -1101
205 Extra 923 704 1265 1419 834 863 - - 6008 3029 985 -1110
085 Premium 1133 829 776 601 - - - - 3337 1639 929 -940
100 Premium 1219 886 851 663 - - - - 3619 1677 923 -943
125 Premium 1113 936 915 919 725 753 - - 5361 2497 972 -1082
145 Premium 1163 983 996 1081 807 859 - - 5889 2550 976 -1107
155 Premium 1177 987 1011 1086 807 859 - - 5927 2545 971 -1103
170 Premium 1199 1004 1049 1142 820 880 - - 6094 2550 958 -1108
190 Premium 1152 922 1211 1331 821 842 - - 6279 2824 994 -1100
205 Premium 1158 925 1236 1391 826 853 - - 6388 2828 985 -1108
125 SSE 1449 1190 1000 1135 - - - - 4774 2186 948 -1077
145 SSE 1523 1278 1100 1329 - - - - 5230 2245 949 -1106
155 SSE 1545 1284 1110 1334 - - - - 5273 2242 945 -1101
170 SSE 1578 1316 1150 1396 - - - - 5441 2259 931 -1106
190 SSE 1173 955 1015 1102 747 803 - - 5794 2517 933 -1092
205 SSE 1179 958 1033 1150 754 819 - - 5893 2527 925 -1101
225 High 944 724 1311 1464 871 897 - - 6212 3030 982 -1112
255 High 966 1234 1330 1189 776 1010 686 931 8122 4292 925 -1214
285 High 985 1279 1353 1219 798 1050 697 961 8342 4299 923 -1221
310 High 741 885 1661 1647 928 1056 959 1295 9172 5142 952 -1201
340 High 743 887 1663 1649 930 1058 961 1297 9188 5142 952 -1201
375 High 1087 1332 1568 1486 1165 1331 1405 1124 10498 5882 939 -1126
400 High 1095 1339 1610 1505 1179 1365 1416 1140 10649 5885 933 -1126
440 High 1368 1690 1566 1380 1401 1545 1666 1380 11997 5893 973 -1120
225 Extra 434 475 1364 1077 1079 1393 566 544 6932 3858 988 -1129
255 Extra 731 864 1575 1571 897 1023 934 1244 8839 5141 955 -1201
285 Extra 940 1075 1483 1579 955 1028 1050 1455 9565 6006 1005 -1214
310 Extra 941 1076 1523 1596 969 1032 1057 1457 9651 5999 1001 -1208
340 Extra 971 1150 1593 1634 911 1010 1220 1613 10102 6039 1004 -1210
375 Extra 1350 1675 1518 1355 1375 1495 1651 1363 11781 5893 981 -1120
400 Extra 1359 1681 1555 1367 1387 1533 1657 1372 11911 5893 973 -1120
410 Extra 1407 1672 1625 1555 1541 1640 1650 1428 12516 7357 1012 -1120
440 Extra 1555 1774 1754 1654 1670 1738 1800 1530 13475 7357 1032 -1120
225 Premium 1179 948 1283 1436 860 887 - - 6592 2840 982 -1110
230 Premium 434 475 1364 1077 1079 1393 566 544 6932 3858 988 -1129
255 Premium 1067 1336 1315 1174 753 988 798 1041 8473 4297 913 -1209
285 Premium 1086 1380 1338 1204 775 1028 809 1072 8692 4304 912 -1217
310 Premium 855 1003 1637 1620 917 1044 1056 1392 9522 5136 943 -1198
340 Premium 857 1005 1639 1622 919 1046 1058 1394 9538 5136 943 -1198
375 Premium 1190 1438 1546 1474 1160 1320 1502 1218 10849 5871 930 -1126
400 Premium 1197 1444 1596 1491 1167 1355 1514 1235 10999 5875 924 -1126
420 Premium 1555 1774 1754 1654 1670 1738 1800 1530 13475 7357 1030 -1117
440 Premium 1430 1755 1555 1365 1384 1531 1732 1444 12197 5893 964 -1120
225 Premium-H* 1199 968 1283 1436 880 907 - - 6673 2840 982 -1110
310 Premium-H* 855 1003 1637 1620 917 1044 1076 1412 9564 5136 943 -1198
340 Premium-H* 877 1025 1639 1622 919 1046 1078 1414 9620 5136 943 -1198
440 Premium-H* 1573 1779 1544 1393 1409 1516 1757 1587 12558 5893 964 -1120
Premium-H* premium units with VFD High temperature starter type
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 39
Isolator Installation
The most effective form of isolation is to locate the unit away
from any sound sensitive area. Structurally transmitted
sound can be reduced by elastomeric vibration eliminators.
Spring isolators are not recommended. Consult an acous-
tical engineer in critical sound applications.For maximum
isolation effect, isolate water lines and electrical conduit.Wall
sleeves and rubber isolated piping hangers can be used to
reduce the sound transmitted through water piping.To reduce
the sound transmitted through electrical conduit, use flexible
electrical conduit. State and local codes on sound emissions
should always be considered. Since the environment in
which a sound source is located affects sound pressure, unit
placement must be carefully evaluated.
The optional isolator is rubber isolator,follow following instal-
lation steps:
1. Install the isolators according to Figure 19 & Table 11
location, and Table 12 & Table 13 isolator selections.
2. Secure the isolators to the mounting surface using the
mounting slots in the isolator base plate according to
Figure 20. Do not fully tighten the isolator mounting
bolts at this time.
3. Align the mounting holes in the base of the unit with the
threaded positioning pins on the top of the isolators.
4. Lower the unit onto the isolators and secure the isola-
tor to the unit with a nut. Maximum isolator deflection
should be 1/4 inch (6 mm).
5. Level the unit carefully. Fully tighten the isolator mount-
ing bolts.
40 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Not for 6 fans

W2 W4 W6 W2 W4 W6 W8
Control panel
Control panel
W1 W3 W5 W1 W3 W5 W7
6 fans & 8 fans isolator location 10 fans isolator location
W2 W4 W6 W8 W10
Control panel
W1 W3 W5 W7 W9
12 fans & 14 fans isolator location
W2 W4 W6 W8 W10 W12
Control panel 1
Control panel 2
W1 W5 W7 W9 W11
16 fans isolator location

W2 W4 W6 W8 W10 W12 W14
Control panel 1
Control panel 2
W1 W5 W7 W9 W11 W13
18 fans isolator location

Not for 20 fans
W2 W4 W6 W8 W10 W12 W14 W16
Control panel 1
Control panel 2
W1 W3 W5 W7 W9 W11 W13 W15

Not for 20 fans
20 fans & 24 fans isolator location
Figure 19. Isolator location
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 41
Detail dimension of rubber isolator:
A B C D E H L M W
Part number Color
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
X10140305640 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Charcoal
X10140305630 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Lime
X10140305620 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Brick Red
X10140305610 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Brown
Figure 20. Ruber isolator dimension
Table 11. Unit Isolators
Fan Isolator location at X axis (mm) Isolator

Unit Type
count W1, 2 W3, 4 W5, 6 W7, 8 W9, 10 W11, 12 W13, 14 W15, 16 Quantity
085X; 085P
100H; 100X 6 726 1876 3026 -- -- -- -- -- 5
100P
125H; 145H
155H; 170H
8 726 2426 4126 -- -- -- -- -- 6
125S; 145S
155S; 170S
125X; 145X
155X; 170X
10 726 2326 3926 5176 -- -- -- -- 8
125P; 145P
155P; 170P
190H; 205H
10 726 2326 3926 5176 -- -- -- -- 8
190S; 205S
190X; 205X
190P; 205P
12 726 2176 3026 4476 6326 -- -- -- 10
225P; 225H
225P-H*
225X; 230P 14 576 2276 3576 5526 7226 -- -- -- 10
255H; 255P
14 1026 2076 3676 6126 8276 -- -- -- 10
285H; 285P
255X
310H; 340H
310P; 340P 16 1026 2276 3426 4426 7826 9026 -- -- 11
310P-H*
340P-H*
285X; 310X 18 1376 3476 4526 5576 8876 10226 -- -- 11
375H; 400H
18 1126 2326 3376 4476 7826 9126 10226 -- 13
375P; 400P
340X 20 1450 3600 4100 5800 8500 10350 -- -- 11
375X; 400X
440H; 440P 20 1107 2007 2957 4307 7503 8853 9803 10703 14
440P-H*
410X; 440X
24 576 2826 4626 6076 8689 10139 11939 14189 16
420P
42 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Table 12. Unit Isolator Selections - Non-copper Fins
Isolator color at each location Isolator

Unit Type
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 Quantity
100H Brick Brick Brick Brick

-- Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5
085X; 100X Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick

085P; 100P -- Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5
Red Red Red
125H; 145H Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 6
155H; 170H Red Red Red Red
125S; 145S Brick Brick Brick Brick

Lime Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 6
155S; 170S Red Red Red Red
125X; 145X
Brick Brick Brick Brick
155X; 170X Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8
Red Red Red Red
190H; 205H
125P; 145P Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8
155P; 170P Red Red Red Red Red

190S; 205S Lime Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8
Red Red Red Red
190P; 205P Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
225P; 225P-H* Red Red Red Red
190X; 205X Brick Brick

Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
225H Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

225X; 230P Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
Red Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

255H; 285H Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
Red Red Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

255P; 285P Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
255X;310H Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brown Brown -- Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- 11
340H Red Red Red Red Red Red
310P; 340P
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick
310P-H* Brown -- Brown Brown -- -- -- -- 11
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
340P-H*

285X; 310X Brown -- Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- 11

340X -- Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- 11
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

375H; 400H Brown Brown -- Brown Brown -- -- 13
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick
375P; 400P Brown -- Brown Brown -- -- 13
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
375X; 400X Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick
Brown Brown -- Brown Brown -- Brown Brown 14
440H; 440P Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick
440P-H* Brown -- Brown Brown -- Brown 14
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
410X; 440X
Brown Brown Brown Brown Lime Lime Brown Brown Brown Brown Lime Lime Brown Brown Brown Brown 16
420P
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 43
Table 13. Unit Isolators Selections - Copper Fins
Isolator color at each location Isolator

Unit Type
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 Quantity
Brick Brick Brick

085X; 085P -- Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5
Red Red Red
100H; 100X Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 5
100P Red Red Red Red Red
125H; 145H Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 6
155H Red Red Red Red Red Red

170H Lime Lime -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 6
Red Red Red Red
125S; 145S Brick Brick Brick Brick

Lime Lime -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 6
155S; 170S Red Red Red Red
125X; 145X
155X; 170X
190H; 205H Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8
125P; 145P
155P; 170P
190S; 205S Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 8
190P; 205P Lime Lime Lime Brown Brown Lime Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
225P;225H Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
225P-H* Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

190X; 205X Lime Lime -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
Red Red Red Red Red Red Red Red
225X; 230P Brown Brown Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Brown Brown -- -- -- -- -- -- 10

255P Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
Red Red Red Red

Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- -- -- 10
285P Red Red Red Red Red Red
255X;310H
340H;310P Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick
-- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- 11
340P;285X Red Red Red Red Red Red
310X
310P-H* Brick Brick Brick Brick

-- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- 11
340P-H* Red Red Red Red
340X Lime Lime -- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- -- -- 11

-- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- -- 13
375P; 400P Red Red Red Red Red Red
375X; 400X Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

-- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- 14
440H; 440P Red Red Red Red Red Red
Brick Brick Brick Brick Brick

440P-H* -- Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime -- Lime 14
Red Red Red Red Red
410X; 440X Brick Brick Brick Brick Char- Char- Brick Brick Brick Brick Char- Char- Brick Brick Brick Brick
16
420P Red Red Red Red coal coal Red Red Red Red coal coal Red Red Red Red
44 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Evaporator Water Piping select pressure measure points.
Thoroughly flush all water piping to the unit before making Note: For multiple units installation, please install pres-
the final piping connections to the unit. sure gauge for each units inlet/outlet pipe.
NOTICE 2. The vibration-proof hose can prevent the vibration prop-

Evaporator Damage! agation along the water pipe.
The chilled water connections to the evaporator are to 3. Install temperature sensor on inlet/outlet water pipe to
be”Flange”type connections. Do not attempt to weld monitor filed inlet /outlet water temperature.
these connections, as the heat generated from welding
4. Inlet water pipe must install filter to avoid impurity enter-
can cause microscopic and macroscopic fractures on
ing into system. Filters screen shall not be less than 20
the cast iron waterboxes that can lead to premature
failure of the waterbox meshs.
5. Install balance valve on outlet water pipe to adjust water
NOTICE flow rate, and install service valve to switch off water
flow during maintainence.
Use Piping Strainers!
6. Intall flow switch on inlet water pipe to avoid low flow
To prevent evaporator damage, pipe strainers must be
rate.
installed in the water supplies to protect components
from water born debris. Trane is not responsible for 7. Install vent valve on water box top to discharge air in
equipment-only-damage caused by water born debris. water loop; intall purge valve on bottom of water box, the
purge piping arraged in site. Drain valve on evaporator
NOTICE is open when it leaves the factory. Please make sure
to close the drain valve before starting at first time.
Unit Damage!
Before complete the external water pipe leak detection, 8. Install automatical vent valve on the highest point of
cleaning, do not connect to unit water side heat ex- water loop.
changer, so as to avoid impurities into the unit interior 9. All external water pipe should complete leakage detec-
and cause damage.
tion, cleaning, insulating and fixed support.
Water side heat exchanger tipical piping connection sche-
matic is shown in Figure 21 :
NOTICE
1. Pressure gauges should be installed on both inlet and
outlet water pipe to monitor water inlet/outlet pressure;
Unit Damage!
which should located on straight line and keep away To avoid the damage of equipment, water side leak-
from elbow, keep at same level as possible as could, to age detecting pressure must not exceed the tube side
reduce the error due to installation height; Or bridge joint design pressure which is indicated on heat exchanger
single guage, through the valve opening and closing to nameplate.
Outlet Temperature
Inlet Temperature
Vent
Bypass valve * - for initial water loop cleaning
Waterbox Vent* - must be installed at the high point of the line
Drain* - must be installed at the low point of the line
Vibration Isolators Gate Valve

Drain Vent*
Strainer
Bypass Valve*
Gate Valve
Pressure Gauge
Vibration Balance Valve

Drain* Isolators
FT
Flow Switch Gate Valve
Figure 21. Water side heat exchanger typical piping connection schematic
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 45
Entering Chilled Water Piping Water Flow Switch
● Air vents (to bleed air from system).
To protect the unit, water loop must be installed flow switch
● Water pressure gauges with shutoff valves. and interlocked with water pump. once the the water flow of
heat exchanger was below Table 1 ~ Table 7 required mini-
● Vibration eliminators.
mum flow, water flow switch can stop the compressor opera-
● Shutoff (isolation) valves. Thermometers (if desired). tion.Water flow switch is accessories, its general installation
requirements outlined below, see Figure 22:
● Clean-out tees.
● Shall be vertically installed in horizontal pipelines or
● Pipe strainer.
installed on the vertical tube upward flow direction.
Leaving Chilled Water Piping ● Please keep away from the elbow, orifice or valve ,
before and after the switch keep at least 5 times the pipe
● Air vents (to bleed air from system).
diameter of straight pipe.
● Water pressure gauges with shutoff valves. Vibration
● Flow switch target slice should be selected and cut ac-
eliminators.
cording to Table 14 before uasage.
● Shutoff (isolation) valves.
● Control the screw-in depth of the water flow switch, make
● Thermometers. sure the arrow on the switch is consistent with the direc-
tion of flow.
● Clean-out tees.
● To prevent switch vibrate, no air in water loop.
● Balancing valve.
● To make sure the flow switch could cutoff at flow smaller
● Flow Switch
than minimum water flow, according to Figure 23.
● Water flow switch should be interlocked with water pump
System Minimum Water Volume control, specific electrical wiring way see Schematic Dia-
gram.
Water loop systems minimum volume, include chiller, water
piping and indoor unit, all these water flow should not lesss For the other type flow switch, the specific installation and
than 9L/kW,in order to keep the unit steady operation and maintenance requirements can be found in the flow switch
accurate controlled water temperature. If the volume is lower instructions, which is attached with the unit.
than this minimum value, should install a water tank with
similar volume,which have build-in baffer to get well mixed
NOTICE
wate.
Water flow protection!
TRANE chiller Symbio800 controller with has 6 seconds
delay responds to water flow switch cutout before unit
turn off. If unit has abnormal downtime, please contact
the TRANE air conditioning maintenance organization.
Figure 22. Water flow switch installation schemetric
46 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Table 14. Target slice length
UNIT Water pipe Slice length A (mm)

085; 100 4” 30
125; 145; 155 5” 39
170; 190 6” 41.5
205 6” 44.5
225;230 6" 31
255;285;310;340 6" 30
375 46
400 40
8"
410; 420 40
440 34
EVAP WATER SIDE PRESSURE DROP -- (2 PASS)

18
16
14
water pressure drop (psi)
12
10
085X, 085P
8
100H,100X,100P
125H,145H,125S,145S
6
125X,125P,145X,145P
155H,155S,155X,155P
4
170H, 170S,170X, 170P,
190H,190S,190X, 190P
205H,205S
2
205X,205P,225H,225P
225X,230P
0
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
water flow rate (gpm)
EVAP WATER SIDE PRESSURE DROP -- (1 PASS)

20
18
16
water pressure drop (psi)
14
12
10
8
255H,255X,255P
6 285X,285H,285P
310H,310X,310P,340H, 340X,340P
4 375H,375P
375X, 400H, 400P

2
400X,410X,420P
440H,440P,440X
0
300 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 1700
water flow rate (gpm)
Figure 23. Water flow pressure drop curve
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 47
Water Treatment there is a electric heater disconnecting, it will send out

sound and light alarm. detail electrical connection mode
Water side heat exchanger much apply with treated and as shown in Schematic Diagram
filted water, water property quality should within the range
● Install heat tape on all water piping, pumps, water box
Table 15 Water quality requirements, to avoid the demage of
nozzles and other components that may be damaged if
unit. Detail method please consulting experts in water treat-
exposed to freezing temperatures. Heat tape must be
ment.
designed for low ambient temperature applications. Heat
Table 15. Water quality requirements tape selection should be based on the lowest expected
ambient temperature.
Water property reqirements
NH3 <2 ppm NOTICE

NH 4+
<2 ppm Water side heater demage!
Cl2 <1 ppm
Water side electic heater is separated power supply in
Cl- < 300 ppm field, which needs 230V single phase.
H2S* <0.05 ppm
SO4 2-
< 70 ppm NOTICE
CO2† <5 ppm
Water side heater demage!
Fe2+/Fe3+ <0.2 ppm
Electric heater could only be engaged after water heat
O2 < 5 ppm
exchanger is filled with water, if heat exchanger is
NO3 <100 ppm drained away water, must switch off the electric heater,
Si < 0.1 ppm to avoid demage of heater.
Al <0.2 ppm ● If unit need be operating at low temperature condition for
Mn <0.1 ppm long term, using antifreeze in water loop is necessary to
hardness 71.2<…<151.3mg/l CaCO3 prevent the evaporator tube from being frozen and bro-
ken. The type and concentration of antifreeze will affect
resistance >3000ohm.cm
the unit performance. Below chart give the performance
conductivity 200<…<600µS/cm
deviation percentage of two kinds of antifreeze compar-
pH 7.5<…<9 ing to standard unit performance.
NOTICE
Unit demage!
Antifreeze Concentration Influence to Capacity & COP
Using improper handling or untreated water may cause 4.0%
unit on fouling, wear, corrosion, moss and damage. 3.5% ethylene glycol_Capacity
TRANE company is not responsible for the equipement Propylene glycol_Capacity
damage due to improper handling or untreated water or 3.0% Ethylene glycol_COP

Performance reduce %
Propylene glycol_COP
salt water. 2.5%
2.0%
Freeze Protection 1.5%
1.0%
If the unit will remain operational at subfreezing ambient tem-
peratures, the chilled water system must be protected from 0.5%
freezing. 0.0%
0% 5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30% 35%
● Water box and shell surface are factory-installed heaters Concentration （kg/kg）
and insulated on the packaged unit evaporator and will

help protect it from freezing in ambient temperatures
down to -20°F (-29°C).
● Control panal does not check the electric heater opera-
tion status, which need to be made by qualified technical.
Manually inspect electric heating power, and confirm the
performance of the electric heater, to avoid catastrophic
damage to the water side heat exchanger. User could
install optional electric heating failure alarm device, when
48 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout and Note: Tables below should not be interpreted as sug-
Glycol Requirements gesting operating ability or performance character-
istics at all tabulated glycol percentages. Full unit
The tables below show the low evaporator temperature simulation is required for proper prediction of unit
cutout for different glycol levels. Additional glycol beyond performance for specific operating conditions. For
what is required for freeze protection will adversely effect information on specific conditions, contact Trane
unit performance. The unit efficiency will be reduced and the product support.
saturated evaporator temperature will be reduced. For some
operating conditions this effect can be significant.
Always use the applied actual percent glycol to establish
the low refrigerant cutout and low water temperature cutout
setpoints.
Table 16. Ethylene glycol — low refrigerant temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water temperature cutout(LWTC)
Unit Sizes 125 to 230 ton Unit Sizes 255 to 440 ton
Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
Glycol Solution Freeze Glycol Solution Freeze
Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended
Percentage(%) Point(°F) Percentage(%) Point(°F)
LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F)
0 32.0 28.6 35.0 0 32.0 32.0 37.0
2 31.0 27.6 34.0 2 31.0 29.5 36.0
4 29.7 26.3 32.7 4 29.7 28.2 34.7
5 29.0 25.6 32.0 5 29.0 27.5 34.0
6 28.3 24.9 31.3 6 28.3 26.8 33.3
8 26.9 23.5 29.9 8 26.9 25.4 31.9
10 25.5 22.1 28.5 10 25.5 24.0 30.5
12 23.9 20.5 26.9 12 23.9 22.4 28.9
14 22.3 18.9 25.3 14 22.3 20.8 27.3
15 21.5 18.1 24.5 15 21.5 20.0 26.5
16 20.6 17.2 23.6 16 20.6 19.1 25.6
18 18.7 15.3 21.7 18 18.7 17.2 23.7
20 16.8 13.4 19.8 20 16.8 15.3 21.8
22 14.7 11.3 17.7 22 14.7 13.2 19.7
24 12.5 9.1 15.5 24 12.5 11.0 17.5
25 11.4 8.0 14.4 25 11.4 9.9 16.4
26 10.2 6.8 13.2 26 10.2 8.7 15.2
28 7.7 4.3 10.7 28 7.7 6.2 12.7
30 5.1 1.7 8.1 30 5.1 3.6 10.1
32 2.3 -1.1 5.3 32 2.3 0.8 7.3
34 -0.7 -4.1 5.0 34 -0.7 -2.2 5.0
35 -2.3 -5.0 5.0 35 -2.3 -3.8 5.0
36 -3.9 -5.0 5.0 36 -3.9 -5.0 5.0
38 -7.3 -5.0 5.0 38 -7.3 -5.0 5.0
40 -10.8 -5.0 5.0 40 -10.8 -5.0 5.0
42 -14.6 -5.0 5.0 42 -14.6 -5.0 5.0
44 -18.6 -5.0 5.0 44 -18.6 -5.0 5.0
45 -20.7 -5.0 5.0 45 -20.7 -5.0 5.0
46 -22.9 -5.0 5.0 46 -22.9 -5.0 5.0
48 -27.3 -5.0 5.0 48 -27.3 -5.0 5.0
50 -32.1 -5.0 5.0 50 -32.1 -5.0 5.0
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 49
Table 17. Propylene glycol — low refrigerant temperature cutout (LRTC) and low water temperature cutout(LWTC)
Unit Sizes 125 to 230 ton Unit Sizes 255 to 500 ton
Minimum Minimum Minimum Minimum
Glycol Solution Freeze Glycol Solution Freeze
Recommended Recommended Recommended Recommended
Percentage(%) Point(°F) Percentage(%) Point(°F)
LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F) LRTC (°F) LWTC (°F)
0 32.0 28.6 35.0 0 32.0 32.0 37.0
2 31.0 27.6 34.0 2 31.0 29.5 36.0
4 29.9 26.5 32.9 4 29.9 28.4 34.9
5 29.3 25.9 32.3 5 29.3 27.8 34.3
6 28.7 25.3 31.7 6 28.7 27.2 33.7
8 27.6 24.2 30.6 8 27.6 26.1 32.6
10 26.4 23.0 29.4 10 26.4 24.9 31.4
12 25.1 21.7 28.1 12 25.1 23.6 30.1
14 23.8 20.4 26.8 14 23.8 22.3 28.8
15 23.1 19.7 26.1 15 23.1 21.6 28.1
16 22.4 19.0 25.4 16 22.4 20.9 27.4
18 20.9 17.5 23.9 18 20.9 19.4 25.9
20 19.3 15.9 22.3 20 19.3 17.8 24.3
22 17.6 14.2 20.6 22 17.6 16.1 22.6
24 15.7 12.3 18.7 24 15.7 14.2 20.7
25 14.8 11.4 17.8 25 14.8 13.3 19.8
26 13.8 10.4 16.8 26 13.8 12.3 18.8
28 11.6 8.2 14.6 28 11.6 10.1 16.6
30 9.3 5.9 12.3 30 9.3 7.8 14.3
32 6.8 3.4 9.8 32 6.8 5.3 11.8
34 4.1 0.7 7.1 34 4.1 2.6 9.1
35 2.7 -0.7 5.7 35 2.7 1.2 7.7
36 1.3 -2.1 5.0 36 1.3 -0.2 6.3
38 -1.8 -5.0 5.0 38 -1.8 -3.3 5.0
40 -5.2 -5.0 5.0 40 -5.2 -5.0 5.0
42 -8.8 -5.0 5.0 42 -8.8 -5.0 5.0
44 -12.6 -5.0 5.0 44 -12.6 -5.0 5.0
45 -14.6 -5.0 5.0 45 -14.6 -5.0 5.0
46 -16.7 -5.0 5.0 46 -16.7 -5.0 5.0
48 -21.1 -5.0 5.0 48 -21.1 -5.0 5.0
50 -25.8 -5.0 5.0 50 -25.8 -5.0 5.0
50 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Installation - Electrical
General Recommendations Power Supply Wiring
All wiring must comply with local codes. Typical field wiring
diagrams can be referred in other separated manual. Min-
! WARNING
imum circuit ampacities and other unit electrical data are on Ground Wire !
the unit nameplate and Table 18 & Table 19&Table 20. See
All field-installed wiring must be completed by quali-
the unit order specifications for actual electrical data. Specif- fied personnel. All field-installed wiring must comply
ic electrical schematic diagram is shipped with the unit. with local codes. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in death or serious injuries.
WARNING !
All power supply wiring must be sized and selected accord-
Hazardous Voltage ! ingly by the project engineer in accordance with local codes.
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon- All wiring must comply with local codes. The installing (or
nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout / tagout electrical) contractor must provide and install the system
(LOTO) procedures to ensure the power can’t be inad- interconnecting wiring, as well as the power supply wiring.
vertently energized. Failure to disconnect power before
It must be properly sized and equipped with the appropriate
servicing could result in death or serious injury.
fused disconnect switches.
CAUTION ! The type and installation location(s) of the fused disconnects

must comply with all applicable codes.
Use Copper Conductors Only !
Entrance for income power wiring is located on the left side
Unit terminals are not designed to accept other types
of the control panel. The wiring is passed through this en-
of conductors. Failure to use copper conductors may
trance and connected to the terminal blocks, optional unit
result in equipment damage.
mounted disconnects, or circuit breakers. Refer to Figure 24
& Figure 25
NOTICE
Any change of the protection set points might result in To provide proper phasing of 3-phase input, make connec-
the loss of related guarantee rights without the authori- tions as shown in field wiring diagrams and as stated on the
zation or approval from Trane Company. WARNING label in the starter panel. For additional infor-
mation on proper phasing, refer to “Unit Voltage Phasing.”
Proper equipment ground must be provided to each ground
Important ! connection in the panel (one for each customer supplied
Do not allow conduit to interfere with other com- conductor per phase).
po-nents, structural members or equipment. Control
115 volt field-provided connections (either control or pow-
voltage (115V) wiring in conduit must be separate from
conduit carrying low voltage (<30V) wiring. To prevent er) are made through knockouts on the right/left side of the
control malfunctions, do not run low voltage wiring panel . Additional grounds may be required for each 115 volt
(<30V) in conduit with conductors carrying more than power supply to the unit. Green lugs are provided for 115V
30 volts. customer wiring.
Installer-Supplied Components
Customer wiring interface connections are shown in the elec-
trical schematics and connection diagrams that are shipped
with the unit. The installer must provide the following compo-
nents if not ordered with the unit:
● Power supply wiring (in conduit) for all field-wired con-
nections.
● All control (interconnecting) wiring (in conduit) for field
supplied devices.
● Fused-disconnect switches or circuit breakers.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 51
Table 18. Electrical data - High Efficiency at all ambient operation
Motor Data
Compressor (Each) Fan (Each)
Unit RLA XLRA YLRA
Unit Rated Qty
Power Qty Comp1A, Comp1B/ Comp1A,Comp1B/ Comp1A,Comp1B/ kW FLA
Size Voltage Ckt1/Ckt2
Conns Comp2A,Comp2B Comp2A, Comp2B Comp2A, Comp2B
100 380/50/3 1 1 203 1222 385 6 1.5 3.8
125 380/50/3 1 2 140/98 838/620 259/180 5/3 1.5 3.8
145 380/50/3 1 2 140/140 838/838 259/259 4/4 1.5 3.8
155 380/50/3 1 2 170/140 1146/838 354/259 4/4 1.5 3.8
170 380/50/3 1 2 170/170 1146/1146 354/354 4/4 1.5 3.8
190 380/50/3 1 2 203/170 1222/1146 385/354 5/5 1.5 3.8
205 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 5/5 1.5 3.8
225 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 6/6 1.5 3.8
255 380/50/3 2 3 170,170/170 1146,1146/1146 354,354/354 9/5 1.5 3.8
285 380/50/3 2 3 170,203/203 1146,1222/1222 354,385/385 9/5 1.65 4.7
310 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 11/5 1.65 4.7
340 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 11/5 1.65 4.7
375 380/50/3 2 4 170,203/170,203 1146,1222/1146,1222 354,385/354,385 9/9 1.65 4.7
400 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 9/9 1.65 4.7
440 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 10/10 1.65 4.7
Table 19. Electrical data – Extra Efficiency at all ambient operation
Motor Data
Unit RLA XLRA YLRA
Unit Rated Qty
85 380/50/3 1 1 170 1146 354 6 1.5 3.8
100 380/50/3 1 1 203 1222 385 6 1.5 3.8
125 380/50/3 1 2 140/98 838/620 259/180 6/4 1.5 3.8
145 380/50/3 1 2 140/140 838/838 259/259 5/5 1.5 3.8
155 380/50/3 1 2 170/140 1146/838 354/259 5/5 1.5 3.8
170 380/50/3 1 2 170/170 1146/1146 354/354 5/5 1.5 3.8
190 380/50/3 1 2 203/170 1222/1146 385/354 6/6 1.5 3.8
205 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 6/6 1.5 3.8
225 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 7/7 1.5 3.8
255 380/50/3 2 3 170,170/170 1146,1146/1146 354,354/354 11/5 1.5 3.8
285 380/50/3 2 3 170,203/203 1146,1222/1222 354,385/385 12/6 1.65 4.7
310 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 12/6 1.65 4.7
340 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 14/6 1.65 4.7
375 380/50/3 2 4 170,203/170,203 1146,1222/1146,1222 354,385/354,385 10/10 1.65 4.7
400 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 10/10 1.65 4.7
410 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 12/12 1.65 4.7
440 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 12/12 1.65 4.7
Note:
1. RLA-Rated load amps.
2. XLRA-Locked rotor amps are based on full winding starts.
3. YLRA-Locked rotor amps in Wye configuration.
4. Voltage range : 380V/50Hz/3Ph, application range : 342~418V/50Hz/3Ph
4. Customer need to provide an isolated power 220V/50Hz/1Ph to heat the Evaporator. For single circuit chiller, there are three heaters and heaters total power is 1200W; For dual circuit
chiller, there are four heaters and heaters total power is 1600W.
52 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Table 20. Electrical data – PSE at all ambient operation
Motor Data
Unit RLA XLRA YLRA
Unit Rated Qty
85 380/50/3 1 1 170 1146 354 6 1.5 3.8
100 380/50/3 1 1 203 1222 385 6 1.5 3.8
125 380/50/3 1 2 140/98 838/620 259/180 6/4 1.5 3.8
145 380/50/3 1 2 140/140 838/838 259/259 5/5 1.5 3.8
155 380/50/3 1 2 170/140 1146/838 354/259 5/5 1.5 3.8
170 380/50/3 1 2 170/170 1146/1146 354/354 5/5 1.5 3.8
190 380/50/3 1 2 203/170 1222/1146 385/354 6/6 1.5 3.8
205 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 6/6 1.5 3.8
225 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 6/6 1.5 3.8
230 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 7/7 1.5 3.8
255 380/50/3 2 3 170,170/170 1146,1146/1146 354,354/354 9/5 1.5 3.8
285 380/50/3 2 3 170,203/203 1146,1222/1222 354,385/385 9/5 1.65 4.7
310 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 11/5 1.65 4.7
340 380/50/3 2 3 203,203/203 1222,1222/1222 385,385/385 11/5 1.65 4.7
375 380/50/3 2 4 170,203/170,203 1146,1222/1146,1222 354,385/354,385 9/9 1.65 4.7
400 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 9/9 1.65 4.7
420 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 12/12 2.8 6.6
440 380/50/3 2 4 203,203/203,203 1222,1222/1222,1222 385,385/385,385 10/10 1.65 4.7
Table 21. Electrical data – SSE at all ambient operation
Motor Data
Unit RLA XLRA YLRA
Unit Rated Qty
125 380/50/3 1 2 140/98 838/620 259/180 5/3 1.5 3.8
145 380/50/3 1 2 140/140 838/838 259/259 4/4 1.5 3.8
155 380/50/3 1 2 170/140 1146/838 354/259 4/4 1.5 3.8
170 380/50/3 1 2 170/170 1146/1146 354/354 4/4 1.5 3.8
190 380/50/3 1 2 203/170 1222/1146 385/354 5/5 1.5 3.8
205 380/50/3 1 2 203/203 1222/1222 385/385 5/5 1.5 3.8
Note:
1. RLA-Rated load amps.
2. XLRA-Locked rotor amps are based on full winding starts.
3. YLRA-Locked rotor amps in Wye configuration.
4. Voltage range : 380V/50Hz/3Ph, application range : 342~418V/50Hz/3Ph
4. Customer need to provide an isolated power 220V/50Hz/1Ph to heat the Evaporator. For single circuit chiller, there are three heaters and heaters total power is 1200W; For dual circuit
chiller, there are four heaters and heaters total power is 1600W.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 53
Power
Wiring
115V/220 VAC
Field Wiring
Figure 24. Power Entrance of fixed panel
115V/220 VAC
Field Wiring
Power
Wiring
Figure 25. Power Entrance of AFD panel
54 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control Power Supply regardless of where the auto command is coming from, the
normally open relay is energized. When the chiller exits the
The unit is equipped with a control power transformer, it is AUTO mode, the relay is timed open for an adjustable (using
not necessary to provide additional control power voltage to Tracer TU) 0 to 30 minutes. The non-AUTO modes in which
the unit. the pump is stopped, include Reset (88), Stop (00), External
All units are factory-connected for appropriate labeled volt- Stop (100), Remote Display Stop (600), Stopped by Tracer
ages. (300), Low Ambient Run Inhibit (200).
When unit stops, if the evaporator inlet and outlet water
Interconnecting Wiring temperature is lower than a certain protection set value, the
controller of RTAG will command the water pump to start to
Heat Power Supply prevent the evaporator from freezing. If customer does not
The evaporator shell is insulated from ambient air and allow RTAG unit to control the pump, the evaporator is at risk
protected from freezing temperatures by two thermo-stat- of freezing. It is the responsibility of the installation contrac-
ically-controlled immersion heaters and two strip heaters tor or customer to ensure that the water pump is started on
.Whenever the water temperatures drops to approximately when is required by the chiller.
37ºF(2.8ºC) ,the thermostat energized the heaters .The heat-
Table 22. Pump Realy Operation
ers will provide protection from ambient temperatures down
to -4ºF(-20ºC). Chiller Mode Relay Operation
Auto Instant close
It is required to provide an independent power source (230V Tracer Override Close
50Hz -15amp) ,with a fused-disconnect. Stop Timed Open
Diagnostics Instant Open
! CAUTION When going from Stop to Auto, the EWP relay is energized
Heater Tape! immediately. If evaporator water flow is not established in 4
minutes and 15 sec., the Symbio800 de-energizes the EWP
Control panel main controller Symbio800 does not
relay and generates a non-latching diagnostic. If flow returns
check for loss of power to the heat tape nor does it
(e.g. someone else is controlling the pump), the diagnostic is
verify thermostat operation .A qualified technician must
verify power to the heat tape and confirm operation of cleared, the EWP is re-energized, and normal control re-
the heat tape thermostat to avoid catastrophic damage sumed.
to the evaporator. If evaporator water flow is lost once it had been established,
the EWP relay remains energized and a non-latching diag-
nostic is generated. If flow returns, the diagnostic is cleared
Chilled Water Flow (Pump) Interlock and the chiller returns to normal operation.
The Model RTAG Series chiller requires a field-supplied In general, when there is either a non-latching or latching
control voltage contact input through a flow proving switch diagnostic, the EWP relay is turned off as though there was
5B5 and an auxiliary contact 5K9 AUX. Connect the proving a zero time delay. Exceptions (see above table) whereby the
switch and auxiliary contact to 1K14 J2-1 and 1X5-27. Refer relay continues to be energized occur with:
to the field wiring for details.
A Low Chilled Water Temp. diagnostic (non-latching) (unless
The auxiliary contact can be BAS signal, starter contactor also accompanied by an evaporator Leaving Water Tempera-
auxiliary or any signal which indicates the pump is running. A ture Sensor Diagnostic) or
flow switch is still required and cannot be omitted.
A starter contactor interrupts failure diagnostic, in which a
Chilled Water Pump Control compressor continues to draw current even after command-
ed to have shutdown or
An evaporator water pump output relay closes when the
chiller is given a signal to go into the Auto mode of operation A Loss of Evaporator Water Flow diagnostic (non-latching)
from any source. The contact is opened to turn off the pump and the unit is in the AUTO mode, after initially having prov-
in the event of most machine level diagnostics to prevent the en evaporator water flow.
build up of pump heat.
The relay output from 1K16 is required to operate the Evap- Alarm and Status Relay Outputs
orator Water Pump (EWP) contactor. Contacts should be
compatible with 115/240 VAC control circuit. The EWP relay (Programmable Relays)
operates in different modes depending on Symbio800 or A programmable relay concept provides for enunciation of
Tracer commands, if available. Normally the AUTO mode, certain events or states of the chiller, selected from a list of
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 55
likely needs, while only using four physical output relays, as referred to by the relay’s terminal numbers on the LLID board
shown in the field wiring diagram. The four relays are provid- 1K17.
ed (generally with a Quad Relay Output The relay’s contacts
The default assignments for the four available relays of the
are isolated Form C (SPDT), suitable for use with 120 VAC
RTAG Alarm and Status Package Option are:
circuits drawing up to 2.8 amps inductive, 7.2 amps resistive,
or 1/3 HP and for 240 VAC circuits drawing up to 0.5 amp Table 24. Default Assignments
resistive.
Relay
The list of events/states that can be assigned to the Relay 1 Terminals J2 -12,11,10: Alarm
Relay 2 Terminals J2 - 9,8,7: Chiller Running
pro-grammable relays can be found in Table 23. The relay
Relay 3 Terminals J2-6,5,4: Maximum Capacity
will be energized when the event/state occurs. Relay 4 Terminals J2-3,2,1: Chiller Limit
Table 23. Alarm and Status Relay Output Configuration If any of the Alarm/Status relays are used, provide electrical
Table power, 115 VAC with fused disconnect to the panel and wire
through the appropriate relays (terminals on 1K17). Provide
Description
wiring (switched hot, neutral, and ground connections) to the
Alarm - Latching This output is true whenever there is any active
diagnostic that requires a manual reset to clear, that
remote annunciation devices. Do not use power from the
affects the Chiller, or the Circuit. This classification chiller’s control panel transformer to power these remote
does not include informational diagnostics. devices. Refer to the field diagrams which are shipped with
Alarm - Auto Reset This output is true whenever there is any active the unit.
diagnostic that could automatically clear, that affects
the Chiller, or the Circuit. This classification does not
include informational diagnostics.
Alarm This output is true whenever there is any diagnostic
Low Voltage Wiring
affecting any component, whether latching or
automatically clearing. This classification does not
include informational diagnostics ! WARNING
Alarm Ckt 1 This output is true whenever there is any diagnostic
effecting Refrigerant Circuit 1, whether latching or
Ground Wire !
automatically clearing, including diagnostics affecting All field-installed wiring must be completed by quali-
the entire chiller. This classification does not include
informational diagnostics.
fied personnel. All field-installed wiring must comply
Chiller Limit Mode This output is true whenever the chiller has been
with local codes. Failure to follow this instruction could
(with a 20 minute running in one of the Unloading types of limit modes result in death or serious injuries.
filter) (Condenser, Evaporator, Current Limit or Phase
Imbalance Limit) continuously for the last 20 minutes. The remote devices described below require low voltage
wiring. All wiring to and from these remote input devices to
Circuit 1 Running This output is true whenever compressor is running
(or commanded to be running) on Refrigerant Circuit the Control Panel must be made with shielded, twisted pair
1, and false when no compressor is commanded to be conductors. Be sure to ground the shielding wire only at the
running on that circuit. panel.
Chiller Running This output is true whenever compressor is running
(or commanded to be running) on the chiller and false Note: To prevent control malfunctions, do not run low
when no compressor is commanded to be running on voltage wiring (<30 V) in conduit with conductors carrying
the chiller.
more than 30 volts.
Maximum Capacity This output is true whenever the chiller has reached
maximum capacity or had reached its maximum
capacity and since that time has not fallen below 70%
average current relative to the rated ARI current for the Emergency Stop
chiller. The output is false when the chiller falls below
70% average current and, since that time, had not Symbio800 provides auxiliary control for a customer speci-
reestablished maximum capacity. fied/installed latching trip out .When this customer-furnished
remote contact 5K24 is provided ,the chiller will run normally
when the contact is closed .When the contact opens ,the unit
will trip on a manually resettable diagnostic .This condition
requires manual reset at the chiller switch on the front of the
control panel.
Relay Assignments Using Tracer
Connect low voltage leads to terminal strip locations on 1K18
TU J2-3 and 4. Refer to the field diagrams that are shipped with
Symbio800 Service Tool (Tracer TU) is used to install the the unit.
Alarm and Status Relay Option package and assign any of Sliver or gold-plated contacts are recommended .These cus-
the above list of events or status to each of the four relays tomer-furnished contacts must be compatible with 24VDC.
provided with the option. The relays to be programmed are 12 mA resistive load.
56 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
External Auto/Stop a 2-10 VDC (default) or a 4-20 mA signal. The Current Limit
Setting can also be set via the Tracer TU or through digital
If the unit requires the external Auto/Stop function, the in- communication with Tracer (Comm 3). The arbitration of the
staller must provide leads from the remote contacts 5K23 to various sources of current limit is described in the flow charts
the proper terminals on 1K18 J2-1 and 2. The chiller will run at the end of this section. The External Current Limit Setpoint
normally when the contacts are closed. When either contact may be changed from a remote location by hooking up the
opens, the compressor(s), if operating, will go to the RUN: analog input signal to the 1K19, J2-2 and 3. Refer to the fol-
UNLOAD operating mode and cycle off. Unit operation will be lowing paragraph on Analog Input Signal Wiring Details.The
inhibited. Closure of the contacts will permit the unit to return following equations apply for ECLS:
to normal operation.
Voltage Signal Current Signal
Field-supplied contacts for all low voltage connections must As generated
be compatible with dry circuit 24 VDC for a 12 mA resistive from external VDC+0.133*(%)-6.0 mA=0.266*(%)-12.0
load. Refer to the field diagrams that are shipped with the source
unit. As processed
%=7.5*(VDC)+45.0 %=3.75*(mA)+45.0
by Symbio800
External Chilled Water Setpoint (ECWS) If the ECLS input develops an open or short, the LLID will
Option report either a very high or very low value back to the man
processor. This will generate an informational diagnostic and
The Symbio800 provides inputs that accept either 4-20 mA
the unit will default to using the Front Panel (TD7) Current
or 2-10 VDC signals to set the external chilled water setpoint
Limit Setpoint.
(ECWS). This is not a reset function. The input defines the
set point. This input is primarily used with generic BAS (build- The Tracer TU Service Tool must be used to set the input
ing automation systems).The chilled water setpoint set via signal type from the factory default of 2-10 VDC to that of
the Symbio800 or through digital communication with Tracer. 4-20 mA current. Tracer TU must also be used to install or
The arbitration of the various chilled water setpoint sources is remove the External Current Limit Setpoint Option for field
described in the flow charts at the end of the section. installation, or can be used to enable or disable the feature (
if installed).
The chilled water setpoint may be changed from a remote lo-
cation by sending either a 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA signal to the ECLS and ECWS Analog Input Signal Wiring Details:
1K19, J2-5 and 6. The 2 VDC(4 mA)and 10VDC(20mA)each
Both the ECWS and ECLS can be connected and setup as
correspond to a-12 and 18°C (10 and 65°F) external chilled
either a 2-10 VDC (factory default), 4-20 mA, or resistance
water setpoint.
input (also a form of 4-20mA) as indicated below. Depending
The following equations apply: on the type to be used, the Tracer TU Service Tool must be
used to configure the LLID and Symbio800 for the proper in-
Voltage Signal Current Signal
put type that is being used. This is accomplished by a setting
As generated
from external VDC=0.1455*(ECWS)+0.5454 mA=0.2909(ECWS)+1.0909 change on the Custom Tab of the Configuration View within
source Tracer TU.
As processed Important: F
or proper unit operation, BOTH the ECLS
ECWS=6.875*(VDC)-3.75 ECWS=3.4375(mA)-3.75
by Symbio800
and ECWS settings MUST be the same (2-10
VDC or 4-20mA), even if only one input is to
If the ECWS input develops an open or short, the LLID will
report either a very high or very low value back to the main be used.
processor. This will generate an informational diagnostic and
the unit will default to using the Front Panel (TD7) Chilled The J2-3 and J2-6 terminal is chassis grounded and terminal
Water Setpoint. J2-1 and J2-4 can be used to source 12 VDC. The ECLS
uses terminals J2-2 and J2-3. ECWS uses terminals J2-5
Tracer TU Service Tool is used to set the input signal type and J2-6. Both inputs are only compatible with high-side
from the factory default of 2-10 VDC to that of 4-20 mA. Trac- current sources.
er TU is also used to install or remove the External Chilled
Water Setpoint option as well as a means to enable and
disable ECWS.
External Current Limit Setpoint (ECLS)

Option
Similar to the above, the Symbio800 also provides for an
optional External Current Limit Setpoint that will accept either
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 57
MAXIMUM RESET is a user adjustable limit providing the
maximum amount of reset.
For all types of reset, CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset.
The values for "RESET RATIO" for each of the reset types
are:
Reset Ratio Increment Increment SI Factory Default

Reset Type
Range English Units Units Value
Return 10 to 120% 1% 1% 50%
The values for "START RESET" for each of the reset types
are:

Reset Type
2.2 to 16.67 oC
Return 0.1 oF 0.1 oC 5.56 oC (10 oF)
(4 to 30oF)
The values for “MAXIMUM RESET” for each of the reset

types are:

Reset Type
0.0 to 11.11 oC
Figure 26. Wiring Examples for ECLS and ECWS Return
(0 to 20 oF)
0.1 oF 0.1 oC 2.78 oC (5 oF)
In addition to Return, the MP provides a menu item for the

Chilled Water Reset (CWR) operator to select a Constant Return Reset. Constant Return
Reset will reset the leaving water temperature set point so
Symbio800 resets the chilled water temperature setpoint
as to provide a constant entering water temperature. The
based on return water temperature. Return Reset is stan-
Constant Return Reset equation is the same as the Return
dard.
Reset equation except on selection of Constant Return
The following shall be selectable: Reset, the MP will automatically set Ratio, Start Reset, and
Maximum Reset to the following.
● One of three Reset Types: None, Return Water Tem-
perature Reset, or Constant Return Water Temperature RATIO = 100%
Reset.
START RESET = Design Delta Temp.
● Reset Ratio Set Points.
MAXIMUM RESET = Design Delta Temp.
● Start Reset Set Points.
The equation for Constant Return is then as follows:
● Maximum Reset Set Points.
CWS' = CWS + 100% (Design Delta Temp. - (TWE - TWL))
The equations for each type of reset are as follows:
and CWS' > or = CWS
Return
and CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset
CWS' = CWS + RATIO (START RESET - (TWE - TWL))
When any type of CWR is enabled, the MP will step the
and CWS' > or = CWS Active CWS toward the desired CWS' (based on the above
equations and setup parameters) at a rate of 1 degree F ev-
and CWS' - CWS < or = Maximum Reset
ery 5 minutes until the Active CWS equals the desired CWS'.
where This applies when the chiller is running.
CWS' is the new chilled water set point or the "reset CWS" When the chiller is not running the CWS is reset immedi-
CWS is the active chilled water set point before any reset ately (within one minute) for Return Reset and at a rate of 1
has occurred, e.g. normally Front Panel, Tracer, or ECWS degree F every 5 minutes for Outdoor Reset. The chiller will
start at the Differential to Start value above a fully reset CWS
RESET RATIO is a user adjustable gain or CWS' for both Return and Outdoor Reset.
START RESET is a user adjustable reference
TWE is evaporator entering water temperature
TWL is evaporator leaving water temperature
58 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Communications Interface op- mended for most LCI-C
tions ● Installations
● LCI-C link limits: 4500 feet, 60 devices
This option allows the Tracer Symbio800 controller to ex-
change information (e.g. operating setpoints and Auto/Stand- ● Termination resistors are required
by commands) with a higher-level control device, such as a
● 105 ohms at each end for Level 4 wire
Tracer Summit or a multiple-machine controller. A shielded,
twisted pair connection establishes the bi-directional commu- ● 82 ohms at each end for Trane "purple" wire
nications link between the Tracer Symbio800 and the build- ● LCI-C topology should be daisy chain
ing automation system.
● Zone sensor communication stubs limited to 8 per link,
Note: To prevent control malfunctions, do not run low 50 feet each (maximum)
voltage wiring (<30 V) in conduit with conductors
carrying more than 30 volts. ● One repeater can be used for an additional 4500 feet, 60
devices, 8 communication stubs
! WARNING
Ground Wire ! BACnet Communications Interface for
Chillers (BCI-C)
All field-installed wiring must be completed by quali-
fied personnel. All field-installed wiring must comply The RTAG controller Symbio800 has an BACnet Commu-
with local codes. Failure to follow this instruction could nication Interface for Chillers (BCI-C), It is a non-program-
result in death or serious injuries. mable communications module that allows the RTAG unit to
communicate on a BACnet communications network.
Field wiring for the communication link must meet the follow-
ing requirements:
BACnet Data Points and Configuration
● All wiring must be in accordance with the NEC and local Property Definitions
codes.
The BCI-C device allows certain models of Trane chillers
● Communication link wiring must be shielded, twisted pair with Symbio800 controls to communicate with BACnet
wiring (Belden 8760 or equivalent). See the table below systems and devices using BACnet MS/TP. This section
for wire size selection: includes information about:
Table 25. Wire size ● BACnet protocol implementation conformance statement
Maximum Length of (PICS)
Wire Size
Communication Wire
14 AWG (2.5 mm2) 5,000 FT (1525 m) ● Object types: descriptions and configuration (refer to
2
16 AWG (1.5 mm ) 2,000 FT (610 m) Table 27)
18 AWG (1.0 mm2) 1,000 FT (305 m)
● BACnet protocol: data link layers, device address bind-
ing, networking options, and character sets
● The communication link cannot pass between buildings.
● Object data points and configurations
● All units on the communication link can be connected in
a “daisy chain” configuration. BACnet Protocol Implementation Confor-
mance Statement (PICS)
LonTalk Communications Interface for Standardized Device Profile (Annex L)
Chillers (LCI-C)
Profile Description Supported Profile
Symbio800 provides an optional LonTalk Communication BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
Interface (LCI-C) between the chiller and a Building Automa- BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) √
tion System (BAS). An LCI-C LLID shall be used to provide BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
"gateway" functionality between a LonTalk compatible device
BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)
and the Chiller. The inputs/outputs include both mandatory BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
and optional network variables as established by the Lon-
Mark Functional Chiller Profile 8040.
Note: For more information, see RTAG-SVP00*-EN
Installation Recommendations
● 22 AWG Level 4 unshielded communication wire recom-
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 59
Table 26. LonTalk Points List
LonTalk Communications Interface

Inputs Variable type SNVT_Type
Chiller Enable/Disable binary start(1)/stop(0) SNVT_switch
Chilled Water Setpoint analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Current Limit Setpoint analog % current SNVT_lev_percent
Chiller Mode SNVT_hvac_mode
Outputs Variable type SNVT_Type
Chiller On/Off binary on(1)/off(0) SNVT_switch
Active Chilled Water Setpoint analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Percent RLA analog % current SNVT_lev_percent
Active Current Limit Setpoint analog % current SNVT_lev_percent
Leaving Chilled Water Temperature analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Entering Chilled Water Temperature analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Entering Condenser Water Temperature analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Leaving Condenser Water Temperature analog temperature SNVT_temp_p
Alarm Description Note 1 SNVT_str_asc
Chiller Status Note 2 SNVT_chlr_status
Note 1 Alarm Description denotes alarm severity and target.
Severity: no alarm, warning, normal shutdown, immediate shutdown
Target: Chiller, Platform, Ice Building (Chiller is refrigerant circuit and Platform is control circuit)
Note 2 Chiller Status describes Chiller Run Mode and Chiller Operating Mode. Run Modes: Off, Starting, Running, Shutting Down
Operating Modes: Cool, Ice Build
States: Alarm, Run Enabled, Local Control, Limited, CHW Flow, Cond Flow
Interoperability Building Blocks (Annex K)

Data Sharing Description Supported BIBB
Data Sharing-COV-B (DS-COV-B)
Data Sharing-Read Property-A (DS-RP-A) √
Data Sharing-Read Property-B (DS-RP-B) √
Data Sharing-Read PropertyMultiple-B (DS-RPM-B) √
Data Sharing-Write Property-A (DS-WP-A) √
Data Sharing-Write Property-B (DS-WP-B) √
Data Sharing-Write PropertyMultiple-B (DS-WPM-B) √
Alarm and Event Management Description Supported BIBB
Alarm and Event-ACKI-B (AE-ACK-B) √
Alarm and Event-Alarm Summary-B (AE-ASUM-B) √
Alarm and Event-Enrollment Summary-B (AE-ESUM-B) √
Alarm and Event-Information-B (AE-INFO-B) √
Alarm and Event-Notification Internal-B (AE-N-I-B) √
Trending Description Supported BIBB
Trending-Automated Trend Retrieval-B (T-ATR-B) √
Trending-viewing and Modifying Trends Internal-B (T-VMT-I-B) √
Device Management Description Supported BIBB
Device Management-Backup and Restore-B (DM-BR-B) √
Device Management-Device Communication Control-B (DM-DCC-B) √
Device Management-Dynamic Device Binding-A (DM-DDB-A) √
Device Management-Dynamic Device Binding-B (DM-DDB-B) √
Device Management-Dynamic Object Binding-B (DM-DOB-B) √
Device Management-List Manipulation-B (DM-LM-B) √
Device Management-Object Creation and Deletion-B (DM-OCD-B) √
Device Management-Private Transfer-A (DM-PT-A) √
Device Management-Private Transfer-B (DM-PT-B) √
Device Management-Reinitialize Device-B (DM-RD-B) √
Device Management-TimeSynchronization-B (DM-TS-B) √
Segmentation Capability
Segmentation Description Supported Segment
Segmented Requests/ Window Size: 1 √
Segmented Responses/ Window Size: 1 √
60 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Object Type
Table 27. Descriptions and configurations
Object Type Required Properties Read Properties Written(a) Optional Properties Read Ability to Ability to
Create Delete
Analog • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • Description Yes Yes, only user
Input • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • Out_Of_Service • Min_Pres_Value
• Present_Value • Present_Value • Max_Pres_Value
• Status_Flags • Reliability • COV_Increment
• Event_State • Min_Pres_Value • Time_Delay
• Out_Of_Service • Max_Pres_Value • Notification _Class
• Units • COV_Increment • High_Limit
• Time_Delay • Low_Limit
• Notification_Class • Deadband
• High_Limit • Limit_Enable
• Low_Limit • Event_Enable
• Deadband • Acked_Transitions
• Limit_Enable • Notify_Type
• Event_Enable • Event_Time_Stamps
• Notify_Type
Output • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • Out_Of_Service • Min_Pres-Value
• Present_Value • Present_Value • Max_Pres_Value
• Event_State • Min_Pres_Value • Time_Delay
• Out_Of_Service • Max_Pres_Value • Notification _Class
• Units • Relinquish_Default • High_Limit
• Priority_Array • COV_Increment • Low_Limit
• Relinquish_Default • Time_Delay • Deadband
• Notification_Class • Limit_Enable
• High_Limit • Event_Enable
• Low_Limit • Acked_Transitions
• Deadband • Notify_Type
• Limit_Enable • Event_Time_Stamps
• Event_Enable
• Notify_Type
Value • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • Out_Of_Service • Priority_Array
• Present_Value • Present_Value • Relinquish_Default
• Event_State • Relinquish_Default • Time_Delay
• Out_Of_Service • COV_Increment • Notification_Class
• Units • Time_Delay • High_Limit
• Notification_Class • Low_Limit
• High_Limit • Deadband
• Low_Limit • Limit_Enable
• Deadband • Event_Enable
• Limit_Enable • Acked_Transitions
• Event_Enable • Notify_Type
• Notify_Type • Event_Time_Stamps
Binary • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • Description Yes Yes, only user
Input • Object_Name • Description • Inactive_Text created objects
• Object_Type • Out_Of_Service • Active_Text
• Present_Value • Inactive_Text • Change_Of_State_Time
• Status_Flags • Active_Text • Change_Of_State_Count
• Event_State • Present_Value • Time_Of_State_Count_Reset
• Out_Of_Service • Reliability • Elapsed_Active_Time
• Polarity • Change_Of_State_Count • Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset
• Elapsed_Active_Time • Time_Delay
• Time_Delay • Notification_Class
• Notification_Class • Alarm_Value
• Alarm_Value • Event_Enable
• Event_Enable • Acked_Transitions
• Acked_Transitions • Notify_Type
• Reliability
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 61
Object Type Required Properties Read Properties Written(a) Optional Properties Read Ability to Ability to
Create Delete
Output • Object_Name • Description • Inactive_Text created objects
• Priority_Array • Elapsed_Active_Time • Minimum_On_Time
• Relinquish_Default • Minimum_On_Time • Minimum_Off_Time
• Minimum_Off_Time • Time_Delay
• Relinquish_Default • Notification_Class
• Time_Delay • Feedback_Value
• Notification_Class • Event_Enable
• Event_Enable • Acked_Transitions
• Acked_Transitions • Notify_Type
• Reliability
Value • Object_Name • Description • Inactive_Text created objects
• Elapsed_Active_Time • Priority_Array
• Minimum_On_Time • Relinquish_Default
• Minimum_Off_Time • Minimum_On_Time
• Relinquish_Default • Minimum_Off_Time
• Time_Delay • Time_Delay
• Notification_Class • Notification_Class
• Alarm_Value • Alarm_Value
• Event_Enable • Event_Enable
• Acked_Transitions • Acked_Transitions
• Notify_Type • Notify_Type
• Event_Time_Stamps
• Reliability
Device • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • Location None None
• Object_Name • Location • Description
• Object_Type • Description • Max_Segments_Accepted
• System_Status • APDU_Segment_Timeout • APDU_Segment_Timeout
• Vendor_Name • APDU_Timeout • Max_Master
• Vendor_Identifier • Number_Of_APDU_Retries • Max_Info_Frames
• Model_Name • Backup_Failure_Timeout • Local_Time
• Firmware_Revision • Local_Date
• Application_Software_Version • Configuration_Files
• Protocol_Version • Last_Restore_Time
• Protocol_Revision • Backup_Failure_Timeout
• Protocol_Services_Supported • Active_COV_Subscriptions
• Protocol_Object_Types_Supported
• Object_List
• Max_APDU_Length_Accepted
• Segmentation_Supported
• APDU_Timeout
• Number_Of_APDU_Retries
• Device_Address_Binding
• Database_Revision
Event Enroll- • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • None Yes Yes, only user
ment Object • Object_Name • Notify_Type created objects
• Object_Type • Event_Parameters
• Event_Type • Object_Property_Reference
• Notify_Type • Event_Enable
• Event_Parameters • Notification_Class
• Object_Property_Reference
• Event_State
• Event_Enable
• Acked_Transitions
• Notification_Class
• Event_Time_Stamps
62 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
(a)
Object Type Required Properties Read Properties Written Optional Properties Read Ability to Ability to
Create Delete
Multistate • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • State_Text Yes Yes, only user
Input • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • State_Text • Time_Delay
• Present_Value • Out_Of_Service • Notification_Class
• Status_Flags • Present_Value • Alarm_Values
• Event_State • Reliability • Fault_Values
• Out_Of_Service • Time_Delay • Event_Enable
• Number_Of_States • Notification_Class • Acked_Transitions
• Alarm_Values • Notify_Type
• Fault_Values • Event_Time_Stamps
• Event_Enable
• Notify_Type
Output • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • State_Text • Relinquish_Default
• Present_Value • Out_Of_Service • Time_Delay
• Status_Flags • Present_Value • Notification_Class
• Event_State • Reliability • Feedback_Values
• Out_Of_Service • Time_Delay • Event_Enable
• Number_Of_States • Notification_Class • Acked_Transitions
• Priority_Array • Event_Enable • Notify_Type
• Relinquish Default • Notify_Type • Event_Time_Stamps
Value • Object_Name • Description • Reliability created objects
• Object_Type • State_Text • Relinquish_Default
• Present_Value • Out_Of_Service • Time_Delay
• Status_Flags • Present_Value • Notification_Class
• Event_State • Reliability • Alarm_Values
• Out_Of_Service • Priority_Array • Fault_Values
• Number_Of_States • Relinquish_Default • Event_Enable
• Time_Delay • Acked_Transitions
• Notification_Class • Notify_Type
• Alarm_Values • Event_Time_Stamps
• Fault_Values
• Event_Enable
• Notify_Type
Notification • Object_Identifier • Object_Name None Yes Yes, only user
Class • Object_Name • Priority created objects
• Object_Type • Ack_Required
• Notification_Class • Recipient_List
• Priority
• Ack_Required
• Recipient_List
Trend • Object_Identifier • Object_Name • Start_Time Yes Yes, only user
• Object_Name • Log_Enable • Stop_Time created objects
• Object_Type • Start_Time • Log_DeviceObjectProperty
• Log_Enable • Stop_Time • Log_Interval
• Stop_When_Full • Log_DeviceObjectProperty • Stop_When_Full
• Buffer_Size • Log_Interval • Buffer_Size
• Log_Buffer • Stop_When_Full • Notification_Threshold
• Record_Count • Buffer_Size • Records_Since_Notification
• Total_Record_Count • Log_Buffer • Last_Notify_Record
• Event_State • Record_Count • Notification_Class
• Notification_Threshold • Event_Enable
• Notification_Class • Acked_Transitions
• Event_Enable • Event_Time_Stamps
• Notify_Type
(a) Properties written for Present_Value and Reliability only if Out_of_Service is TRUE
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 63
BACnet Protocol
Data Link Layer Options

Data Link Layer Description Option Supported Option
ANSI/ATA 878.1, 2.5 Mb ARCNET (Clause 8)
ANSI/ATA 878.1, RS-485 ARCNET (Clause 8), Baud Rate(s)
BACnet IP, (Annex J)
BACnet IP, (Annex J), Foreign Device
ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)(10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseT, Fiber)
LonTalk, (Clause 11), Medium
MS/TP Master (Clause 9), Baud Rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, and 115200 @1.5% Nominal Baud Rate √
MS/TP Slave (Clause 9), Baud Rate(s)
Other
Point-to-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), Baud Rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400
Point-to-Point, Modem (Clause 10), Baud Rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400
Device Address Binding

Device Address Binding Supported?
Static Device Binding Supported √
Networking Options
Networking Descriptions Supported Option
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling √
BACnet/IP Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) √
Does the BBMD Support Registrations by Foreign Devices? √
Router √
Character Sets
Indicates support for multiple characters sets, but does not imply that all character sets are supported simultaneously.Maxi-
mum supported string length is 64 bytes (any character set).
Character Set Descriptions Supported
ANSI X3.4 √
IBM/Microsoft DBCS
ISO 10646 (UCS-4)
ISO 10646 (UCS2) √
ISO 8859-1 √
JIS C 6226
64 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Controls
Symbio800 Overview
Power LED
This section covers information pertaining to the Sym-bioTM
800 controller hardware. Service
button
TM
The Symbio 800 controller is a factory-installed, application
specific and programmable controller designed to control USB-B Port
chillers and large packaged HVAC equipment. A 7 inch user

interface features a touchsensitive color screen that provides Battery Slot
facility managers at-a-glance operating status, performance
monitoring, scheduling changes, and operating adjustments.
Other advanced features include automated controller back- 7-segment Rotary dials Ethernet Link 1 P1, P2, P3 and
up, and optional features such as secure remote connectivi- Status display and 2 Status
and Activity LEDs
IMC Link
Transmit (TX)
ty, wireless building communications, mobile device connec- and Receive (RX)
LEDs
tivity, and custom programming with expandable I/O.
Figure 28. Wiring locations and connection ports
For more information, see Symbio800 Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance manual BAS-SVX080*- EN.
Tracer AdaptiView TD7 Display

P1
BACnet MS/TP or
P2
MODBUS
P3
IPC3
IMC
Wi-Fi, WCI’s, Operator Interface
MODBUS RTU Master (LLIDs) Optional XM
Information is tailored to operators, service technicians, and
owners. When operating a chiller, there is specific infor-
mation you need on a day-to-day basis-setpoints, limits,
diagnostic information, and reports. Day-to-day operational
information is presented at the display. Logically organized
groups of information — chiller modes of operation, active di-
agnostics, settings and reports put information conveniently
at your fingertips.
USB Ports (X4) Micro SD Card Ethernet Port 1 Ethernet Port2

Wi-Fi Module, Slot Backup and BACnet/IP TD7 or TD12
LON U60 module, restore MODBUS TCP, Hardware
USB stick TIS
Figure 27. Front View of Symbio800
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 65
Control
Operator Display Screen Display Loading Data Home Screen, Auto Mode
Figure 29. TD7 screens
Home Screen View Operating Modes

The home screen (Figure 30) provides the most frequent- On the Reports screen, touch Operating Modes to view the
ly needed chiller status information on "touch targets" (the current operating status of the chiller in terms of the top-level
entire white rectangular areas) for each chiller component. operating mode and submodes.
Touching any touch target displays a screen containing more
Note: You can also access the Chiller Operating Modes
chiller status information related to each component.
screen from the chiller status button in the upper
left: corner of the screen
Figure 30. Home screen

Table 28. Home screen items Figure 31. Chiller operating modes
Description Resolution Units Touch Circuit 1 or Circuit 2 on Operating Modes screen to
Top Level Mode Ckt1
view circuit and compressor modes and sub modes.
Top Level Mode Ckt 2
Outdoor Air Temperature XXX.X °F /°C
Percent Air Flow Ckt1/Ckt2 XXX.X/XXX.X %
Active Chilled Water Setpoint XXX.X °F /°C
Chiller Load Command X.X %
Evaporator Water Flow Status Flow/No Flow
Evap Entering/Leaving Water Temp XXX.X/XXX.X °F /°C
66 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Table 29. Operating modes - chiller
Chiller Modes Description

MP Resetting The main processor is going through reset
No chiller sub-modes.
The chiller is not running either circuit and cannot run without intervention. Further information is provided
Stopped
by the sub-mode:
Local Stop Chiller is stopped by TD7 Stop button command- cannot be remotely overridden.
Chiller is stopped by the TD7 Panic Stop (by pressing Stop then Immediate Shutdown in succession) - previous
Immediate Stop
shutdown was manually commanded to shutdown immediately.
No Circuits Available The entire chiller is stopped by circuit diagnostics or lockouts that may automatically clear.
Diagnostic Shutdown- Manual Reset The chiller has been shut down on a latching diagnostic that requires manual intervention to reset.
Chiller is running to provide a chilled water temperature per the active chilled water setpoint (may be as arbitrated
Chilled Water Control
from various sources). (For cooling only units, this mode may be suppressed.)
Starting is Inhibited by Low Ambient
The chiller is inhibited based on the outdoor air temperature.
Temperature
Starting is Inhibited by External Source The chiller is inhibited from starting or running by the "external stop" hardwired input.
Power Up Delay Inhibit: min:sec On power up, the chiller will wait for the Power Up Delay Timer to expire.
The chiller is currently being inhibited from starting (and running), but may be allowed to start if the
Run Inhibit
inhibiting or diagnostic condition is cleared. Further information is provided by the submode:
No Circuits Available The entire chiller is stopped by circuit diagnostics or lockouts that may automatically clear.
Start Inhibited by BAS The chiller is stopped by Tracer® or other Building Automation System (BAS).
Starting is Inhibited by External Source The chiller is inhibited from starting or running by the "external stop" hardwired input.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Auto Reset The entire chiller is stopped by a diagnostic that may automatically clear.
Starting is Inhibited by Low Ambient
The chiller is inhibited based on the outdoor air temperature.
Temperature
Power Up Delay Inhibit: min:sec On power up, the chiller will wait for the Power Up Delay Timer to expire.
The chiller is not currently running but can be expected to start at any moment given that the proper
Auto
conditions and interlocks are satisfied. Further information is provided by the submode:
The chiller will wait up to 20 minutes in this mode for evaporator water flow to be established per the flow switch
Waiting For Evaporator Water Flow
hardwired input.
The chiller will wait indefinitely in this mode, for an evaporator leaving water temperature higher than the Chilled
Waiting for A Need to Cool
Water Setpoint plus some control dead-band.
The chiller is not currently running and there is a call for cooling but lead circuit start is delayed by certain
Waiting to Start
interlocks or proofs.
No chiller sub-modes.
The chiller, circuit, and compressor are currently running. Further information is provided by the sub-
Running
mode:
Maximum Capacity The chiller is operating at its maximum capacity.
Capacity Control Softloading The control is limiting the chiller loading due to capacity based softloading settings.
The chiller is running, and loading of individual compressors may be limited by a gradual filter of the chiller's
softloading demand limit setpoint. The starting demand limit and the settling time of this filter is user adjustable as
Demand Limit Softloading
part of the demand limit softload feature. The mode will be displayed as long as the Demand Limit Softloading is
ramping or "settling".
At least one circuit on the chiller is currently running, but the operation of any of the circuits on the chiller
is being actively limited by a chiller level limit. Other sub modes that apply to the Chiller Running top level
Running - Limited
modes may also be displayed here. Refer to the list of circuit limit modes for circuit limits that will cause
display of this Chiller Level Running Limit mode.
The chiller is running and the compressor capacity is unloaded or restricted to load slowly or not at all to keep the
Demand Limit
chiller from exceeding the demand limit set by the customer.
The chiller is running, and loading of individual compressors may be limited by a gradual filter of the chiller's
softloading demand limit setpoint. The starting demand limit and the settling time of this filter is user adjustable as
Demand Limit Softloading
part of the demand limit softload feature. The mode will be displayed as long as the Demand Limit Softloading is
ramping or "settling".
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 67
Control
Chiller Modes Description
The chiller is still running but shutdown is imminent. The chiller is going through a compressor run-unload
Shutting Down
or extended operational pumpdown of the lag circuit/compressor (or all circuits simultaneously).
The evaporator water pump is continuing to run past the shutdown of the compressors, executing the pump off
Evaporator Water Pump Off Delay min:sec
delay timer.
Local Stop, Maximum Capacity Chiller is in the process of being stopped by TD7 Stop button command
Misc These sub-modes may be displayed in most of the top level circuit modes.
Manual Evaporator Pump Override The evaporator water pump relay is on due to a manual command.
Diagnostic Evaporator Water Pump
The evaporator water pump relay is on due to a diagnostic.
Override
Manual Compressor Control Signal Chiller capacity control is being controlled by Operator Display or Service Tool.
Noise Reduction Request The Noise Reduction Request feature has been activated. If the unit is running, fans will be running at lower speed.
Evaporator Water Pump X Locked Out Evaporator Water Pump X has been locked out by manual override from TD7 or TU.
The chiller has not detected communication with the BAS. This mode is only supported by LonTalk systems.
Waiting for BAS Communications Depending on configurations and Setpoint source setting, lack of communication may cause the chiller to shut
down and or become inhibited from starting, but if so, the "Starting is Inhibited by BAS" mode will also occur.
Table 30. Operating modes - circuit
Circuit Level Modes Description

Stopped The circuit is not running, and cannot run without intervention.
The circuit is manually locked out by the circuit lockout setting - the nonvolatile lockout setting is accessible through
Front Panel Circuit Lockout
either the Operator Display or Service Tool.
External Circuit Lockout The respective circuit is locked out by the external circuit lockout binary input.
No Compressors Available The circuit cannot run because necessary compressors are being prevented from running.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Manual Reset The circuit has been shut down on a latching diagnostic that requires manual intervention to reset.
The given circuit is currently being inhibited from starting (and running), but may be allowed to start if the
Run Inhibit
inhibiting or diagnostic condition is cleared.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Auto Reset The circuit has been shutdown on a diagnostic that may clear automatically.
No Compressors Available The circuit cannot run because necessary compressors are being prevented from running.
The circuit is not currently running but can be expected to start at any moment given that the proper
Auto
conditions are satisfied.
This submode is displayed when the EXV is performing a calibration. A calibration is only performed when the
Calibrating EXV
chiller is not running and never more frequently than once every 24 hours.
Waiting to Start The chiller is going through the necessary steps to allow the lead circuit to start.
Start Inhibited Waiting For Oil The compressor (and thus its circuit) will wait up to 2 minutes in this mode for oil level to appear in the oil tank.
The circuit will wait for the time it takes the EXV to get to its commanded pre-position prior to starting the
Waiting For EXV Preposition
compressor. This is typically a relatively short delay and no countdown timer is necessary (less than 15 seconds)
Running A compressor on the given circuit is currently running.
Establishing Minimum Capacity – Low Vi The compressor(GP4 VVi) is being forced to a higher speed than desired for capacity control, in order to maintain
Minimum Speed compressor bearing reliability while in the Low Vi state.
The compressor(GP4 VVi) is being forced to a higher speed than desired for capacity control, in order to maintain
Establishing Min Capacity – Inverted Start
compressor discharge superheat.
The compressor(GP4 VVi) is being forced to a higher speed than desired for capacity control, in order to maintain
Establishing Min Capacity – Inverted Start
compressor discharge superheat.
The circuit is experiencing condenser pressures at or near the condenser limit setting. Compressors on the circuit
Condenser Pressure Limit
will be unloaded to prevent exceeding the limits.
The circuit is experiencing saturated evaporator temperatures at or near the Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout
Evaporator Temperature Limit
setting. Compressors on the circuit will be unloaded to prevent tripping.
The EXV is near or beyond 95% wide open, and the capacity of the circuit (compressor speed) is being held or
EXV Capacity Limit
reduced in order to prevent loss of oil return or insufficient drive cooling.
For circuits with manifolded compressors only, the compressor(s) are being loaded to meet requested capacity.
Establishing Minimum Capacity - Low
See Low Compressor Differential Pressure Limit spec. Note: This mode can be displayed at a Compressor level as
Differential Pressure
well.
Shutting Down The circuit is preparing to de-energize the compressor.
The circuit is in the process shutting down by performing an operational pumpdown just prior to stopping the last
Operational Pumpdown running compressor. The EXV is commanded closed. Pumpdown will terminate when both the liquid level and the
evap pressure are low (below specific criteria) or after a specific time has expired.
68 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Circuit Level Modes Description
Misc. These sub modes may be displayed in most of the top level circuit modes.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Manual Reset The circuit has been shut down on a latching diagnostic that requires manual intervention to reset.
Table 31. Operating modes - compressor
Compressor Level Modes Description

Stopped The compressor is not running, and cannot run without intervention.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Manual Reset The compressor has been shut down on a latching diagnostic that requires manual intervention to reset.
Compressor is manually locked out by the compressor lockout setting - the nonvolatile lockout setting is accessible
Front Panel Compressor Lockout
through either the Operator Display or Service Tool.
Low Oil Flow Cool Down Time min:sec See oil flow protection spec.
The given compressor is currently being inhibited from starting (and running), but may be allowed to start
Run Inhibit
if the inhibiting or diagnostic condition is cleared.
Diagnostic Shutdown - Auto Reset The compressor has been shut down on a diagnostic that may clear automatically.
The compressor is not currently running but can be expected to start at any moment given that the proper
Auto
conditions are satisfied.
Running A compressor on the given circuit is currently running.
The compressor is running with high discharge temperatures and is being forced loaded to its step load point,
Minimum Capacity - High Discharge
without regard to the leaving water temperature control, to prevent tripping on high compressor discharge
Temperature
temperature.
Establishing Minimum Capacity - High Oil The compressor is running with high oil temperatures and is being force loaded to its step load point, without regard
Temperature to the leaving water temperature control, to prevent tripping on high compressor oil temperature.
The compressor is currently running, but the operation of the chiller/compressor is being actively limited
Running - Limit by the controls. Further information is provided by the sub-mode. See the section below regarding criteria
for annunciation of limit modes
The compressor is running and its capacity is being limited by high currents. The current limit setting is 120% RLA (to
Current Limit avoid overcurrent trips) or lower as set by the compressor's "share" of the active current limit (demand limit) setting
for the entire chiller.
This mode will occur if the compressor's suction saturated temperature exceeds the Hot Start Threshold
Temperature at the point at which the step load for the respective circuit would be desired. This is often the case
in a high water temperature pulldown. While in this mode, the compressor will not be allowed to load past its
Hot Start Limit minimum load capacity step, but it will not inhibit other compressors from staging on. This mode is necessary to
prevent nuisance trips due to compressor overcurrent or high pressure cutout. Reasonable pulldown rates can still
be expected despite this limit, since the compressor's capacity even at partial load is much greater at high suction
saturated temperatures.
The compressor is running and is inhibited to load or unload in order to prevent conditions that would exceed safety
Compressor Differential Pressure Limit
trip points. See High Compressor Differential Pressure Limitation spec.
The compressor is running and is inhibited to load or unload in order to prevent conditions that would exceed safety
Compressor Pressure Ratio Limit
trip points. See High Compressor Differential Pressure Limitation spec.
For manifolded compressors only, the Compressor's Low Differential Pressure Protection Integral has risen to
Establishing Minimum Capacity - Low
30% of its trip value. This will force load the female load step on that circuit's compressor. Note: This mode can be
displayed at a Circuit level as well.
A compressor is in this limit due to low discharge superheat. The oil return solenoid valve will be cycled closed/open
Oil Return Limit which allows the discharge gas temperature and the corresponding discharge superheat to increase, improving oil
quality to the compressor.
Shutting Down The circuit is preparing to de-energize the compressor.
The compressor is in its run unload time. The run unload time must expire before the compressor will shut down. (The
Compressor Unloading
unload time is typically about 5 seconds.)
Misc. The circuit is preparing to de-energize the compressor.
Service Pumpdown The compressor is currently performing a service pumpdown.
Restart Inhibit min:sec If there is accumulated Restart Inhibit Time, it must expire before a compressor is allowed to start.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 69
Control
Alarms to view the Reports screen. The Reports screen contains the
following buttons:
You can use the display to view alarms and to reset them.
Alarms are communicated to the display immediately upon ● Custom Report 1
detection. ● Custom Report 2
Viewing the Alarms Screen ● Custom Report 3
Touch the Alarms button in the home screen menu to view ● Evaporator
the Alarms screen. A table of active alarms appears that is ● Condenser
organized chronologically with the most recent at the top of
the list, as shown in Figure 32. This example shows the de- ● Compressor
fault view, which appears each time you return to the screen. ● Motor About
List can be sorted by any of the other columns if desired.
● Operating Modes
Note: A page number appears in the lower right corner
of the screen. If a screen contains more than one ● Log Sheet
page, up/down arrows also appear for viewing the ● ASHRAE Chiller Log
other pages.
Each button links to the report named on the button.
Figure 32. Alarm screen Figure 33. Report screen

The Alarms screen is accessible by depressing the Alarms The Reports tab allows a user to select from a list of reports
enunciator. A verbal description will be provided. headings. Each report will generate a list of status items as
A scrollable list of the last active Alarms is presented. Per- defined in the tables that follow.
forming a "Reset Alarms" will reset all active Alarms regard-
less of type, machine or circuit. The scrollable list will be Editing a Custom Report
sorted by time of occurrence. You can edit the custom report by adding, removing, or reor-
"Alarms" Key Behavior: der data as follows:
● Alarm Shutdown (immediate) has occurred: Flash red 1. On the Custom Report screen, touch Edit. The Edit Cus-
tom Report screen appears.
● Alarm Shutdown (normal) has occurred: Flash yellow
2. Add, remove, or re-order as follows:
● Informational warning is present: Flash blue
a. T
o add an item to the custom report, touch it. It re-
● No alarms present: Default button color, not flashing sponds by changing to blue. You can use the arrows
to scroll through the rest of the items that can be
Reports added to the custom report. Then touch Add to move
the selected item to the box on the right side of the
You can use the Tracer display to view a variety of reports
screen.
and to create and edit a custom report. All reports contain
live data that refreshes every 2-5 seconds. b. T
o remove an item from the custom report, touch it.
It responds by changing to blue. You can use the ar-
Viewing the Reports Screen rows to scroll through the rest of the items that can be
removed from the custom report. Then touch Remove
Touch the Reports button in the main menu area (Figure 30)
70 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
to move the selected item to the box on the left side
of the screen.
c. T
o re-order items in the custom report, touch it. It
responds by changing to blue. Use the arrows to
change the order of a highlighted item.
3. To save and view your edited custom report, touch
Save.
Figure 36. Report condenser screen

Table 33. Report condenser screen items
Description Resolution Units
Outdoor Air Temperature XXX.X °F /°C
Percent Air Flow Ckt1/Ckt2 XXX.X %
Condenser Saturated Rfgt Temp CktX XXX.X °F/°C
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure CktX XXX.X PSI/kPa
Differential Refrigerant Pressure CktX XXX.X PSID/kPaD
Figure 34. Edit custom report screen Cond Liquid Line Rfgt Saturated Temp
XXX.X °F /°C
CktX
Condenser Liquid Line Rfgt Temp CktX XXX.X °F /°C
Condenser Liquid Line Rfgt Subcooling
XXX.X °F/°C
CktX
EXV Percent Open CktX XXX.X %
Condenser Liquid Line Rfgt Pressure
XXX.X PSI/kPa
CktX
Condenser Refrigerant Tank Valve CktX Open/Closed
Figure 35. Report evaporator screen

Table 32. Report evaporator screen items
Description Resolution Units

Active Chilled Water Setpoint XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Entering Water Temperature XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Leaving Water Temperature XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Water Pump Override Auto/On
Evaporator Water Flow Status Flow/No Flow
Figure 37. Report compressor screen
Evaporator Approach Temperature CktX XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Refrigerant Pool Temp CktX XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure CktX XXX.X °F /°C
Evaporator Saturated Rfgt Temp CktX XXX.X °F /°C
Oil return Solenoid Valve CprsrXA Open/Closed
Oil return Solenoid Valve CprsrXB Open/Closed
EXV Percent Open CktX XXX.X %
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 71
Control
Table 34. Report compressor screen items Equipment Settings
Description Resolution Units You can use the TD7 display to monitor and change a variety
Running Status On/Off of equipment settings.
Average Line Current % RLA Starter XX XXX.X %
Average Motor Current % RLA AFD XX XXX.X % Viewing the Settings Screen
Frequency Command CprsrXX XX.X Hz
Starts CprsrXX XXXX
Touch the Settings button in the main menu area to view the
Running Time CprsrXX XXXX.XX Hr:Min Settings screen. Equipment Settings identifies a column of
Chiller Running Time XXXX.XX Hr:Min buttons located on the screen (see the outlined column in
Suction Refrigerant Pressure CpsrXX XXX.X PSI/kPa Figure 39). The buttons are:
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure CktX XXX.X PSI/kPa
● Chiller Settings
Differential Rfgt Pressure Cprsr XX XXX.XX PSI/kPa
Oil Loss Level Sensor Wet/Dry ● Feature Settings
Discharge Temperature CprsrXX XXX.X °F /°C
● Chiller Water Reset
Discharge Superheat CprsrXX XXX.X °F/°C
Oil Pressure CprsrXX XXX.X PSI/kPa ● Manual Control Settings
Oil Temperature CprsrXX XXX.X °F/°C
Economizer Valve Percent Open CprsrXX XXX.X %
● Service Settings
Economizer Discharge Pressure CprsrXX XX.X PSI/kPa Each of these buttons provide access to a screen that con-
Economizer Discharge Temperature o
tains additional buttons related to each topic. This section
XXX.X F/°C
CprsrXX
Economizer Superheat CprsrXX XXX.X o
F/°C
provides detailed information about these screens.
Figure 39. Setting screen

Figure 38. Report motor screen
Viewing and Changing Equipment Settings
Table 35. Report motor screen items
Each button in the Equipment Settings column on the Set-
Description Resolution Units tings screen takes you to a menu screen that contains a
Active Demand Limit Setpoint XXX.X % group of buttons. Each button displays the name of a setting
Average Line Current %RLA Starter XX XXX.X % and its current value (Figure 40). Touch any button to view
Average Motor Current %RLA AFD XX XXX.X % a screen where you can change the setting for the feature
Frequency Command Cprsr XX XX.X Hz
shown on the button.
Motor Current L1 % RLA Starter XX XXX.X %
Motor Current L2 % RLA Starter XX XXX.X % Note: A page number appears in the lower right corner
Motor Current L3 % RLA Starter XX XXX.X % of the screen. If a screen contains more than one
Motor Current L1 Starter XX XXX.X Amps page, up/down arrows also appear for viewing the
Motor Current L2 Starter XX XXX.X Amps other pages, as in Figure 40.
Motor Current L3 Starter XX XXX.X Amps
Motor Voltage AB Starter XX XXXX.X Volts
Motor Voltage BC Starter XX XXXX.X Volts
Motor Voltage CA Starter XX XXXX.X Volts
72 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Figure 40. Equipment setting screen (Chiller setting Figure 41. Chilled water reset type screen
shown)
To change an equipment setting, follow this procedure:
1. Touch one of the button in the Equipment Settings
column on the Settings screen, such as Chiller Settings.
The corresponding screen appears (in this case, the
Chiller Settings screen).
2. Touch the button that shows the equipment setting you
want to change. A screen that allows you to change the
equipment setting appears. There are two types of these
screens:
a. F
or screens with button selections (Figure 41), touch
the button that represents the setting you want. The
button becomes shaded, and a Save button appears Figure 42. Changed chilled water setpoint screen
at the bottom of the screen.
Keypad features
b. F
or screens with numerical keypads (Figure 42),
touch the appropriate numbers to change the current ● When you enter a new number, the value in the New
value. The new value appears above the keypad. value field is deleted and replaced with the new entry.
3. Touch Save to complete the change. The current value ● The backspace (arrow) key deletes the characters you
is updated in the upper left side of the screen, demon- previously entered.
strating that the change has been communicated to
● If the keypad is used to enter a setpoint that is out of
the Tracer Symbio800 controller. The screen you were
range, an error dialog will appear when you touch the
previously viewing appears.
Save button.
● Keypads that allow negative numbers have positive and
negative number (+/-) keys.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 73
Control
Table 36. Settings screen items Service Settings

Setpoints on the Service Settings screen are only intended
Description
Chiller Settings
for use by experienced service personnel. Setpoints include
Setpoint Source security, if enabled.
Front Panel Chilled Water Setpoint
Auxiliary Chilled Water Setpoint The Service Settings screen is found through Chiller Set-
Front Panel Demand Limit Setpoint tings, and includes a warning message for the user.
Differential to Start
Differential to Stop
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout
Cooling Low Ambient Lockout Temperature
Condenser Pressure Limit Setpoint
Evaporator Water Pump Off Delay
High Evaporator Water Temp Cutout
Low Evaporator Water Temp Cutout
Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout
Demand Limit Startup Target
Demand Limit Softload Time
Capacity Control Softload Time
Front Panel Noise Reduction Request
Noise Reduction Cond Fan Speed Clamp
Power-Up Start Delay
Chiller Power Demand Time Period
Local Atmospheric Pressure
Feature Settings
Figure 43. Warning message
External Chiller Water Setpoint Enable
External Demand Limit Setpoint Enable
Staging Sequence
Chilled Water Reset Type
Return Water Reset Ratio
Return Water Start Ratio
Return Water Maximum Reset
Outdoor Air Reset Ratio
Outdoor Air Start Reset
Outdoor Air Maximum Reset
Mode Overrides
Manual Capacity Control Auto/Manual
Evaporator Water Pump Override Auto/On
Evaporator Water Pump Lockout Pump 1 Not Locked Out/ Locked Out
Evaporator Water Pump Lockout Pump 2 Not Locked Out/ Locked Out
Front Panel Circuit Lockout Ckt1 Not Locked Out/ Locked Out
Front Panel Circuit Lockout Ckt2 Not Locked Out/ Locked Out Figure 44. Service settings screen
EXV Manual Control Override Ckt1 Auto/Manual
EXV Manual Control Override Ckt2 Auto/Manual
Front Panel Compressor Lockout Cprsr 1A Not Locked Out/ Locked Out Display Settings
Service Pumpdown Command Cprsr1A Abort/Start
Front Panel Compressor Lockout Cprsr 2A Not Locked Out/ Locked Out You can use the Tracer AdaptiView display to change the
Service Pumpdown Command Cprsr2A Abort/Start format of the information that appears on the display, and to
clean the touch screen.
Touch the Settings button in the main menu area to view
the Settings screen. Display Settings identifies a column of
buttons located on the screen (see Figure 45). The buttons
are:
● Display Preferences
● Language
● Date and Time
● Clean Display
Each button provide access to a screen that is related to the
button name.
74 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Viewing and Changing Display Preferences date formats:
On the Settings screen, touch Display Preferences to view a ● MMDDYYYY (default)

screen containing these buttons: ● YYYYMMDD
● DDMMYYYY
● Date Format
● Date Separator
Date Separator
Use the Date Separator screen to choose from the following
● Time Format
date formats:
● Unit System
● None
● Pressure Units ● Slash (default)
● Hyphen
● Number Format
Time Format
Use the Time Format screen to choose from the following
time formats:
● 12 hour (default)
● 24 hour
Units System
Use the Display Units screen to choose from the following
display units:
● SI
● Inch-Pounds (default)
Figure 45. Display preference screen Pressure Units

Each of the buttons shows the name of a display preference Use the Pressure Units screen to choose from the following
and its format (current value). Touch any of these buttons to pressure units:
view a screen where you can change the format. The button ● kPaA (default if "SI" is chosen for display units)
representing the format currently used is shaded (see the ● kPaG
"MMDDYYYY" button). ● PSIA (default if "Inch-Pound" is chosen for display units)
● PSIG
Number Format
● 1000000.0
● 1000000,0
Laungage Settings
Figure 46. Date format page

To change the format:
1. Touch the button that shows that format you prefer.
2. Touch Save to confirm your selection and to return to
the Display Preferences screen.
Date Format Figure 47. Language page
Use the Date Format screen to choose from the following The language that is currently in use on the display is ex-
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 75
Control
pressed as the current value on the Language screen. The On the Settings screen, touch Clean Display to disable the
button that displays the current value is shaded (see the Tracer AdaptiView display screen for 5 seconds after finger
"English" button in Figure 47 as an example). is removed. This process allows screen cleaning without it
responding to touch. During this time, the screen is black
To change the language:
with a number in the center that counts down the seconds.
1. Touch the button that identifies the language you prefer. After 5 seconds, the Settings screen re-appears.
2. Touch Save to confirm your selection and to return to
the Settings screen.
Date and Time Settings
Figure 49. Countdown screen
Security Settings
If security is enabled, the Tracer AdaptiView display requires
Figure 48. Date and time screen that you log in with a four-digit security PIN to make setting
changes that are protected by security. This feature prevents
The current date and time for the display is expressed as the
unauthorized personnel from doing so. There are two levels
current value. The current value appears below the center
of security, each allowing specific changes to be made.
line on the screen.
You can view all data without logging in. The log-in screen
Above the center line, the following date and time attributes
appears only when you try to change a setting that is pro-
appear:
tected by security, or when you touch the Log in button from
● Month the Settings screen.
● Day
Disabling/Enabling Security
● Year
The Tracer AdaptiView display gives you the ability to disable
● Hour or enable the security feature that allows a user to log in and
● Minute log out.
● AM/PM To disable security, you must be logged in:
To change the date or time: 1. From the Settings screen, touch the Security button.
The Security screen appears (Figure 50).
1. Touch the square presenting the attribute you want to
change. The square becomes highlighted. Note: If you are logged out, the Log in screen appears.
2. Touch the up or down arrow key on the screen until the 2. Touch the Disable button. The button becomes shaded.
your desired selection appears. Repeat the process for
any other attributes you want to change. 3. Touch Save. The Settings screen appears with only
the Security button visible. The Log in/Logout button is
3. Touch Save to confirm your selection and return to the gone.
Settings screen.
To enable security:
Note: Alternately, fields can be edited by touching the
highlighted square a second time to access a key- 1. From the Settings screen, touch the Security button.
pad. The Security screen appears (Figure 50).
2. Touch the Enable button. The button becomes shaded.
Cleaning the Display 3. Touch Save. The Settings screen appears with a Log
76 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
out button, in addition to the Security button.
Note: If you enter an invalid PIN, an error message ap-
pears on the Log in screen.
3. Touch Save.
a. If you viewed the Log in screen from touching Log in
on the Settings screen, the Settings screen appears
with a Log out button on it.
b. If the Log in screen appeared when you tried to
change a setting, you return to that setting screen.
Note: The PIN is valid until 30 minutes of inactivity pass-

es, or until you log out.
Figure 50. Security screen - disable
Figure 52. Log in screen
Logging Out
Figure 51. Security settings screen
To log out:
Logging In 1. Touch the Log out button. A confirmation screen appears
There are two levels of security: (Figure 53).
● Security Level 1 allows users to change a limited group 2. Touch Yes to confirm that you want to log out. The Set-
of secure settings. The default security PIN is 1111. tings screen appears with a Log in button on it.
● Security Level 2 allows users to change all secure set-

tings. The default security PIN is 7123.
A technician must use the Tracer TU service tool to define a
different PIN, or to recall a PIN that has been forgotten.
When defining a PIN in Tracer TU, the technician enters a
4-digit PIN that corresponds with the desired level of
Security.
To log in:
1. Touch the Log in button. The Log in screen appears
(Figure 52).
2. Use the keypad to enter your PIN. Figure 53. Log out confirmation screen
a. T
he PIN is a four-digit number, which was configured
for your system with the Tracer TU service tool.
b. A
s you enter the number, the PIN remains hidden by
asterisks.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 77
Control
Tracer TU
The AdaptiView™ TD7 operator interface allows for daily op-
erational tasks and setpoint changes. However, to adequate-
ly service Sintesis chillers, Tracer® TU service tool is re-
quired. (Non-Trane personnel, contact your local Trane office
for software purchase information.) Tracer TU adds a level of
sophistication that improves service technician effectiveness
and minimizes chiller downtime. This portable PC-based ser-
vice-tool software supports service and maintenance tasks,
and is required for software upgrades, configuration changes
and major service tasks.
Figure 54. Tracer TU
Tracer TU serves as a common interface to all Trane®
chillers, and will customize itself based on the properties of
the chiller with which it is communicating. Thus, the service Sequence of Operation
technician learns only one service interface.
The panel bus is easy to troubleshoot using LED sensor veri- NOTICE
fication. Only the defective device is replaced. Tracer TU can Equipment Damage !
communicate with individual devices or groups of devices.
Ensure that the compressor and oil sump heaters have
All chiller status, machine configuration settings, customiz- been operating properly for a minimum of 24 hours be-
able limits, and up to 100 active or historic diagnostics are fore starting. Failure to do so could result in equipment
displayed through the service-tool software interface. damage.
LEDs and their respective Tracer TU indicators visually This section will provide basic information on chiller opera-
confirm the availability of each connected sensor, relay, and tion for common events. With microelectronic controls, ladder
actuator. diagrams cannot show today's complex logic, as the control
Tracer TU is designed to run on a customer's laptop, con- functions are much more involved than older pneumatic or
nected to the Tracer AdaptiView control panel with a USB solid state controls.
cable. Your laptop must meet the following hardware and Adaptive control algorithms can also complicate the exact
software requirements: sequence of operations. This section illustrates common
● 1 GB RAM (minimum) control sequences.
● 1024 x 768 screen resolution

Software Operation Overview
● Ethernet 10/100 LAN card
The Software Operation Overview shown in Figure 55 is a
● Available USB 2.0 port diagram of the five possible software states. This diagram
● Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise or Professional oper- can be thought of as a state chart, with the arrows and arrow
ating system (32-bit or 64-bit) or Windows 8.1. text depicting the transitions between states.
● The text in the circles is the visible top level operating
Important: T
racer TU V8.6 was the final release to sup-
port Windows XP. Beginning with Tracer TU mode displayed on TracerTM AdaptiView.
V9.0, you will need to migrate to Windows 7 ● The shading of each software state circle corresponds
or Windows 8.1 operating system. to the shading on the time lines that show the state the
chiller is in.
Notes:
There are five generic states that the software can be in:
● Tracer TU is designed and validated for this minimum
laptop configuration. Any variation from this configuration ● Power Up
may have different results. Therefore, support for Tracer ● Stopped
TU is limited to only those laptops with the configuration
previously specified. ● Starting
● For more information, see TTU-SVN01*-EN Tracer TU ● Running

Getting Started Guide ● Stopping
78 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
RTAG Sequence of Operation: Chiller State Chart
Power Up
Boot and
Stopped Self Test
or
Run Inhibit
ed Co Auto
n firm wn mm
Co utdo an
d
Sh
Re
o f le a s
Inh e
ib i
t
Auto
Shutting Down or
Stop Command or Diagnostic Waiting to Start
St
op
Co
m ma art
Di n d d St
ag e
no rm Check for
s nfi Differential
t ic Co
to Start
Running
or
Running Limit
Check for
Differential
to Stop
Figure 55. Software operation overview
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 79
Control
Timelines ● Solid double arrows indicate fixed timers.
The time line indicates the upper level operating mode, as it ● Dashed double arrows indicate variable timers.
would be viewed on the Tracer AdaptiView. Important: S
equence of events timelines include options
● The shading color of the cylinder indicates the software that may not be available on specific unit con-
state. figurations.
● Text in parentheses indicates sub-mode text as viewed

on Tracer AdaptiView. Power Up Diagram
● Text above the time line cylinder is used to illustrate Figure 56 shows the respective TD-7 AdaptiView screens
inputs to the Main Processor. This may include user input during a power up of the Symbio800 and display. This pro-
to the Tracer AdaptiView Touch screen, control inputs cess takes 25 seconds for the Symbio800 and 90 seconds
from sensors, or control inputs from a Generic BAS. for the display. On all power ups, the software model always
will transition through the 'Stopped' Software state indepen-
● Boxes indicate control actions such as turning on relays, dent of the last mode. If the last mode before power down
or pulsing compressor load or unload solenoids. was 'Auto', the transition from 'Stopped' to 'Starting' occurs,
● Smaller cylinders under the main cylinder indicate diag- but it is not apparent to the user.
nostic checks.
● Text outside a box or cylinder indicates time based func-
tions.
Booting Operator Display

(40 Seconds) Loading Display Data
(50 Seconds)
Minimum Time Until First
Compressor Restarts
(39 Seconds)
Starting Sequence
See “Power Up to
Starting” Sequence Diagram Continue Along
Starting Sequence See
“Power Up to Starting”
Last Mode
Auto
External Symbio800 Boot Up Display Finishes Booting
Power IF Display Finished Loading Data
Applied Display Starts Loading Data
Last Mode
Booting UC800 Stop
(25 Seconds)
Operator Display and UC800 Stopped

Start Booting Remain in
“Stop”
UC800 Fully Operational indefinitely until
“Auto” command
IPC Bus Comm Begins See
“Stopped To Starting”
*Display will show either Auto or Stop button active once it is fully loaded
Figure 56. Sequence of operation: power up diagram
80 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Power Up to Starting
Figure 57 diagram shows the timing from a power up event to energizing the first compressor. The shortest allowable time
would be under the following conditions:
● No motor restart inhibit time left from subsequent starts
● Evaporator Water flow occurs quickly with pump on command
● Power up Start Delay set to 0 minutes
● Need to cool (differential to start) already exists
● Oil level is detected immediately
The above conditions would allow for a minimum power up to starting the first compressor time of about 45 seconds (variations
may exist due to options installed). Note that it is not advisable to start a chiller "cold" the oil heaters should be in operation for
a sufficient length of time prior to first start. Consult the chiller's IOM for specifics.
Auto Mode commanded Call for Cooling**

by Front Panel or BAS (Differential to Start is met)
Power Power Waiting Waiting Transition to

Auto Auto
Applied Up To Start To Start Running
Symbio800 Confirm Evaporator Water Flow Wait for Need Confirm

Boot Time (6 Second Filter) To Cool Presence of Oil
(25 Sec) Send Start Command
(Diff to Start) (0 to 90 seconds) to Lead Compressor*
Enforce Restart Inhibit Timer
Fans pre-start,
(0 to 1 minute)
EXVs moving to
Preposition
Power Up Delay Inhibit Timer Start Control of
EXVs self- 0 to 25 Seconds; Evap
(User Adjustable 0 to 30 minutes) Condenser Fan Flow
close on Isolation Valve
power up Compressor Delay Time
has expired
Confirm Presence
Energize Evaporator of Oil Within
Oil Heaters Water Pump Relay 90 Seconds
Always Energized
when Compressor
is De-energized Pre-Position EXV of
Confirm Evaporator Water Lead Circuit
Flow Within 20 minutes
(6 Second Filter)
Check Evap Pressure for

EXV remains closed Low Pressure Cutout
* Lead Compressor (and its lead circuit) is

determined by staging algorithm – “Balanced”,
“Circuit 1 Lead”, or “Circuit 2 Lead” selection –
also influenced by lockouts, restart inhibit, or
diagnostics present
Figure 57. Sequence of events: power up to starting
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 81
Control
Stopped to Starting
Figure 58 shows the timing from a stopped mode to energizing the first compressor. The shortest allowable time would be
under the following conditions:
● No motor restart inhibit time left from subsequent starts
● Evaporator Water flow occurs quickly with pump on command
● Need to cool (differential to start) already exists
The above conditions would allow a compressor to start in about 20 seconds.
Auto Mode commanded Call for Cooling**

by Front Panel or BAS (Differential to Start is met)
10/1/2012 - 10/31/201210/30/2012 - 12/11/2012
Stopped 6/12/2012 - 7/3/2012 7/2/2012 - 9/3/2012 9/2/2012 - 10/2/2012
Stop Waiting Waiting Transition to
Or Run Auto Auto
To Start To Start Running
Inhibit
Confirm Evaporator Water Flow Wait for Need Confirm Fans pre-start, EXV
(6 Second Filter) To Cool Presence of Oil moving to
Preposition Send Start Command
(Diff to Start) (0 to 90 seconds) 12/11/2012 to Lead Compressor*
7/3/2012
Enforce Restart Inhibit Timer9/3/2012
0 to 25 Seconds, Evap
asdf asdf Isolation Valve asdf
6/13/2012 (0 to 1 minute)
10/2/2012 10/31/2012
Compressor Delay Time
asdf asdf has expired
Start Control of
Condenser Fan Flow
Pre-Position EXV of
6/14/2012
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012 Lead Circuit
Confirm Presence
6/15/2012
Energize Evaporator of Oil Within
6/14/2012
Water Pump Relay 90 Seconds 6/13/2012 - 12/10/2012
Check Evap Pressure for
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012 Low Pressure Cutout
Confirm Evaporator Water
Flow Within 20 minutes
(6 Second Filter)
Oil Heaters
Always Energized when
Compressor is De-energized
* Lead Compressor (and its lead circuit) is

EXV remains closed
determined by staging algorithm – “Balanced”,
“Circuit 1 Lead”, or “Circuit 2 Lead” selection –
also influenced by lockouts, restart inhibit, or
diagnostics present
**Note: If Free Cooling is active, it will be the first
stage of cooling to stage on.
Figure 58. Sequence of events: stopped to starting
82 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Running (Lead Compressor/Circuit Start and Run)

Figure 59 shows a typical start and run sequence for the lead compressor and its circuit
Chiller and Lead Circuit

Enter Exit Stage On
Mode is “Running” - Lag
Limit Mode Limit Mode Setpoint Met*
Circuit Mode is “Auto”
8/14/2012 - 9/11/2012 10/28/2012 - 12/11/2012
6/12/2012 - 7/24/2012 7/23/2012 - 8/14/2012 Running 9/10/2012 - 10/29/2012 Running
Lead Running Running Lead Circuit: Running Lag Circuit:
Compressor Running Limit Waiting to Start Continue
Running Running
Hold EXV Pre-position EXV moving to preposition
(10 Seconds) 0 to 25 Seconds
8/15/2012 Modulate
7/24/2012 Compressor9/11/2012
6/13/2012
for Limit 10/29/2012
Modulate Compressor 12/11/2012
Control
for Start Control of
Hold EXV of Lead Capacity Control Condenser Fan Flow
Circuit at pre- on Lag Circuit
position for 10 sec Modulate EXV for
Pressure Control Send Start Command
Pre-Position EXV of
De-energize Lag Circuit to Lag Compressor
Oil Heaters
Of Lead Circuit Modulate Compressor
for Prepare to Start
Capacity Control Lag Compressor,
Check for Oil,
Control Lead Circuit Check for LPC
Condenser Fans for
Optimum Differential
Pressure
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012
6/13/2012 Enforce All Running Mode Diagnostics for Chiller, Lead Compressor and its Circuit
Milestone Description
*Note: The decision to stage on or off another compressor is determined by

the Average Running Compressor Load Command, Water Temperature Error, and Time Since Last Stage
Circuit X Lead: A compressor on the selected circuit will lead followed by a compressor on the alternate circuit, given an
appropriately increasing chiller load. Additional compressors will alternate between lead and lag circuits. Variable speed
compressors will always be the first compressors to start and last compressors to stop.
Figure 59. Sequence of operation: running (lead compressor/circuit start and run)
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 83
Control
Running (Lag Compressor/Circuit Start and Run)

Figure 60 shows a typical start and run sequence for the lag compressor and its circuit
All Compressors Running

Chiller and Both Circuit Enter Exit
At or Near Max Capacity
Modes are “Running” Limit Mode Limit Mode
(Unable to Achieve CWSP)
8/13/2012 - 9/11/2012
6/12/2012 - 7/24/2012 7/23/2012 - 8/14/2012Running 9/11/2012 - 10/30/2012 10/28/2012 - 12/11/2012
All Running Running Lag Circuit: Running Running
Compressors Running Limit Continue
Running Running
7/24/2012 (All
8/13/2012
Cprsrs &
Modulate
Compressor 9/11/2012 Max
6/13/2012 Energize Maximum Capacity
for Limit 10/30/2012
Modulate Compressor Capacity Relay after the
Control
for Adjustable Filter Time
Modulate Capacity Control (0 to 1500 Seconds)
Compressor for
Capacity Control
Maximum Capacity
Submode
De-energize
Oil Heaters
Of Lag Circuit
Control Both Circuit

Condenser Fans for
Optimum Differential
Pressure
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012
6/13/2012 Enforce All Running Mode Diagnostics for Chiller, Lead Compressor and its Circuit
Milestone Description
*Note: The decision to stage on or off another compressor is determined by

the Average Running Compressor Load Command, Water Temperature Error, and Time Since Last Stage
Figure 60. Sequence of operation: running (lag compressor/circuit start and run)
84 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Satisfied Setpoint
Figure 61 shows the normal transition from Running to shutting down due to the Evap Leaving water temp falling below the
differential to stop setpoint.
Normal Pumpdown Termination**

Differential to Stop is Met
6/12/2012 - 8/10/2012 8/10/2012 - 10/13/2012 Criteria is Met- for
10/13/2012 Last Circuit
12/11/2012
Running Shutting Down
Running Auto
Last
Last Circuit Mode: Last Circuit Mode: Shutting Down Both Circuit Modes: Auto
Compressor
Running SubMode: Operational Pumpdown* Waiting for Need to Cool
At Min
Capacity Operational Pumpdown
(See max time allowed below)
Close EXV
(0 to 25 Seconds)
8/11/2012 10/14/2012 12/11/2012
Send Stop Command
To Compressor(s)
Fully Close EXV
No Pumpdown Required Turn Off Last Circuit’s

IF* Condenser Fans
Close Condenser
Pumpdown Rfgt Tank Solenoid
Required Valve****
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012
6/15/2012 12/11/2012
Enforce All Non Running
Perform Operational
Pumpdown for Last Mode Diagnostics
Circuit if Required
6/12/2012 - 12/10/2012 Energize Last Circuit

6/13/2012 Check for 12/11/2012 Oil Heaters
Normal Pumpdown
Termination Criteria Met **
*Operational Pumpdown is required if the Outdoor Air Temperature is less than 50F, or the Entering
Evaporator Water Temperature is greater than (outdoor air temperature – 10°F). With AFD, compressors
will be at max speed for operational pumpdown.
** Operational pumpdown is terminated normally in the following configurations when:

Water with 2-Pass Evaporator:
-The evaporator (suction) pressure is at or below the “Pumpdown Termination Pressure” setting OR
LERTC saturated pressure (28.6F), which ever is greater
-The condenser (compressor discharge) pressure exceeds 315psia.
-The compressor pressure ratio exceeds 8.
-The system differential pressure exceeds 265psid or < 25min.
Glycol with 2-Pass Evaporator:
The evaporator (suction) pressure is at or below the “Pumpdown Termination Pressure” setting OR
LERTC saturated pressure (per guidance -5F minimum), which ever is greater
-The compressor pressure ratio exceeds 8.
-The system differential pressure exceeds 265psid or < 25min.
Water with Single Pass Evaporator:

LERTC saturated pressure (32F), which ever is greater
-The compressor pressure ratio exceeds 12.3
-The system differential pressure exceeds 265psid.
Glycol with Single Pass Evaporator:
LERTC saturated pressure (per guidance -5F minimum), which ever is greater
-The compressor pressure ratio exceeds 12.3
-The system differential pressure exceeds 265psid.
The maximum allowed time for Operational Pumpdown is Max Pumpdown Time setting (default to 120
sec.) * number of compressors configured on the circuit.
***Automatic evaporator isolation valve control will close valve if Outdoor Ambient Air Temperature at
circuit shutdown is less than evaporator leaving water cutout setpoint plus 3°C.
****If Condenser Refrigerant Tanks are installed
Figure 61. Sequence of events: satisfied setpoint
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 85
Control
Unloading Unstaging
Figure 62 shows the normal transition from full load to minimum load while the chiller is running
All Compressors Running At

Less Than Max Capacity
StageOff Setpoint Met***
7/30/2012 - 9/27/2012 Criteria is Met for Last Circuit
9/27/2012 - 11/4/2012
6/12/2012 - 7/30/2012 Running Running
11/4/2012 - 12/11/2012
Running Lag Circuit Mode: Shutting Down Running
Lag Circuit Mode: Auto
Running SubMode: Operational Pumpdown* Running Last
(All Compressor at
Compressors Operational Pumpdown
(0 Seconds to Min Capacity
& Max Max Pumpdown Timer(Default: 2 min.))
Capacity)
Remove Maximum Close EXV
Capacity Submode (0 to 25 Seconds)
6/13/2012 7/30/2012 9/28/2012 Send Stop 11/5/2012 Continue to Control
Command To Lag Capacity by Modulating
Fully Close EXV
Compressor Lead Compressor
De-Energize the
No Pumpdown Required
Maximum Capacity IF*
Relay after Close Condenser Stop Lag Circuits
Adjustable Filter Rfgt Tank Solenoid Condenser Fans
Time (0 to 600 Sec) Pumpdown Valve****
Required
Perform Operational Energize Lag
Pumpdown for Last Circuit Heaters
Continue to Control Capacity Circuit if Required*
by Modulating Compressor
Capacity (Speed, Port Loader, 6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012
Economizer)
6/14/2012 Check for Normal
12/11/2012
Pumpdown Termination
Criteria Met **
6/12/2012 - 7/30/2012 7/30/2012 - 9/28/2012 9/28/2012 - 12/11/2012

Enforce All Running 7/30/2012Enforce All Non Operational Pumpdown
9/28/2012 Enforce Running Mode Diagnostics for Chiller,
Mode Diagnostics Diagnostics Last Compressor and its Circuit
*** Note: The decision to stage off another compressor is determined by the
* Operational Pumpdown is required if the Outdoor Air Temperature is less Average Running Compressor Load Command, Water Temperature Error,
than 50F, or the Entering Evaporator Water Temperature is greater than and Time since Last Stage. Compressors will stage off in the reverse order
(outdoor air temperature – 10F). With AFD, compressors will be at max they staged on. All fixed speed compressors will stage off before variable
speed for operational pumpdown. speed compressors stage off.
**** If Condenser Refrigerant Tank is installed.
Figure 62. Sequence of events: Unloading unstaging
86 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Normal Shutdown to Stopped or Run Inhibit

Figure 63 shows the transition from Running through a Normal (friendly) shutdown. The dashed lines on the top attempt to
show the final mode if you enter the stop via various inputs.
Local Stop
Chiller Level Diagnostic – Normal Shutdown Latched
Chiller Level Diagnostic – Normal Shutdown Nonlatched
Building Automation System Stop
External Auto-Stop
6/12/2012 - 8/15/2012 Criteria is Met- for
8/15/2012 All Circuits
10/17/2012 10/16/2012 - 12/11/2012
Shutting Down Shutting Down Stopped or Run Inhibit Stopped
Running Circuit Modes: Shutting Down Circuit Modes: Circuit Modes: or
One or
SubMode: Operational Pumpdown* Auto Stopped or Auto Run Inhibit
More
Circuits Operational Pumpdown Evaporator Pump Off Delay
(See max allowed time below) (Adjustable 1 to 30 Minutes) De-Energize Evaporator
Running Water Pump Relay
Close EXV
(0 to 25 Seconds)
6/13/2012 8/15/2012 10/17/2012 12/11/2012
Send Stop Command to

All *Operational Pumpdown is required if the Outdoor Air
Running Compressors Temperature is less than 50F, or the Entering Evaporator Water
Temperature is greater than (outdoor air temperature – 10°F). With
AFD, compressors will be at max speed for operational
Fully Close EXV Energize All Heaters pumpdown.
No Pumpdown Required **Operational Pumpdown: See Satisfied Setpoint Operational

IF* Fully Close Both EXVs Pumpdown sequence diagram for specific criteria
Pumpdown ***Automatic evaporator isolation valve control will close valve if

Perform Operational Turn Off All Running
Required Outdoor Ambient Air Temperature at circuit shutdown is less than
Pumpdown for All Circuits Condenser Fans evaporator leaving water cutout setpoint plus 3°C.
Running Circuits if
Required* The maximum allowed time for Operational Pumpdown is: Max
pumpdown time = setting x number of compressors configured on
6/12/2012 - 12/11/2012 the circuit.
6/15/2012 Check for 12/11/2012
Normal Pumpdown Note: If Free Cooling is active, the last stage of cooling to turn off
Termination Criteria Met ** will be Free Cooling.
Figure 63. Sequence of events: normal shutdown to stopped or run inhibit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 87
Control
Immediate Shutdown to Stopped or Run Inhibit

Figure 64 shows the transition from Running through an immediate shutdown. The dashed lines on the top attempt to show
the final mode if you enter the stop via various inputs.
Chiller Level Diagnostic – Immediate Shutdown Non-Latching

Chiller Level Diagnostic – Immediate Shutdown Latching
Front Panel Immediate Shutdown
One or More 6/12/2012 - 9/29/2012 9/29/2012 - 12/11/2012 Run Inhibit

Running Shutting Down Stopped or
Compressors Stopped
Compressor Deceleration Time
6/13/2012 9/29/2012 12/11/2012

asdf asdf asdf
Send Stop Command to De-Energize Evaporator
All Running Compressors Water Pump Relay
Energize All Heaters
Fully Close Both EXVs
Turn Off All

Running Circuits
Condenser Fans
Figure 64. Sequence of events: immediate shutdown to stopped or run inhibit
88 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Diagnostics Reset Level: Defines the lowest level of manual diagnostic

reset command which can clear the diagnostic. The man-
ual diagnostic reset levels in order of priority are: Local or
Diagnostic Name (Text) and Source Remote. For example, a diagnostic that has a reset level of
Diagnostic Name Source: Diagnostics may be shown in the Remote, can be reset by either a remote diagnostic reset
spec with a source of "xy"In this case, letter "x" can be either command or by a local diagnostic reset command.
"1" or "2" (signifying which circuit) and letter "y" can be "A" or Help Text: Provides for a brief description of what kind of
"B" (signifying which compressor on that circuit). problems might cause this diagnostic to occur. Both control
Affects Target: Defines the "target" or what is affected by system component related problems as well as chiller ap-
the diagnostic. Usually either the entire Chiller, or a particular plication related problems are addressed (as can possibly
Circuit or Compressor is affected by the diagnostic (the same be anticipated). These help messages will be updated with
one as the source), but in special cases functions are modi- accumulated field experience with the chillers.
fied or disabled by the diagnostic. None implies that there is
no direct affect to the chiller, sub components or functional
operation.
Design Note: TU does not support the display of certain
targets on its Diagnostics pages although the functionality
implied by this table is supported. Targets such as Evap
Pump, Ice Mode, Heat Mode, Chilled Water Reset, External
Setpoints etc. - are displayed as simply "Chiller" even though
they do not imply a chiller shutdown - only a compromise of
the specific feature.
Severity: Defines the severity of the above effect. Imme-
diate means immediate shutdown of the affected portion;
for AFD generated diagnostics, Immediate implies immedi-
ately de-energized compressor windings, while Immediate
(decel) implies controlled deceleration to compressor stop.
Normal means normal or friendly shutdown of the affected
portion, Special Action means a special action or mode of
operation (limp along) is invoked, but without shutdown, and
Info means an Informational Note or Warning is generated.
Design Note: TU does not support display of "Special Action"
on its Diagnostics pages, so that if a diagnostic has a special
action defined in the table below, it will be displayed only
as "Informational Warning" as long as no circuit or chiller
shutdown results. If there is a shutdown and special action
defined in the table, then the TU Diagnostics Page display
will indicate the shutdown type only.
Persistence: Defines whether or not the diagnostic and its
effects are to be manually reset (Latched), or can be either
manually or automatically reset when and if the condition
returns to normal (Nonlatched).
Active Modes [Inactive Modes]: States the modes or
periods of operation that the diagnostic is active in and, as
necessary, those modes or periods that it is specifically "not
active" in as an exception to the active modes. The inactive
modes are enclosed in brackets, [ ]. Note that the modes
used in this column are internal and not generally annunciat-
ed to any of the formal mode displays.
Criteria: Quantitatively defines the criteria used in gener-
ating the diagnostic and, if nonlatching, the criteria for auto
reset. If more explanation is necessary a hot link to the Func-
tional Specification is used.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 89
Control
AFD Diagnostics
Table 37. AFD diagnostics
Diagnostic Name Affects Severity Persistence Active Modes Criteria Reset Level
and Source Target [Inactive Modes]
AFD Fault - xA Cprsr Immediate NonLatch All AFD Fault. Numerous drive faults can cause this Local
general fault including High Pressure Cutout for
AFD compressors. See Service Literature xxxx
for a list of fault codes and description.
AFD Motor Current Circuit Immediate Latch All Compressor current exceeded overload time vs. Local
Overload - xA trip characteristic. Must trip = 132% RLA, Must
hold=125%
AFD Interrupt Failure - Chiller Immediate Latch AFD Intended to be Respective AFD is reporting that it is still running Local
xA Shutdown and OFF the compressor when the MP has commanded
Special Action the drive/compressor to be Off. Detection time
shall be 10 seconds minimum and 15 seconds
maximum.
Starter Diagnostics
Table 38. Starter diagnostics
Starter Did Not Cprsr Immediate Latch On the first check The Starter Module did not receive a transition Local
Transition - xy after transition. complete signal in the designated time from
its command to transition. The Must Hold time
from the Starter Module transition command is
1 second. The Must Trip time from the transition
command is 6 seconds. Actual design is 2.5
seconds. This diagnostic is active only for Y-Delta,
Auto-Transformer, Primary Reactor, and X-Line
Starters.
Phase Reversal - xy Cprsr Immediate Latch Compressor A phase reversal was detected on the incoming Local
energized to current. On a compressor startup, the phase
transition command reversal logic must detect and trip in a maximum
[All Other Times] of .3 second from compressor start.
Starter Dry Run Test - Cprsr Immediate Latch Starter Dry Run While in the Starter Dry Run Mode either 50 Local
xy Mode % Line Voltage was sensed at the Potential
Transformers or 10% RLA Current was sensed at
the Current Transformers.
Phase Loss - xy Cprsr Immediate Latch Start Sequence and a) No current was sensed on one or two of Local
Run modes the current transformer inputs while running or
starting (See Non-latching Power Loss Diagnostic
for all three phases lost while running). Must hold
= 20% RLA. Must trip = 5% RLA. Time to trip
shall be longer than guaranteed reset on Starter
Module at a minimum, 3 seconds maximum.
Actual design trip point is 10%. The actual design
trip time is 2.64 seconds. b) If Phase reversal
protection is enabled and current is not sensed
on one or more current transformer inputs. Logic
will detect and trip in a maximum of 0.3 seconds
from compressor start.
90 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Power Loss - xy Cprsr Immediate NonLatch All compressor The compressor had previously established Remote
running modes currents while running and then all three phases
of current were lost. Design: Less than 10% RLA,
[all compressor trip in 2.64 seconds. This diagnostic will preclude
starting and non- the Phase Loss Diagnostic and the Transition
running modes] Complete Input Opened Diagnostic from being
called out. To prevent this diagnostic from
occurring with the intended disconnect of main
power, the minimum time to trip must be greater
than the guaranteed reset time of the Starter
module. Note: This diagnostic prevents nuisance
latching diagnostics due to a momentary power
loss – It does not protect motor/compressor
from uncontrolled power reapplication. See
Momentary Power Loss Diagnostic for this
protection. This diagnostic is not active during the
start mode before the transition complete input is
proven. Thus a random power loss during a start
would result in either a “Starter Fault Type 3” or a
“Starter Did Not Transition” latching diagnostic.
Severe Current Circuit Immediate Latch All Running Modes A 30% Current Imbalance has been detected on Local
Imbalance - xy one phase relative to the average of all 3 phases
for 90 continuous seconds.
Starter Failed to Arm/ Cprsr Immediate Latch All Starter failed to arm or start within the allotted Local
Start - xy time (15 seconds).
Starter Fault Type I - Cprsr Immediate Latch Starting - Y Delta This is a specific starter test where 1M(1K1) is Local
xy Starters Only closed first and a check is made to ensure that
there are no currents detected by the CT's. If
currents are detected when only 1M is closed
first at start, then one of the other contactors is
shorted.
Starter Fault Type II - Cprsr Immediate Latch Starting All types of a. This is a specific starter test where the Local
xy starters Shorting Contactor (1K3) is individually energized
and a check is made to ensure that there are
no currents detected by the CT's. If current is
detected when only S is energized at Start, then
1M is shorted. b. This test in a. above applies
to all forms of starters (Note: It is understood
that many starters do not connect to the Shorting
Contactor.).
Starter Fault Type III - Cprsr Immediate Latch Starting As part of the normal start sequence to apply Local
xy power to the compressor, the Shorting Contactor
[Adaptive Frequency (1K3) and then the Main Contactor (1K1) were
Starter Type] energized. 1.6 seconds later there were no
currents detected by the CT's for the last 1.2
Seconds on all three phases. The test above
applies to all forms of starters except Adaptive
Frequency Drives.
Transition Complete Cprsr Immediate Latch Pre-Start The Transition Complete input was found to be Local
Input Shorted - xy shorted before the compressor was started. This
is active for all electromechanical starters.
Transition Complete Cprsr Immediate Latch All running modes The Transition Complete input was found to be Local
Input Opened - xy opened with the compressor motor running after
a successful completion of transition. This is
active only for Y-Delta, Auto-Transformer, Primary
Reactor, and X-Line Starters. To prevent this
diagnostic from occurring as the result of a power
loss to the contactors, the minimum time to trip
must be greater than the trip time for the power
loss diagnostic.
Motor Current Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized Compressor current exceeded overload time vs. Local
Overload - xy trip characteristic. Must trip = 140% RLA, Must
hold=125%, nominal trip 132.5% in 30 seconds
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 91
Control
Starter Contactor Chiller Immediate and Latch Starter Contactor Detected compressor currents greater than 10% Local
Interrupt Failure - xy Special Action not Energized RLA on any or all phases when the compressor
[Starter Contactor was commanded off. Detection time shall be
Energized] 5 second minimum and 10 seconds maximum.
On detection and until the controller is manually
reset: generate diagnostic, energize the
appropriate alarm relay, continue to energize the
Evap Pump Output, and continue to command
the affected compressor off, fully unload the
effected compressor and command a normal stop
to all other compressors. For as long as current
continues, perform liquid level, oil return, and fan
control on the circuit effected. During contactor
interrupt failure, circuit will not be confirmed off,
so THR unit sequence should continue running.
If THR turns off due to a diagnostic or lockout
during contactor interrupt failure, the circuit
reverts to air-cooled condenser fan control within
1 second.
Over Voltage Chiller Normal NonLatch Pre-Start and Any Nom. trip: 60 seconds at greater than 112.5%, Remote
Ckt(s) Energzd ± 2.5%, Auto Reset at 110% or less for 10
continuous seconds.
Under Voltage Chiller Normal NonLatch Pre-Start and Any Nom. trip: 60 seconds at less than 87.5%, ± 2.8% Remote
Ckt(s) Energzd at 200V ± 1.8% at 575V, Auto Reset at 90% or
greater for 10 continuous seconds.
Starter Comm Loss: Cprsr Immediate Latch All The Starter module detected a continual loss Local
Main Processor - xy of communication with the main processor for
greater than the Communications Loss Time
bound setpoint.
Starter Module Cprsr Warning Latch All Checksum on RAM copy of the Starter LLID Local
Memory Error Type 1 - configuration failed. Configuration recalled from
xy EEPROM.
Starter Module Cprsr Immediate Latch All Checksum on EEPROM copy of the Starter LLID Local
Memory Error Type 2 - configuration failed. Default configuration loaded
xy into RAM and EEPROM.
Main Processor Diagnostics

Table 39. Main processor diagnostics
Target [Inactive Modes]
MP: Reset Has Platform Warning NonLatch All The main processor has successfully come out of Remote
Occurred a reset and built its application. A reset may have
been due to a power up, installing new software
or configuration. This diagnostic is immediately
and automatically cleared and thus can only be
seen in the Historic Diagnostic List in Tracer TU.
Unexpected Starter Cprsr Normal NonLatch All Cprsr Running The Starter module status reported back that it is Local
Shutdown - xy modes, Starting, stopped when the MP thinks it should be running
Running and and no Starter diagnostic exist. This diagnostic
Preparing to will be logged in the active buffer and then
Shutdown automatically cleared. This diagnostic could be
caused by intermittent communication problems
from the Starter to the MP, or due to mis-binding
High Motor Winding Cprsr Immediate Latch All The respective compressor’s motor winding Local
Temperature – xA thermostat is detected to be open. The
compressor shall stop within 5 seconds of this
diagnostic.
AFD %RLA Feedback Cprsr Normal Latch All Out-Of-Range Low or Hi or bad LLID Remote
- xA
92 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Low Refrigerant Circuit Immediate Latch All Ckt Running The warmer of either Evaporator Refrigerant Remote
Temperature Modes Pool Temperature or Active Rfgt Sat Temp for
the respective circuit dropped below the Low
Refrigerant Temperature Cutout Setpoint for
2250oF-sec (12oF-sec max rate for early circuit
startup period) while the circuit was running.
The minimum LRTC setpoint is -5oF the point
at which oil separates from the refrigerant. The
integral is held nonvolatile though power down, is
continuously calculated, and can decay or build
during the circuit off cycle as conditions warrant.
Low Oil Flow - xy Cprsr Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized and The intermediate oil pressure sensor for Local
Delta P above 15 this compressor was out of the acceptable
Psid pressure range for 15 seconds, while the Delta
Pressure was greater than 15 Psid (172.4 kPa).:
Acceptable range is 0.50 > (PC-PI) / (PC-PE)
for the first 2.5 minutes of operation, and 0.28 >
(PC-PI) / (PC-PE) thereafter.
Loss of Oil for Circuit Immediate Latch Starter Contactor In running modes, Oil Loss Level Sensor detects Local
Compressor (Running) Energized lack of oil in the oil sump feeding the compressor
(distinguishing a liquid flow from a vapor flow).
Loss of Oil for Circuit Immediate and Latch Compressor Pre-start Oil Loss Level Sensor detects a lack of oil in the Local
Compressor (Stopped) Special Action [all other modes] oil sump feeding the compressor for 90 seconds
after EXV preposition is completed (and before
EXV equalization, if applicable) on an attempted
circuit start. Note: Compressor start is delayed
pending oil detection during that time, but not
allowed once the diagnostic occurs.
No Differential Cprsr Immediate NonLatch Compressor running The system differential pressure was below 7.7 Remote
Refrigerant Pressure - on Circuit Psid (53 kPa) for 6 seconds after the 11 seconds
xy ignore time relative to cprsr/circuit startup had
expired. In a two compressor circuit, the lower of
the two suction pressure is used for circuit DP.
Note: This diagnostic will be cleared automatically
within 10s.
No Differential Cprsr Immediate Latch Compressor running Diagnostic No Differential Refrigerant Pressure is Remote
Refrigerant Pressure on Circuit triggered 3 times with one hour.
Lockout - xy
Low Differential Cprsr Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized For startup, please refer to oil flow protection Remote
Refrigerant Pressure - spec. For running, the system differential
xy pressure for the respective circuit was below the
greater of 25 psid (240.5 kPa) or the pressure
ratio listed in the table in GP2 Compressor Type
FSpec while the compressor is running for a
period of time dependent on the deficit (15 sec
ignore time from circuit start) – refer to the Oil
Flow Protection specification for the time to trip
function.
High Differential Cprsr Normal Latch Cprsr Energized GP2 Cprsr: The differential pressure for the Remote
Refrigerant Pressure - respective circuit was above 275 Psid (1890 kPa)
xy for 2 consecutive samples 5 seconds apart.
High Refrigerant Cprsr Immediate Latch Cprsr Energized The pressure ratio for the respective circuit Remote
Pressure Ratio - xy exceeded 12.3 for 1 contiguous minute while any
compressor is running or in service pumpdown.
This pressure ratio is a fundamental limitation
of the HiVi compressor. The pressure ratio is
defined as Pcond (abs)/Pevap(abs).
High Oil Temperature - Cprsr Immediate Latch All [compressor run The oil temperature entering the compressor Remote
xy unload or compressor exceeded 199.4°F.
not running]
Oil Temperature Cprsr Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Sensor - xy
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 93
Control
High Compressor Cprsr Immediate Latch All [compressor run The compressor discharge temperature Remote
Refrigerant Discharge unload or compressor exceeded 199.4oF (without oil cooler) or
Temp - xy not running] 230ºF (with oil cooler). This diagnostic will be
suppressed during Stopping mode or after the
compressor has stopped. Note: As part of
the Compressor High Temperature Limit Mode
(aka Minimum Capacity Limit), the compressor
shall be forced loaded as the filtered discharge
temperature reaches 190ºF (without oil coolers),
or 220ºF (with oil coolers).
Low Discharge Cprsr Normal Latch Any Running Mode While Running Normally, the Discharge Remote
Superheat - xy Superheat was less than the Low Discharge
Superheat Setpoint for more than 7800 degree
F seconds. At circuit startup, the Discharge
Superheat will be ignored for 5 minutes.
Compressor Cprsr Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Discharge Refrigerant
Temperature Sensor -
xy
Very Low Discharge Ckt Normal Latch Any Running Mode See Compressor Minimum Superheat Protection
Superheat - xy section in the Oil Flow Protection spec for specific
criteria. Generally, this diagnostic indicates a
likelihood of an evaporator carryover (flooded
evap)condition.
Cprsr Warning NonLatch Remote When restart inhibit warning is enabled, the Remote
warning exists when unit has been inhibited
from starting and is cleared when a start of a
compressor is possible (Start-to-Start Timer
expires)
Ckt Normal Latch Any Running Mode See Compressor Minimum Superheat Protection
section in the Oil Flow Protection spec for specific
criteria. Generally, this diagnostic indicates a
likelihood of an evaporator carryover (flooded
evap)condition.
Remote Chiller Warning and NonLatch All The BAS was setup as "installed" at the MP Remote
Special Action and the Lontalk LCIC lost communications with
the BAS for 15 contiguous minutes after it had
been established. Refer to Section on Setpoint
Arbitration to determine how setpoints and
operating modes may be affected by the comm
loss. The chiller follows the value of the Tracer
Default Run Command which can be previously
written by Tracer and stored nonvolatile by
the MP (either use local or shutdown). Note
that this diagnostic is never operational for
BacNet Communication interface (BCIC) and
only operational with a LonTalk Communication
interface (LCIC) if so configured by the BAS or
Tracer system.
External Chilled Water Chiller Warning Latch All a. Function Not "Enabled": no diagnostics. b. Remote
Setpoint "Enabled ": Out-Of-Range Low or Hi or bad
LLID, set diagnostic, default CWS to next level of
priority (e.g. Front Panel SetPoint).
External Demand Limit Chiller Warning Latch All a. Not "Enabled": no diagnostics. b. "Enabled Remote
Setpoint ": Out-Of-Range Low or Hi or bad LLID, set
diagnostic, default CLS to next level of priority
(e.g. Front Panel SetPoint.)
Inverted Evaporator Chiller Warning NonLatch Any Ckt Energized [ The entering evaporator water temp fell below the Remote
Water Temperature No Ckts Energized] leaving evaporator water temp by more than 2°F
for 180 °F-sec, minimum trip time 30 seconds.
Diagnostic will auto clear if the leaving water
temp – entering water temp < 2oF. It can warn of
improper flow direction through the evaporator,
misbound water temperature sensors, improper
sensor installation, partially failed sensors, or
other system problems. Note that either entering
or leaving water temp sensor or the water system
could be at fault.
94 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Evaporator Entering Chiller Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID. Note: Entering Water Temp Remote
Water Temperature Sensor is used in EXV pressure control as well
Sensor as ice making so it must cause a unit shutdown
even if ice or CHW reset is not installed.
Evaporator Leaving Chiller Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Water Temperature
Sensor
Condenser Refrigerant Circuit Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Pressure Sensor
Suction Refrigerant Cprsr Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Pressure Sensor - xy
Evaporator Refrigerant Circuit Warning and Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID. Note: The Evap Pool Temp Remote
Pool Temperature Special Action Sensors are used for evaporator freeze protection
Sensor (running and non-running). Invalidate evaporator
pool temperature sensor measurement if this
diagnostic is active. If evaporator isolation
valves are installed, revert to Evaporator Shell
Refrigerant Saturated Temperature for freeze
protection functions. If evaporator isolation
valves are not installed, revert to Evaporator
Saturated Temperature for freeze protection
functions.
Evaporator Refrigerant Circuit Warning and Latch Ckt Energized [Ckt The evaporator refrigerant pool temperature Local
Pool Temperature Special Action Not Energized] measurement is larger than the evaporator
Sensor Error entering water temperature by more than 4°C
(7.2°F) for 5 continuous minutes. There is an
ignore time of 2 minutes following circuit startup.
The trip criteria is not evaluated (and time above
the threshold is not counted) until the ignore time
passes. Invalidate evaporator pool temperature
sensor measurement if this diagnostic is active.
If evaporator isolation valves are installed,
revert to Evaporator Shell Refrigerant Saturated
Temperature for freeze protection functions. If
evaporator isolation valves are not installed,
revert to Evaporator Saturated Temperature for
freeze protection functions.
Liquid Line Circuit Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID. Note: This is the subcooled Remote
Temperature Sensor liquid line temp sensor.
Liquid Line Pressure Circuit Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID. Note: This is the subcooled Remote
Sensor liquid line pressure sensor.
Evaporator Approach Circuit Immediate Latch Respective circuit The Evaporator approach temperature for the Remote
Error running respective circuit (ELWT – Evap Sat Temp Ckt
x) is negative by more than 10°F for 1 minute
continuously while the circuit / compressor is
operating. Either the Evap Leaving Water Temp
sensor or Evap Suction Rfgt Pressure Sensor
Ckt x is in error.
Oil Pressure Sensor - Cprsr Immediate Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
xy
Oil Flow Protection Cprsr Immediate Latch Starter Contactor The Intermediate Oil Pressure Sensor for this Local
Fault - xy Energized [all Stop cprsr is reading a pressure either above its
modes] respective circuit’s Condenser Pressure by 15
Psid or more, or below its respective compressor
Suction Pressure 10 Psid or more for 30 seconds
continuously.
Low Suction Circuit Immediate Latch Cprsr Prestart and a. The Suction Pressure dropped below 10 Local
Refrigerant Pressure Cprsr Energized Psia just prior to compressor start (after EXV
preposition). b. During Early Startup Period:
the Suction Pressure fell below a pressure equal
to Condenser Pressure ÷ 8 but as limited to not
less than 6 or greater than10 psia. c. After Early
Startup Period expires: The Suction Pressure fell
below 16 Psia.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 95
Control
Very Low Evaporator Chiller Immediate Latch All The respective circuit’s evaporator pressure Local
Rfgt Pressure - xy dropped below 80% of the current Low Evap
Refrigerant Press Cutout setting (see above) or 8
psia, whichever is less, regardless of the running
state of the circuit’s compressor. Note: Unlike
previous products, even if the circuit associated
with the suction pressure sensor is locked out,
it will not defeat the protection afforded by this
diagnostic.
Low Evaporator Water Chiller Immediate and NonLatch Any Ckt[s] Energzd The evaporator entering or leaving water Remote
Temp (Unit On) Special Action [No Ckt(s) Energzd] temperature fell below the cutout setpoint for 30
degree F Seconds while the compressor was
running. Automatic reset occurs when both of the
temperature rises 2 oF (1.1oC) above the cutout
setting for 2 minutes. This diagnostic shall not de-
energize the Evaporator Water Pump Output.
Low Evaporator Water Chiller Special Action NonLatch Unit in Stop Mode, or Either the entering or leaving evaporator water Remote
Temp (Unit Off) in Auto Mode and No temp. fell below the leaving water temp cutout
Ckt(s) Energzd [Any setting for 30 degree F seconds while the Chiller
Ckt Energzd] is in the Stop mode, or in Auto mode with no
compressors running. Energize Freeze Avoidance
Request Relay and Evap Water Pump Relay
until diagnostic auto resets, then de-energize
the Freeze Avoidance Request Relay and return
to normal evap pump control. Automatic reset
occurs when both temps rise 2oF (1.1oC) above
the cutout setting for 5 minutes, or either circuit
starts. This diagnostic even while active, does not
prevent operation of either circuit.
Low Evaporator Rfgt Chiller Special Action NonLatch Unit in Stop Mode, or The respective circuit’s LERTC Integral was seen Remote
Temp Circuit 1: Unit in Auto Mode and No to be > 0 while the chiller is in the Stop mode,
Off Ckt's Energzd [Any or in Auto mode with no compressors running
Ckt Energzd] for at least one minute. The LERTC integral is
increased if the Evap Refrigerant Pool Temp
is below the value of the Low Evap Rfgt Temp
Cutout + 2°F. Energize Evap Water Pump and
Off-Cycle Freeze Avoidance Request Relay until
diagnostic auto resets, then return to normal
evap pump control and de-energize the Freeze
Avoidance Request. Automatic reset occurs
when the respective Evap Rfgt Pool Temp rises
4oF (1.1oC) above the LERTC cutout setting for
1 minute and the Chiller Off LERTC Integral =
0.. This diagnostic even while active, does not
Low Evaporator Rfgt Chiller Special Action NonLatch Unit in Stop Mode, or The respective circuit’s LERTC Integral was seen Remote
Temp Circuit 2: Unit in Auto Mode and No to be > 0 while the chiller is in the Stop mode,
Off Ckt's Energzd [Any or in Auto mode with no compressors running
Ckt Energzd] for at least one minute. The LERTC integral is
increased if the Evap Refrigerant Pool Temp
is below the value of the Low Evap Rfgt Temp
Cutout + 2°F. Energize Evap Water Pump and
Off-Cycle Freeze Avoidance Request Relay until
diagnostic auto resets, then return to normal
evap pump control and de-energize the Freeze
Avoidance Request. Automatic reset occurs
when the respective Evap Rfgt Pool Temp rises
4oF (1.1oC) above the LERTC cutout setting for
1 minute and the Chiller Off LERTC Integral =
0.. This diagnostic even while active, does not
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Normal NonLatch Estab. Evap. Water Evaporator water flow was not proven within Local
Overdue Flow on going from 20 minutes of the Evaporator water pump relay
STOP to AUTO or being energized in normal “Stop” to “Auto”
Evap Pump Override. transition. If the pump is overridden to “On”
for certain diagnostics, the delay on diagnostic
callout shall be only 255 seconds. The pump
command status will not be effected by this
diagnostic in either case.
96 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Warning and NonLatch All After the pump request was activated, the Local
Overdue – Pump 1 Special Action evaporator water flow overdue wait time elapsed
before water flow was established. Special
action is to keep the evap pump request active
in a diagnostic override mode. See Evaporator_
Water_Pump_Control.doc
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Warning and NonLatch All After the pump request was activated, the Local
Overdue – Pump 2 Special Action evaporator water flow overdue wait time elapsed
before water flow was established. Special
action is to keep the evap pump request active
in a diagnostic override mode. See Evaporator_
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Immediate NonLatch [All Stop modes] A. The Evaporator water flow switch input was Local
Lost open for more than 6 contiguous seconds (or 20
seconds for thermal dispersion type flow switch).
B. This diagnostic does not de-energize the
evap pump output. C. 6 seconds of contiguous
flow shall clear this diagnostic. (further review
needed when implementing thermal dispersion
for Pueblo)
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Warning and NonLatch All For dual evaporator pump configurations Local
Lost – Pump 1 Special Action only. Evaporator Water Flow Lost diagnostic
occurred while Pump 1 was the selected pump.
Specific details of special action are described in
Evaporator_Water_Pump_Control.doc
Evaporator Water Flow Chiller Warning and NonLatch All For dual evaporator pump configurations Local
Lost – Pump 2 Special Action only. Evaporator Water Flow Lost diagnostic
occurred while Pump 2 was the selected pump.
Specific details of special action are described in
Evaporator_Water_Pump_Control.doc
Evaporator Pump 1 Chiller Immediate or NonLatch All For systems with no evaporator pump, a single Local
Fault Warning and evaporator pump, or a single inverter driving
Special Action dual evaporator pumps, an immediate shutdown
shall be performed. For multiple pump systems,
detection of a pump fault will generally cause
pump control to switch to the redundant pump.
For single inverter, dual pump configuration,
switching to the redundant pump can only
happen after the fault is cleared. Specific details
of special action are described in Evaporator_
Evaporator Pump 2 Chiller Immediate or NonLatch All For systems with no evaporator pump, a single Local
Fault Warning and evaporator pump, or a single inverter driving
Special Action dual evaporator pumps, an immediate shutdown
shall be performed. For multiple pump systems,
detection of a pump fault will generally cause
pump control to switch to the redundant pump.
For single inverter, dual pump configuration,
switching to the redundant pump can only
happen after the fault is cleared. Specific details
of special action are described in Evaporator_
Evap Pump 1 Starts Chiller Warning NonLatch All Diagnostic is triggered when the Evap Local
Run Time Written Pump 1 Starts Run Time is manually over
written. Diagnostic automatically clears and is
immediately placed into the Historic Diagnostic
Log.
Evap Pump 2 Starts Chiller Warning NonLatch All Diagnostic is triggered when the Evap Local
Run Time Written Pump 2 Starts Run Time is manually over
written. Diagnostic automatically clears and is
immediately placed into the Historic Diagnostic
Log.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 97
Control
High Evaporator Chiller Immediate NonLatch All The evaporator refrigerant pressure of either Remote
Refrigerant Pressure circuit has risen above 190 psig. The evaporator
water pump relay will be de-energized to
stop the pump regardless of why the pump is
running. The diagnostic will auto reset and the
pump will return to normal control when all of
the evaporator pressures fall below 185 psig.
The primary purpose is to stop the evaporator
water pump and its associated pump heat from
causing refrigerant side pressures, close to the
evaporator relief valve setting, when the chiller is
not running, such as could occur with Evap Water
Flow Overdue or Evaporator Water Flow Loss
Diagnostics.
High Evaporator Water Chiller Warning and NonLatch Only effective if either Either the leaving or the entering water Remote
Temperature Special Action temperature exceeded the high evap water temp
1) Evap Wtr Flow limit (TU service menu settable –default 105oF
Overdue, (65.55oC), range 80oF (26.67oC)-150F(65.55oC)
2) Evap Wtr Flow for 15 continuous seconds. The evaporator water
Loss, or 3) Low Evap pump relay will be de-energized to stop the pump
Rfgt Temp,-Unit Off, but only if it is running due one of the diagnostics
diagnostic is active. listed on the left. The diagnostic will auto reset
and the pump will return to normal control when
both the entering and leaving temperatures fall
5oF below the trip setting. The primary purpose
is to stop the evaporator water pump and its
associated pump heat from causing excessive
waterside temperatures and waterside pressures
when the chiller is not running but the evap pump
is on due to either Evap Water Flow Overdue,
Evaporator Water Flow Loss , or Low Evap
Temp – Unit Off Diagnostics. This diagnostic will
not auto clear solely due to the clearing of the
enabling diagnostic.
High Pressure Cutout Cprsr Immediate Latch All A high pressure cutout was detected; trip at 315 Local
- xy ± 5 PSIG. For AFD compressor configurations,
the HPC is connected directly to the AFD and the
Symbio800 will get an AFD Fault – xA diagnostic
when the HPC is tripped.
Excessive Condenser Circuit Immediate Latch All The condenser pressure sensor of this circuit Remote
Pressure has detected a condensing pressure in excess
of the design high side pressure as limited by the
particular compressor type.
Emergency Stop Chiller Immediate Latch All a. Emergency stop feedback input is open. An Local
Feedback Input external interlock has tripped. Time to trip from
input opening to unit stop shall be 0.1 to 1.0
seconds.
Outdoor Air Chiller Normal Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID. Remote
Temperature Sensor
Pumpdown Terminated Circuit Warning Latch Service Pumpdown Service Pumpdown cycle for this circuit was Local
By Time terminated abnormally due to excessive time.
Reference Service Pumpdown spec for maximum
time allowed.
Chiller Service Chiller Warning Latch Service Messages Chiller service interval time has elapsed. Chiller Remote
Recommended service is recommended.
Enabled
Evap Water Pump 1 Chiller Warning Latch Service Messages Pump service recommended as service interval Remote
Svc Recommended hours have elapsed.
Enabled
Evap Water Pump 2 Chiller Warning Latch Service Messages Pump service recommended as service interval Remote
Svc Recommended hours have elapsed.
Enabled
Mfr Maintenance Cprsr Warning Latch Service Messages Compressor service recommended as service Remote
Recommended - xy interval hours have elapsed.
Enabled
Water System Chiller Warning Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Evaporator Differential Chiller Warning Latch All While the water pumps are running, the difference Remote
Water Pressure between the Evaporator Entering Water Pressure
and Evaporator Leaving Water Pressure reading
is a negative number. A negative number will
trigger this diagnostic.
98 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Evaporator Entering Chiller Warning Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Water Pressure
Evaporator Leaving Chiller Warning Latch All Bad Sensor or LLID Remote
Water Pressure
MP: Invalid N/A N/A Latch All MP has an invalid configuration based on the Remote
Configuration current software installed.
LCI-C Software Chiller Warning NonLatch All The neuron software in the LCI-C module does Remote
Mismatch: Use BAS not match the chiller type. Download the proper
Tool software into the LCI-C neuron. To do this, use
the Rover service tool, or a LonTalk® tool capable
of downloading software to a Neuron 3150®.
Starts/Hours Modified Cprsr Warning NonLatch All The current value for the cumulative starts and Remote
- xy or hours for the given compressor have been
modified by a write override from TU.
Software Error 1001: Chiller Immediate Latch All A high level software watchdog has detected Local
Call Trane Service a condition in which there was a continuous 1
minute period of compressor operation, with
neither Evaporator water flow nor a” contactor
interrupt failure” diagnostic active. The presence
of this software error message suggests an
internal software problem has been detected.
The events that led up to this failure, if known,
should be recorded and transmitted to Trane
Controls Engineering.
Software Error 1002: Chiller Immediate Latch All Reported if state chart misalignment in stopped Local
Call Trane Service or inactive state occurred while a compressor
was seen to be operating and this condition
lasted for at least 1 minute (cprsr operation due
to Service Pumpdown or with Contactor Interrupt
Failure diagnostic is excluded). The presence of
this software error message suggests an internal
software problem has been detected. The
events that led up to this failure, if known, should
be recorded and transmitted to Trane Controls
Engineering.
Software Error 1003: Chiller Immediate Latch All Reported if state chart misalignment occurred Local
Call Trane Service inferred from the Capacity Control, Circuit,
or Compressor State Machines remaining in
the Stopping state for more than 3 minutes.
The presence of this software error message
suggests an internal software problem has been
detected. The events that led up to this failure,
if known, should be recorded and transmitted to
Trane Controls Engineering.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 99
Control
Communication Diagnostics
Notes:
● The following communication loss diagnostics will not occur unless that input or output is required to be present by the par-
ticular configuration and installed options for the chiller.
● Communication diagnostics (with the exception of “Excessive Loss of Comm” are named by the Functional name of the
input or output that is no longer being heard from by the Main Processor. Many LLIDs, such as the Quad Relay LLID, have
more than one functional output associated with it. A comm loss with such a multiple function board, will generate multiple
diagnostics. Refer to the Chiller’s wiring diagrams to relate the occurrence of multiple communication diagnostics back to
the physical LLID boards that they have been assigned to (bound).
● Communication loss diagnostics shall be timed based on action (target status) and not annunciation on the operator dis-
play.
Table 40. Communications diagnostics
Comm Loss: External Chiller Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Auto/Stop MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Chiller Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Emergency Stop MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Feedback Input second period.
Comm Loss: External Circuit Special Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Ckt Lockout Action MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a
30 second period. MP will nonvolatile hold the
lockout state (enabled or disabled) that was in
effect at the time of comm loss.
Comm Loss: Outdoor Chiller Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Air Temperature MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Evaporator Leaving MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Water Temperature second period.
Evaporator Entering MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a
Water Temperature 30 second period. Note: Entering Water Temp
Sensor is used in EXV pressure control as well
as ice making & CHW reset, so it must cause a
unit shutdown even if Ice or CHW reset is not
installed.
Comm Loss: External Chiller Special Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Chilled Water Setpoint Action MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a
30 second period. Chiller shall discontinue use
of the External Chilled Water Setpoint source
and revert to the next higher priority for setpoint
arbitration
Comm Loss: External Chiller Special Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Demand Limit Setpoint Action MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period. Chiller shall discontinue use of
the External Demand limit setpoint and revert to
the next higher priority for Demand Limit setpoint
arbitration.
Comm Loss: Motor Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Winding Thermostat MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Compressor xA second period.
Comm Loss: Chiller Immediate Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Evaporator Water Flow MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Switch second period.
Comm Loss: Suction Cprsr Immediate Latch All [Ckt/Cprsr lock Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Refrigerant Pressure - out] MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
xy second period.
Comm Loss: Circuit Immediate Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Condenser Refrigerant MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Pressure second period.
100 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Comm Loss: Oil Cprsr Immediate Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Pressure - xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Temperature - xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Supply Temperature MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Sensor second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Loss Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Level Sensor Input MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Return Line Solenoid MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Valve -xy second period.
Comm Loss: Oil Circuit Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Return Purge Valve –x MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Circuit Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Thermosiphon Heating MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Valve –x second period.
Comm Loss: Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Compressor Discharge MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Rfgt Temperature - xy second period.
Comm Loss: Slide Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Valve Load - xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Slide Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Valve Unload - xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Step Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Load - xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Variable Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Vi Valve – CprsrXY MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Economizer Valve – xy MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Economizer Discharge MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Pressure – xy second period.
Economizer Discharge MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Temp – xy second period.
Evaporator Water MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Pump 1 Relay second period.
Pump 2 Relay second period.
Comm Loss: Starter xy Cprsr Immediate Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Local
MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Speed Cprsr Normal NonLatch All Continual loss of communication between the MP Remote
Command - xA and the Functional ID has occurred for a 15-30
second period.
Comm Loss: %RLA Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the MP Remote
Indication Output(Vdc) and the Functional ID has occurred for a 15-30
second period.
Comm Loss: Local Chiller Warning NonLatch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
BAS Interface MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Use last valid BAS setpoints.
Diagnostic is cleared when successful
communication is established with the LonTalk
LLID (LCIC) or BacNet LLID (BCIC).
Comm Loss: Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Programmable Relay MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Board 1 second period.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 101
Control
Programmable Relay MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Board 2 second period.
Comm Loss: High Cprsr Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Pressure Cutout MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Switch - xy second period.
Comm Loss: Auxiliary Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the MP Remote
Setpoint Command and the Functional ID has occurred for a 15-30
second period.
Comm Loss: Energy Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Meter Pulse Input MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Ext Noise Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Reduction Request MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the MP Remote
Inverter Speed and the Functional ID has occurred for a 15-30
Command second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Circuit Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Inverter Speed MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a
Command, Shared 15-30 second period. This is a warning, as it is
Circuit 1 & 2 conceivable that the circuit may run without the
center shared fan deck working if there are many
other coils/fans on the circuits.
Comm Loss: Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Condenser Fan MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Enable second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Board 1 Relay X MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Fan Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Board 2 Relay X MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Condenser Fan MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a
Enable, Shared Circuit 30 second period. This is a warning, as it is
1&2 conceivable that the circuit may run without the
center shared fan deck working if there are many
other coils/fans on the circuits.
Condenser Refrigerant MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Tank Valve second period.
Comm Loss: Circuit Special Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Evaporator Refrigerant Action MP and the Functional ID has occurred for
Pool Temperature and Warning a 30 second period. Invalidate evaporator
pool temperature sensor measurement if this
diagnostic is active. If evaporator isolation
valves are installed, revert to Evaporator Shell
Refrigerant Saturated Temperature for freeze
protection functions. If evaporator isolation
valves are not installed, revert to Evaporator
Saturated Temperature for freeze protection
functions.
Comm Loss: Liquid Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Line Temperature MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period Note: The Subcooled Liquid Line
Temperature Sensors are used for determination
of charge and accurate tonnage predictions
Comm Loss: Liquid Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Line Pressure MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
second period.
Comm Loss: Electronic Circuit Normal Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
Expansion Valve MP and the EXV Step Status has occurred for
a 30 second period, OR EXV Steps Maximum
Position has not been received. If EXV Steps
Maximum Position has not been received, MP
will periodically request EXV Steps Maximum
Position, since it is only transmitted upon request.
102 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Control
Evaporator Pump 1 MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Fault Input second period.
Evaporator Pump 2 MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Fault Input second period.
Pump Inverter 1 Fault second period.
Input
Comm Loss: Water Chiller Warning Latch All Continual loss of communication between the Remote
System Differential MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Pressure second period.
Evaporator Differential MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Water Pressure second period.
Evaporator Pump MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Inverter 1 Run second period.
Command
Pump Inverter Speed second period.
Pump Inverter second period.
Frequency Input
Evaporator Entering MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Evaporator Leaving MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 103
Operating Principles
This charpter describes the overall operating principles of the other Trane air cooled screw chillers. Which includes single
RTAG design. The detail information of a specific unit see circuit , two circuits system and two circuits duplex system.
the attached documents of unit. RTAG100 is single circuit, with one rotary screw compressor;
while others are two circuits, with a rotart screw compressor
per circuit, and one chilled water loop . The sytem schematic
Refrigerant Circuit of two circuits is shown in Figure 65.
The refrigerant cycle of the RTAG chiller is similar to that of
High press. pipe

Low press. pipe
Oil pipe
Evap. Oil return
Cond. Cond.
Sensor P&T
Sensor HP Sensor HP
Relief V. Filter & Drier Relief V.
Sensor T Sensor T
OS OS
HPC HPC
Comp. Comp.
Oil P Oil P
Oil T TXV TXV Oil T
Economizer
Evap.
Oil cooler Oil cooler
Solenoid Solenoid
EXV EXV Valve
Valve
Figure 65. System schematic
Refrigerant Cycle system is balanced by an electronic expansion valve (states

3b to 4).
The refrigerant cycle of unit without economizer (NTON: 085
~ 225, 255, 285, 375, 400, 410) is represented in the pres- R134a
sure enthalpy diagram in Figure 66. Key state points are
indicated on the figure. The cycle for the full load ARI design
point is represented in the plot. The RTAG chiller uses a 300
shell and tube evaporator design with refrigerant evaporat-

2
ing on the shell side and water flowing inside tubes having 3b
3

2b
kPa
enhanced surfaces (states 4 to 1). The suction lines are de-

signed to minimize pressure drop (states 1 to 1b). The com-
pressor is a twin rotor helical rotary compressor designed
similarly to the compressors offered in other Trane screw 1
compressor based chiller (states 1b to 2). The discharge 4
1b

lines include a highly efficient oil separation system that

removes 99% of the oil from the refrigerant stream going to
30
80 100 120 140
KJ/kg 160 180 200
the heat exchangers (states 2 to 2b). De-superheating, con-

densing and sub-cooling are accomplished in fin and tube air
Figure 66. Pressure Enthalpy (P-h) diagram of RTAG
cooled heat exchanger where refrigerant is condensed inside
the 7mm tube (states 2b to 3b). Refrigerant flow through the
Figure 67 show the refrigerant cycle of pressure enthalpy di-
104 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
agram of RTAG with economizer unit (NTON: 225, 310, 340,
440). Comparing to Figure 66, the leaving condenser refrig- Compressor
erant (states 5) don’t enter EXV, which is separated into two The compressor is a semi-hermetic, direct-drive rotary type
parts. The minor parts pass through minor EXV (states 5-6), compressor. Each compressor has only four moving parts:
enters brazed plates heat exchanger economizer, evaporat- two rotors that provide compression and male and female
ing in economizer (states 6-7), the superheated refrigerant load-control valves. The male rotor is attached to the motor
gas entering compressor auxiliary port (states 7). The major and the female rotor is driven by the male rotor.The rotors
parts of refrigerant leaving condenser also enter economizer and motor are supported by bearings.
and be cooled again (states 5-3b), the super cooled major
refrigerant go through EXV (states 3b-4), enters evapora- The helical rotary compressor is a positive displacement
tor(4-1). device. Refrigerant vapor from the evaporator is drawn into
the suction opening of the compressor (state 1b), through a
suction strainer screen across the motor (which provides mo-
tor cooling) and into the intake of the compressor rotors. The
R134a
gas is then compressed and discharged through a check
valve and into the discharge line (state 2).
There is no physical contact between the rotors and the com-
300 3
2 pressor housing.The rotors contact each other at the point
5
3b 2b where the driving action between the male and female rotors
occurs. Oil is injected into the rotors of the compressor, coat-
ing the rotors and the compressor housing interior. Although
kPa
this oil does provide rotor lubrication, its primary purpose is

to seal the clearance spaces between the rotors and com-
6 7 2'
pressor housing. A positive seal between these internal parts
enhances compressor efficiency by limiting leakage between
4 1b
the high pressure and low pressure cavities. dictated by the
position of the loading valve relative to the rotors. When the
30 valve slides toward the discharge end of the rotors compres-
80 100 120 140KJ/kg 160 180 200 220
sor capacity is reduced.
Figure 67. Pressure Enthalpy (P-h) diagram of RTAG RTAG high efficiency units and extra efficiency units apply
with Economizer fixed speed compressor, which capacity control is accom-
plished by means of a female step load-control valve and a
male control valve. The female step valve is the first stage
R134a/R513A Refrigerant of loading after the compressor starts and the last stage of
unloading before the compressor shuts down. The male con-
Trane believes that responsible refrigerant practices are trol valve is positioned by a piston cylinder along the length
important to the environment, our customers, and the air of the male rotor. Compressor capacity is dictated by the
conditioning industry. All technicians who handle refrigerants position of the loading valve relative to the rotors. When the
must be properly qualified. All local and International regula- valve slides toward the discharge end of the rotors compres-
tions in what handling, reclaiming, recovering and recycling, sor capacity is reduced.
must be followed.
For premium seasonal efficiency unit apply varied speed
R134a/R513A is a medium pressure refrigerant. It may not compressor, capacity control is combined action of slide
be used in any condition that would cause the chiller to valve and variable frequency driver.
operate in a vacuum without a purge system. RTAG is not
equipped with a purge system. Therefore, the RTAG chiller Figure 68, each compressor has an interior replaceable
may not be operated in a condition that would result in a core oil filter. It can remove the impurity which may block the
saturated condition in the chiller of -26°C or lower. check valve or oil channel of oil, to avoid the excessive wear
of rotors and bearing.
NOTICE Some RTAG unit has economizer, its compressor has a gas
R134a/R513A require the use of specific POE oils as inlet at female rotor compression chamber , where refriger-
designated on the unit nameplate. To avoid compressor ant gas from economizer is inhaled. Compressor with econo-
damage and insure the performance requirement, use
mizer inlet is shown below (Figure 69).
the listed oil as designated on nameplate
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 105
Figure 68. Compressor inner configuration
Auxiliary Inlet Port
Figure 69. Compressor with Auxiliary Inlet Port
Condenser Fan fans are shut off. Fan staging depends on the chiller load,
evaporator pressure, condenser effectiveness, ambient
The condenser and subcooler consist of 7mm inner-grooved temperature, and numbers and sizes of fans installed on the
copper tube which contain the refrigerant, large fins are in circuit.
the air flow side and fans that draw air through the fins and
tubes. Heat is transferred from the refrigerant through the
tubes and fins to the air. High pressure gas from the com- Evaporator
pressor enters the tubes of the condenser through a distribu-
RTAG evaporator is CHIL evaporator which is patented by
tion header (state 2b). As refrigerant flows through the tubes,
Trane. It is divided into two area: high efficiency boil area and
the heat of compression and cooling load are rejected to the
high oil concentration area. A distributor is installed in bottom
air. In this process the refrigerant is de-superheated, con-
of high efficiency boil area. Two phase refrigerant (state 4)
densed (states 2b to 3) and finally subcooled (states 3 to 3b)
inject towards to heat exchange through the distributor. The
to a temperature slightly above the ambient air temperature.
uplifted bubbles enforce the disturb of refrigerant, so the
The subcooled liquid refrigerant is collected in the leaving
heat exchange efficiency is high. The liquid refrigerant-oil
header where it is transferred to the liquid line (state 3b).
mixture continune flow to high oil concentration area and go
The air flow rate of fan is controlled according to principle on evaporating, oil concentration further increase, and finally
of getting maximum efficiency, meanwhile considering the go back to compressor.for R134a system.Refrigerant vapor
system pressure differential. If a warm enough ambient is exits the evaporator through the suction line (state 1).
sensed, all the fans will run. If the ambient is cooler, some
The material of evaporator shell is carbon steel, and tube
106 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
is internally and externally finned seamless copper tubes, back to the oil separator. Very little amount of oil pasts the oil
mechanically expanded into the tube sheets. Tubes are separator, and flows through the condenser, subcooler and
cleanable with dismountable water boxes. Tubes diameter expansion valve into the evaporator. This part of oil is collect-
exterior is 19mm. Each tube is individually replaceable. The ed with refrigerant at rich oil range of CHIL evaporator. For
evaporator is designed, tested and stamped in accordance R134a system, it is returned through a line that is connected
with ASME Pressure regulation for a refrigerant side working to the compressor.
pressure of 1.38MPa. Water side working pressure has two
An internal, pilot operated shutoff valve is provided to pre-
kinds: 1.03MPa (150psig) and 2.06MPa (300psig) . Standard
vent oil flow from oil separator into the compressor when the
water connections are Flange.
compressor is not running.
Expansion Valve
RTAG adopt EXV to control refrigerant flow. As refrigerant
passes through the valve the pressure is dropped substan-
tially, which results in vaporization of some of the refrigerant.
So two phase refrigerant enter the distribution of evaporator
(state 4), then spray on tube of evaporator evenly.
A TXV ( Thermal Expansion Valve) is applied in oil cooler
circuits.
Oil Separator
To enhance the performance of the heat exchanger surfaces
an oil separator is placed in the discharge line between the
compressor and the condenser. RTAG oil separator is cen-
trifuge type. The refrigerant gas is discharged by the com-
pressor, entering oil separator cylinder from the tangential
direction of the upper part of it. Oil drop will be thrown out
from the refrigerant gas due to the centrifugal force produced
by the rotating in the cylinder. Oil that is removed from the
refrigerant falls along the cylinder wall by gravity into the oil
sump, and then returned to the compressor. The refrigerant
vapor, get rid of the oil, is discharged from the top of the oil
separator, flow into the condenser. Approximately 99.5% of
the oil is removed from the refrigerant in the separator.
Oil system
See Figure 65 System Schematic. Screw compressors
require large quantities of oil for lubricating and sealing the
rotors and lubricating the bearings, pushing slide valve. The
oil mixed with refrigerant at the discharge of the compressor,
majority of it is separated and flow to bottom of oil separa-
tor, minority enters system circuits with refrigerant. Oil in
the oil sump of separator is discharge from oil separator by
high pressure when compressor is working. It flows through
oil cooler, angle valve, compressor inner filter and shut off
valve, then is divided into two ways: one injects to rotors
from the top shell of compressor, to lubricate rotors, and
seal the gaps between rotors and compressor shell. Another
way inject to the bearing chamber to lubricate bearing, then
go back to suction port of rotor through oil circuits in the
compressor shell. Once oil is injected into the compressor
rotors, it mixes with the refrigerant again and is delivered
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 107
Pre-Start Checkout
sequence.
Installation Checklist
5. Check and confirm all the fans can rotate freely.
Complete this checklist as the unit is installed, and verify that
all recommended procedures are accomplished before the 6. Fill the evaporator chilled-water circuit. Vent the system
unit is started. Fill out “Table 42. RTAG Start-up Test Log”. while it is being filled. Open the vents on the top of the
This checklist does not replace the detailed instructions giv- evaporator water box while filling and close when filling
en in the “Installation Mechanical” and “Installation Electrical” is completed.
sections of this manual. Read both sections completely, to 7. Start the chilled-water pump to begin circulation of the
be familiar with the installation procedures, prior beginning water. Inspect all piping for leakage and make any nec-
the work. essary repairs.
8. With water circulating through the system, adjust the
Check precedure water flow to meet the range of Table 1 through Table 7
and check the water pressure drop through the evapo-
When installation is complete, before starting the unit, the
rator according to “Figure 23. Water flow pressure drop
following prestart procedures must be reviewed and verified:
curve”
1. Inspect all wiring connections in the compressor power
9. Adjust the chilled-water flow switch for proper operation
circuits (disconnects, terminal block, contactors, com-
pressor junction box terminals and so forth) to ensure 10. Stop the chilled-water pump
they are clean and tight. 11. Electric evaporator heater with separated single-phase 230V.
2. Open all refrigerant valves in the discharge, liquid, and 12. Maintain power supply, so that compressor and oil elec-
oil return lines, open and inlet/outlet valve in water loop; tric heater could work. Switch button on control touch
Operation of angle valve in liquid line: In the face of screen should be in stop state.
valve stem, rotate stem clockwise is close and counter-
clockwise is open) ; Operation of ball valve in oil return 13. Check oil level in oil separator.
line: ball valve open/close status see Figure 70. 14. Check and set, as required, all symbio800 TD7 menu
items
15. Energize the compressor and oil separator heaters 24
hours, prior to unit start up.
16. For variable frequency drives or other energy storing
components provided by Trane or others, refer to the ap-
propriate manufacturer’s literature for allowable waiting
Open
periods for discharge of capacitors. Verify with an appro-
priate voltmeter that all capacitors have discharged.
Failure to disconnect power and discharge capacitors
before servicing could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
Confirm the terminal blocks and the compressor power
Close line has tightened (including circuit breaker, contactor,
compressor connector terminals, etc.). Loose connec-
Figure 70. Ball Valve Open/Close status tions can cause overheating and under-voltage condi-
3. Check the power-supply voltage to the unit at the tions at the compressor motor.
main-power fused-disconnect switch. Voltage must be
within the voltage use range which is stamped on the
unit nameplate. Voltage fluctuation must not exceed
10%.Voltage imbalance must not exceed 2%.
4. Check the unit power phasing L1-L2-L3 in the starter
to ensure that it has been installed in a “A-B-C” phase
108 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Pre-Start Checkout
Vx = phase with greatest difference from Vave (without
NOTICE
regard to the sign)
Compressor Damage!
For example, if the three measured voltages are 221, 230,
Catastrophic damage to the compressor will occur if and 227 volts, the average would be:
the refrigerant circuit or water circuit are closed on unit
start-up. (221+230+227)/3 =226
The percentage of the imbalance is then:
NOTICE
100*(221-226)/226 =2.2%
Compressor Damage!
This exceeds the maximum allowable (2%) by 0.2 percent.
It is imperative that L1, L2, L3 in the starter be connect-
ed in the A-B-C phase sequence to prevent equipment
damage due to reverse rotation. Unit Voltage Phasing
It is important that proper rotation of the compressors be
NOTICE
established before the unit is started. Proper motor rotation
Equipment Damage! requires confirmation of the electrical phase sequence of the
Low ambient temperatures, ensure the power supply of power supply. The motor is internally connected for clock-
evaporator heater so as to avoid the evaporator freez- wise rotation with the incoming power supply phases A-B-C.
ing damage. When rotation is clockwise, the phase sequence is usually
called “ABC”, when counterclockwise “CBA”
NOTICE This direction may be reversed by interchanging any two of
Compressor Damage! the line wires . It is this possible interchange of wiring that
makes a phase sequence indicator necessary if the operator
Ensure that the compressor and oil separator heaters
is to quickly determine the phase rotation of the motor.
have been operating for a minimum of 24 hours before
first starting after a long down time. Failure to do so Proper compressor motor electrical phasing can be quickly
may result in equipment damage. determined and corrected before starting the unit. Use a
quality instrument, such as the Associated Research Model
45 Phase Sequence Indicator, and follow this procedure:
Unit Voltage Power Supply 1. Stop the unit from TD7/Symbio800.
Unit voltage must meet the criteria given in the installation
2. Open the electrical disconnect or circuit protection
Electrical Section. Measure each lead of the supply voltage
switch that provides line power to the line power termi-
at the main power fused-disconnect switch for the unit. If
nal block(s) in the starter panel (or to the unit mounted
the measured voltage on any lead is not within the specified
disconnect).
range, notify the supplier of the power and correct the situa-
tion before operating the unit. 3. Connect the phase-sequence indicator leads to the line
power terminal block (L1-L2-L3).
NOTICE Phase Seq. Lead Terminal
Equipment Damage! Black (Phase A) L1
Red (Phase B) L2
Provide adequate voltage to the unit. Failure to do so can Yellow (Phase C) L3
cause control components to malfunction and shorten the
4. Turn power on by closing the unit supply-power
life of relay contact, compressor motors and contactors.
fused-disconnect switch.
Unit Voltage Imbalance 5. Read the phase sequence on the indicator. The “ABC”
LED on the face of the phase indicator will glow if phase
Excessive voltage imbalance between the phases of a three-
is “ABC”. After service compressor terminal conncetion
phase system can cause motors to overheat and eventu-
should be same as Schematic Diagram to make sure
ally fail. The maximum allowable unbalance is 2%. Voltage
the compressor turn in right direction.
imbalance is determined using the following calculations:
6. If the “CBA” indicator glows instead, open the unit main
power disconnect and switch two line leads on the line
power terminal block(s) (or the unit mounted discon-
nect). Re-close the main power disconnect and recheck
the phasing.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 109
Pre-Start Checkout
7. Reopen the unit disconnect and disconnect the phase
indicator
NOTICE
It is imperative that L1, L2, and L3 in the starter be con-
nected in the A-B-C phase sequence to prevent equip-
ment damage due to reverse rotation.
NOTICE
To prevent injury or death due to electrocution, take ex-
treme care when performing service procedures with elec-
trical power energized.
CAUTION !
Equipment Damage!
Do not interchange any load leads that are from the unit
contactors or the motor terminals. Doing so may dam-
age the equipment.
Water System Flow Rates

Establish a balanced chilled water flow through the evapo-
rator. The flow rates should fall in the range of Table 1~Ta-
ble 7 Evaporator Flow Rate(fall between the minimum and
maximum values given on the pressure drop curves). Chilled
water flow rates below the minimum values will result in
laminar flow, which reduces heat transfer and causes either
loss of EXV control or repeated nuisance, low temperature,
cutouts. Flow rates that are too high can cause tube erosion
in the evaporator.
Water System Pressure Drop

According to Figure 21, Measure the water-pressure drop
through the evaporator by field installed pressure gauge
on the system water piping. Use the same gauge for each
measurement. Do not include valves, strainers, or fittings in
the pressure drop readings. The water flow rate correspond-
ing to the pressure drop reading must fall in the range of flow
show in Table 1 ~ Table 7.
110 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Unit Start Up and Shut Off Procedures
Start Up NOTICE
If the present checkout, as discussed above charpter, has Equipment Damage!
been completed, the unit is ready to start. Use only refrigerants specified on the unit nameplate (HFC
1. Make sure the STOP key display on the TD7 134a) and Trane oil specified on the unit nameplate. Failure
to do so may cause compressor damage and improper unit
2. Adjust the set point values as necessary on the TD7 operation.
menus using Tracer TU, and fill in Table 44
3. Close the fused-disconnect switch for the chilledwater ! CAUTION
pump. Energize the pump(s) to start water circulation Avoid direct touch of refrigerant, otherwise skin may be
frostbitten.
4. Check all the service valves are open fro each circuit,
for example, valve on liquid line, oil line etc
NOTICE
5. Make sure evaporator heater is energized right. Efficiency Decrease!
6. Ensure that the compressor and oil separator heaters According to the filling option, if whole charge option,Trane
have been operating for a minimum of 24 hours before factory finish debugging operation, don’t need be charged
starting. Failure to do so may result in equipment dam- before first start, else for nitrogen charging options or 12 kg
age filling options, filling unit must strictly follow Table 1 ~ Table
7. Press the AUTO key. If the chiller control calls for cool- 7 charge amount before starting.For later adding refriger-
ing and all safety interlocks are closed, the unit will start. ant, please find the leak point and complete the repair, do
The compressor(s) will load and unload in response to not add refrigerant randomly which may led to overcharge
the leaving chilled water temperature. or lesscharge
8. After the system has been operating for at least 30 min-

utes and has become stabilized, complete the remaining Seasonal Unit Startup Procedure
start up procedures, as follows Steps as below:
a. Check the evaporator refrigerant pressure, the con- 1. Close all valves and reinstall the drain plugs in the evap-
denser refrigerant pressure, approach temperature, orator.
under Refrigerant Report on the TD7, they should in
range of Table 41, when compressor in full load. 2. Service the auxiliary equipment according to the startup
and maintenance instructions provided by the respective
b. Measure the system discharge superheat. equipment manufacturers.
Table 41. Unit Running Status 3. If the evaporator was previously drained, vent and fill
Evaporator Approach Condensor Approach the evaporator and chilled-water circuit. When all air is
Range Calculation Method Range Calculation Method removed from the system (including each pass), install
(oC) (oC) the vent plugs in the evaporator water boxes.
2~4 Leaving water tempterature − 12~20 Saturated discharge tempera-
saturated suction tempterature ture − Ambient temperature 4. Open all the valves in the evaporator chilled-water cir-
cuits.
5. Open all refrigerant valves.
6. Check the adjustment and operation of each safety and
operating control.
7. Close all disconnect switches.
NOTICE 8. Refer to the sequence for daily unit start up for the re-
Compressor Damage! mainder of the seasonal start up.
Catastrophic damage to the compressor will occur if the oil

line shut off valve or the angele valves are closed on unit
start-up.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 111
Unit Start Up and Shug Off Procedures
System Restart after Extended Extended Shutdown Procedure

Shutdown The following procedure is to be followed if the system is to
be taken out of service for an extended period of time (i.e.
1. Verify that the liquid-line service valves, oil line, are
seasonal shutdown):
open (back seated).
1. Test the unit for refrigerant leaks and repair as neces-
2. Check the oil separator oil level (see Maintenance pro-
sary.
cedures section).
2. Open the unit main electrical disconnect and unitmount-
3. Fill the evaporator water circuit. Vent the system while it
ed disconnect (if installed) and lock in the “OPEN” posi-
is being filled. Open the vent on the top of the evapora-
tion.
tor while filling, and close it when filling is completed.
3. Disconnect the evaporater heater, to avoid burn out of
4. Close the fused-disconnect switches that provide power
heater.
to the chilled-water pump.
4. Open the electrical disconnect switches for the
5. Start the evaporator water pump and, while water is
chilled-water pump. Lock the switches in the “OPEN”po-
circulating, inspect all piping for leakage. Make any
sition
necessary repairs before starting the unit.
5. Close all chilled-water supply valves. Drain the water
6. While the water is circulating, adjust the water flow and
from the evaporator.
check the water pressure drops through the evaporator.
Refer to “water-system flow rates” and “water-system 6. At least every three months (quarterly), check the refrig-
pressure drop”. erant pressure in the unit to verify the refrigerant charge
integrity.
7. Adjust the flow switch on the evaporator piping for prop-
er operation.
NOTICE
8. Stop the water pump. The unit is now ready for startup Evaporator Anti-Freezing Heater Damage!
as described “Startup procedures”
If Evaporator water is drained out, the evaporator anti-freez-
ing heater should be power off and latched, toavoid the
Temporary Shutdown and Restart heater damage due to higher temperature.
To shut the unit down for a short time, use the following pro-
cedure:
1. Press the STOP key on the TD7. The compressors will
Seasonal Unit Startup Procedure
continue to operate and, after unloading for 20 seconds, Follow the Start Up to start the unit, Only after pass through
will stop when the compressor contactors de-energize. the procedure of Check Procedure, steps 1 to 15.
2. Stop the water circulation by turning off the chilled water
pump at least one minute after the stop of the compres-
sors.
NOTICE
Equipment Damage!
After unit shut down, should maintain unit power supply to
ensure the power of the compressor, oil heater.During win-
ter, the evaporator antifreeze heater must be power supply,
electric heaters so as to avoid frost crack under low ambi-
ent temperature evaporator.
The unit will start normally, provided the following conditions
exist:
1. The controller receives a call for cooling and the differ-
ential-to-start is above the setpoint.
2. All system operating interlocks and safety circuits are
satisfied.
112 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Periodic Maintenance
Perform all maintenance procedures and inspections at the 5. Inspect all piping components for leakage and damage.
recommended intervals. This will prolong the life of the chiller Clean out any inline strainers.
and minimize the possibility of costly failures. 6. Clean and repaint any areas that show signs of corro-
Use an “Operator’s Log”, such as that shown at the end of sion.
the section, to record an operating history for the unit. The 7. Clean the condenser coils.
log serves as a valuable diagnostic tool for service person-
nel. By observing trends in operating conditions, an operator CAUTION !
can anticipate and prevent problem situations before they oc-
Use cleaning agent correctly!
cur. If the unit does not operate properly during maintenance
inspections, refer to “Diagnostics and Troubleshooting”. Follow the cleaning agent manufacturer’s instructions,
to avoid coil damage, personal injury or environmental
After the unit has been operating for approximately 30 pollution.
minutes and the system has stabilized, check the operating
conditions and complete the procedures below: WARNING !
Hazardous Voltage w/Capacitors!
Weekly Maintenance Disconnect all electric power, including remote dis-
While unit is running in stable conditions. con-nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/
tagout procedures to ensure the power cannot be in-
1. Check MP pressure for evaporator, condenser and inter- advertently energized. For variable frequency drives or
mediate oil. other en-ergy storing components provided by Trane or
others, refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s literature
2. Observe liquid line sight glass on EXV. for allowable waiting periods for discharge of capaci-
3. If liquid line sight glass has bubbles or approach tem- tors. Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capac-
perature of evaporator is greater than 8oF,the unit may itors have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and
discharge capacitors before servicing could result in
has leakage. Please check the leakage source and
death or serious injury.
repair it.
4. Inspect the entire system for unusual conditions and in- 8. Check and tighten all electrical connections as neces-
spect the condenser coils for dirt and debris. If the coils sary.
are dirty, refer to coil cleaning.
Monthly Maintenance
1. Perform all weekly maintenance procedures.
2. Record the system subcooling.
3. Make any repairs necessary.
Annual Maintenance
1. Perform all weekly and monthly procedures.
2. Check oil sump oil level while unit is off.
NOTE: R
outine changing of the oil is not required. Use an
oil analysis to determine the condition of the oil.
3. Have a qualified laboratory perform a compressor oil

analysis to determine system moisture content and acid
level. This analysis is a valuable diagnostic tool.
4. Contact a qualified service organization to leak test the
chiller, to check operating and safety controls, and to
inspect electrical components for deficiencies.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 113
Table 42. RTAG Start-up Test Log
RTAG Start-up Test Log

Job Name Job Location
Model #
CRC # Serial # :
Sales Order # Ship Date: Job Elevation (ft. above sea level) |
Starter Data: Start-up Only
Manufacturer Chiller Appearance on arrival:
Type: (wye-delta or x-line) Machine gauge pressure: ckt1/ckt2
Vendor ID #/ Model #: Machine Symbio800 pressure ckt1/ckt2
Volts Amps Hz Unit R-134a/R513A Charge: lbs
Compressor Data: Unit oil charge (SOL120): gal
Compressor 1A: Pressure Test (if required)
Model #: Vacuum after leak test= mm
Serial # Standing Vacuum test= mm rise in hrs
RLA Current Transformers
kW Part number (“X” code and 2-digit extension)
Volts X
Hz X
Compressor 1B: X
Model #: X
Serial # X
RLA X
kW Summary of Options Installed
Volts Tracer Communications Interface Y N
Hz Ice Making Y N
Compressor 2A: Other Y N
Model #: Other Y N
Serial # Other Y N
RLA Evap Design Conditions
kW GPM PSID
Volts Entering Water: Leaving Water:
Hz % Glycol:
Compressor 2B: Type of Glycol:
Model #:
Serial # Evap Actual Conditions
RLA GPM PSID
kW Entering Water: Leaving Water:
Volts % Glycol:
Hz Type of Glycol:
Owner Witness Signature:
114 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Table 43. RTAG Unit Configuration
RTAG Unit Configuration

Model #
Serial # CRC#
Sales Order # Ship Date Job Elevation (ft. above see level)
Setpoint View *
o
Front Panel Degree Units C / oF
Front Panel Chilled Water Setpoint
Front Panel Current Limit(%RLA)
Differential to Stop
Differential to Start
Leaving Water Temperature Cutout
Low Refrigerant Temperature Cutout
Condenser Limit
Low Ambient Lockout Setpoint
Low Ambient Lockout (circuit 1) Enable or Disable
Under/Over Voltage Protection Enable or Disable
Local Atmospheric Pressure psi
o
Design Delta T F or oC
Reset Type (circuit 1) None
Outdoor Air Temp
Constant Return
Return Reset Ratio %
Return Start Reset
Return Max Reset
Outdoor Reset Ratio %
Outdoor Start Reset
Outdoor Max Reset
Chilled Water Pump Delay Time minutes
Chilled Water Setpoint Filtering Settling Time sec
Compressor Staging Deadband
Compressor Service View **
Unit Status:
Circuit 1 Control
Front Panel Circuit Lockout Locked or Unlocked
Electronic Expansion Valve Open or Auto
Circuit 2 Control
Front Panel Circuit Lockout Locked or Unlocked
Electronic Expansion Valve Open or Auto
Configuration ***
Nameplate
Model #
Confirm Code
Serial Number
Note:
* Using Tracer TU , click on “View “ and then click “Setpoint View “ Log accordingly.
** Using Tracer TU , click on “View “ and then click “Compressor Service View “ Log accordingly.
*** Using Tracer TU , click on “View “ and then click “Configuration” (Nameplate Tab) Log accordingly
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 115
Table 44. RTAG Chiller Log
RTAG Chiller Log

Model # Serial #
Status View: *
Chiller Tab: 15 min 30 min 45 min 15 min 30 min 45 min
Operating Mode
o
Outdoor Air Temperature F or oC
o
Active Chill Water Setpoint F or oC
o
Active Current Limit Setpoint F or oC
o
Evaporator Entering Water Temp. F or oC
o
Evaporator Leaving Water Temp. F or oC
Circuit 1 Tab Circuit 2 Tab
External Hardwired Lockout Not Locked out/ Locked out Not Locked out/ Locked out
Front Panel Lockout Not Locked out/ Locked out Not Locked out/ Locked out
15 min 30 min 45 min 15 min 30 min 45 min
AirFlow %
Inverter Speed %
Condenser Refrigerant Pressure psig/kPa
o
Saturated Condenser Rfgt. Temp. F or oC
Differential Refrigerant Pressure psid/kPa
Evaporator Refrigerant Pressure psig/kPa
o
Saturated Evaporator Rfgt.Temp. F or oC
EXV Position %
Evaporator Rfgt Liquid Level inches/mm
Thermosiphon Heating Valve open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed
Purge Valve open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed
Compressor 1A Tab Compressor 2A Tab

Operating Mode
Hours Hrs/mins Hrs/mins
Starts
Phase A - B Voltage volts
Average Line Current %RLA
Line 1 current amps
Line 2 current amps
Line 3 current amps
Line 1 current %RLA
Line 2 current %RLA
Line 3 current %RLA
Evaporator Oil Return Solenoid open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed
o o
Supply Oil Temperature F or C
Intermediate Oil Pressure psig/kPa
Female Step solenoid load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload
High Pressure Cutout switch Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped
Comments:
116 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
RTAG Chiller Log (continue)

Compressor 2A Tab Compressor 2B Tab
Operating Mode
Hours Hrs/mins Hrs/mins
Starts
Phase A - B Voltage volts
Average Line Current %RLA
Line 1 current amps
Line 2 current amps
Line 3 current amps
Line 1 current %RLA
Line 2 current %RLA
Line 3 current %RLA
Evaporator Oil Return Solenoid open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed open / closed
o o
Supply Oil Temperature F or C
Intermediate Oil Pressure psig/kPa
Female Step solenoid load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload load / unload
High Pressure Cutout switch Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped Good / Tripped
Comments:
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 117
Maintenance Procedures
Refrigerant and Oil Charge Man- R134a/R513A Field Charging Pro-
agement cedure
Proper oil and refrigerant charge is essential for proper unit Be certain that the electrical power to the unit is disconnect-
operation, unit performance, and environmental protection. ed before performing this procedure.
Only trained and licensed service personnal should service
the chiller. WARNING !
Hazardous Voltage with Capacitors!
Some symptoms of a refrigerant under-
Disconnect all electric power, including remote discon-
charged unit: nects before servicing. Follow proper lockout/tagout
● Low subcooling procedures to ensure the power cannot be inadvertently
● Higher than normal discharge superheat energized. For variable frequency drives or other en-
● Bubbles in EXV sight glass ergy storing components provided by Trane or others,
● Low liquid level diagnostic refer to the appropriate manufacturer’s literature for
allowable waiting periods for discharge of capacitors.
● Larger than normal evaporator approach temperatures
Verify with an appropriate voltmeter that all capacitors
(leaving water temperature - saturated evaporator tem-
have discharged. Failure to disconnect power and dis-
perature) charge capacitors before servicing could result in death
● Low evaporator refrigerant temperature limit or serious injury.
● Low refrigerant temperature cutout diagnostic
● Fully open expansion valve
● Possible whistling sound coming from liquid line (due to Vacuum Procedure
high vapor velocity) If there is no refrigerant in the unit, it is necessary to pump
● High condenser + subcooler pressure drop the vacuum first and then refill it. The steps are as follows:
Some symptoms of a refrigerant over-charged 1. The electronic expansion valve should be in the open
unit: position.
● Lower discharge superheat 2. Confirm that all power supply of the unit is disconnected
● Larger than normal condenser approach temperatures and locked.
(entering condenser saturated temperature – entering air
temperature) 3. The unit shall complete leak detection first, no leakage
● Condenser pressure limit is confirmed.
● High pressure cutout diagnostic 4. Connecting the vacuum hose to service valve on the
● Higher than normal compressor power evaporator and/or liquid line, open the service valve.
Some symptoms of an oil over-charged unit: 5. Start the vacuum pump. Close the service valve and
Stop vacuum pump successively when the vacuum
● Larger than normal evaporator approach temperatures
gauge is lower than 67Pa.
(leaving water temperature - saturated evaporator tem-
perature) 6. The unit should be left to rest for at least 1 hour after
● Low evaporator refrigerant temperature limit vacuuming, and the pressure rise should not exceed
● Low unit capacity 20 Pa. If the pressure rise exceeds 20Pa, there is still a
● Low discharge superheat (especially at high loads) leak or some moisture in the system, repeat steps 3 to 6
● High oil sump level after normal shut down above.
Some symptoms of an oil under-charged unit: 7. Remove the vacuum hose.
● Compressor rattle or grinding sound

● Oil loss diagnostic Factory (initial) Refrigerant Charging Pro-
● Seized or welded compressor cedure
● Low oil sump level after normal shut down
The initial charging procedure should be followed the first
time the unit is charged in the factory, as well as for charging
any time after the charge has been completely removed from
the entire system in the event of repair.
118 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
1. The unit shall first complete Vacuuming Procedure. ● The workplace should be well ventilated, away from
flammable and explosive objects, rain proof, and avoid to
2. Connect charging hose to the service valve on eva-po-
moisture.
rator or liquid line ( filter contain a port). discharge the
air in the hose. Charge liquid refrigerant in liquid line and ● When the recovery equipment is working, the unit or loop
vapor refrigerant on the evaporator. recovered shouldn’t run.
3. Charge unit through the housing port per nameplate. ● The refrigerant recovery container must be dedicated to
Respect refrigerant type on the nameplate and do not R134a or R513A and can be refilled repeatedly. Recov-
mix R134a with R513A. ered refrigerants should be weighed to ensure that the
total refrigerant does not exceed 80% of the container
4. When charging is complete, shut off service valve and
capacity.
disconnect charging hoses.
CAUTION ! Refrigerant Filter Replacement Procedure

Evaporator Damage! A dirty filter is indicated by a temperature gradient across the
Water must be flowing through the evaporator during filter, corresponding to a pressure drop. If the temperature
the entire charging process to avoid freezing and rup- downstream of the filter is 8°F (4.4°C) lower than the up-
turing of the evaporator tubes. Charge first with vapor stream temperature, the filter should be replaced.
to avoid freezing tubes. 1. With the unit off, verify that the EXV is closed.
2. Close liquid line isolation valve. On units with oil cooling
Adding charge
circuits, close ball valve on oil cooler liquid line.
This procedure should be followed when adding charge to
an undercharged unit. 3. Attach hose to service port on liquid line filter flange.
1. Attach charging hose to evaporator service valve. 4. Evacuate refrigerant from liquid line and store, then
remove hose.
2. Open the valve of charge bottle, discharge the air in
charge hose. 5. Depress schrader valve to equalize pressure in liquid
line with atmospheric pressure.
3. Open the service valve, charge 10 pounds refrigerant
gas. ! CAUTION
4. Run unit at least 30 minutes, measure the evaporator If the electronic expansion valve cannot be closed,
approach. please carry out “refrigerant recovery”, then continue
the following steps.
5. If the evaporator approach is higher than value in Table
41, return to step 3 6. Remove bolts that retain filter flange.
6. Close the service valve and disconnect the charging 7. Remove old filter element.
hose.
8. Inspect replacement filter element and lubricate o-ring
Note: Proper evaporator approach can be determined with Trane OIL.
from run log history, service experience, or by con-
tacting Trane technical service. ! CAUTION
Do not use mineral oil, otherwise it will contaminate the
system.
Refrigerant Recovery
If refrigerant recover is needed, it should use special re-cov- 9. Install new filter element in filter housing.
ery equipment to recover refrigerant, and store in a special
10. Inspect flange gasket and replace if damaged.
container. It is forbidden to discharge the refrigerant into the
atmosphere directly, or collect the refrigerant into the con- 11. nstall flange and torque bolts to 14-16 lb-ft (19-22 n-m).
tainer by using the compressor of the unit to pump.
12. 1Attach vacuum hose and evacuate liquid line.
The recovery of refrigerant can be carried out through the
13. Remove vacuum hose from liquid line and attach
service valve on the liquid line tube or evaporator. Attention
charging hose.
notes are as follows:
14. Replace stored charge in liquid line.
● Operations must be performed by qualified operator with
personal protective equipment. 15. Remove charging hose.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 119
16. Open liquid line isolation valve. On units with remote 3. Attach a charging hose with an integrated sight glass
evaporators or oil cooler to the service valve (1/4” port) and oil drain valve (1/4”
port) of the oil separator.
Compressor Oil Note: Alternatively, high pressure resistance lucid hose

with appropriate fittings can be used for measure-
ment.
CAUTION !
Equipment Damage! 4. Open both valves, move the sight glass up and down
Use only Trane OIL (specified on the unit nameplate), in along the oil separator to confirm the height of oil level.
the RTAG units to avoid any catastrophic damage to the The height of oil level (indicated as “h” in the figure)
compressor or unit. should be between 50mm and 150mm from the bottom.
R134a/R513A requires the use of specific POE oils as 5. If the oil level is too high, the additional oil may reside in
designated on the unit nameplate and listed on below table. other parts of the system and result in lower efficiency.
Refrigerant Trane OIL
Some oil can be removed till the level falls within rea-
R134a/R513A TRANE OIL 00317 sonable range.
R1234ze TRANE OIL 0067E
6. If the oil level is too low, it possibly indicates oil migra-
And the general conditions of the oil should meet the require- tion to evaporator or a system leak.
ments of following table.
Note: If the oil accumulates in the evaporator, it need to
Index Acceptable Level check whether the oil return solenoid valve is open,
Moisture Content Moisture content less than 300ppm and whether the filter on oil return pipeline requires
Acidity Acidity less than 0.5TAN (mg KOH/g) replacement. If a system leak is detected, repair
the leakage before replenishing the oil.
Oil Separator Oil Level Check
7. Close the service valves and remove the hose (with
sight glass) after measurement.
! CAUTION
Oil Loss!
Compressor Oil Charging
Never allow the compressor to operate with opened ser-
vice valves connecting the sight glass during oil level NOTICE
check, or severe oil loss will occur. Close the valves
after the check. Oil Loss Alarm!
See Figure 72. Oil Level Measure of Oil Separator, follow The diagnostic of “low oil flow” will appear if oil lines
these procedures: are not fully charged during compressor start-up.
1. Run the unit under full load for more than 30 minutes. The diagnostic of “oil loss” will appear if the oil level
sensor at the bottom of oil separator does not detect oil
2. Shut off the compressor. during compressor start-up.
Service Whether should charge oil depends on the actual operation

Valve status of unit. Oil level check and compressor oil charging
are required if any of the following happens:
1. Oil leak during maintenance: oil sampling, element
replacement of compressor internal filter, pipe replace-
ment of water-side heat exchanger.
2. Component replacement: replacement of compressor or
coils.
3. Leakage in system, or oil loss caused by recovering
h
Hose with refrigerant. These must be handled immediately.
sight glass
In general, there are two methods to charge compressor oil:
● Maintain vacuum in the unit with a vacuum pump, and
draw the oil into the system.
Discharge oil valve
Note: Require to recover the refrigerant in unit system
Figure 71. Oil Level Measure of Oil Separator before vacuuming
120 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
stopped.
● Pump the oil into oil pipeline with an oil pump after the
unit has stopped with unchanged pressure. 2. Once low oil level is confirmed, 2kg of oil need be added
into the oil separator in unit stopped mode. Then, start
Note: oil pump and hose need to have enough pressure
the unit and keep running for 2 hours. After stopping the
resistance
unit again, drain 2kg of oil mixture from the oil separator
Compressor oil charging procedure (after unit stops) by following “Draining Compressor Oil”.
1. Loosely connect the oil hose to the 1/4” angle valve of 3. If oil level is normal, check whether the oil level sensor
compressor oil line as Figure 72. and its wiring are correct.
2. Pour with the oil tank or run the oil pump. Once the oil 4. If oil level is normal and the oil level sensor and its
has emptied the air in the hose, tighten the connector of connection are right, the issue is possibly caused by
hose. too much liquid refrigerant in the oil separator. Then,
the unit should be prohibited to run and the heaters of
3. Open the angle valve of compressor oil line to charge compressor and oil separator should be powered on for
the required amount of oil. more than 12 hours, then conduct “Oil Separator Level
Note: adding the oil at the oil charging port of compres- Check” again.
sor angle valve can ensure the oil filter cavity and
oil pipe following the oil separator are filled with oil, NOTICE
and an internal check valve can prevent oil from Bypassing the protection of oil level sen-
entering compressor rotors cavity. sor is prohibited!
When Oil Loss diagnostic appears, check the oil level
of oil separator first. In order to avoid compressor dam-
age, DO NOT bypass the protection of oil level sensor.
Angle valve
in oil line
Internal Oil Filter Replacement
Under normal operating conditions, compressor internal filter
element should be replaced after the first year of operation
and as needed thereafter. The filter must be replaced if the
operating pressure meets the replacement condition shown
in “Figure 74. Oil Filter Replacement“ , or “Low Oil Flow”
Figure 72. Oil Charge of Compressor diagnostic frequently occurs, or the oil quality cannot meet
requirements. Follow these procedures:
Draining Compressor oil 1. With the unit off, disconnect and lock all power supplies.
2. Recover the refrigerant in unit and release the system
NOTICE
pressure.
POE Oil!
3. Close the maintenance valves on compressor oil return
Due to high hygroscopic properties of POE oil, all oil pipeline.
must be stored in metal containers, not a plastic con-
tainer. 4. Open the release plug on the cover plate of oil filter to
ensure the pressure in internal filter has been released
Compressor oil draining can only begin after the compressor
has run 30 min and stopped 10 mins. Procedure as follow- before next step.
ing: 5. Prepare container to collect and weight the leaked oil
1. Attach the pipe to the bottom drain valve of oil separator. from replacing the filter.
2. Open the valve to discharge and weight the oil. 6. Unscrew the bolts on the cover plate of oil filter, and
remove the plate to take out the filter.
3. Close the valve after draining a certain amount of oil.
7. Replace with a new filter.
Oil Loss Troubleshooting 8. Replace the seal ring and lubricate it with a small
amount of compressor oil.
When the unit has an Oil Loss diagnostic, follow these pro-
cedures: 9. Install the cover plate, screw and tighten the bolts, then
open the maintenance valves of compressor oil lines.
1. Conduct “Oil Separator Level Check” after the unit has
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 121
Min pressure differential = 25 psid

Protect line in the first 2.5 minutes of
running
Protect line after running 2.5 minutes

Unit stop
Should replace oil filter if run above this line
Should clear oil filter if run above this line
Figure 74. Oil Filter Replacement

10. Perform leak test with pressurized Nitrogen, then vacuum.
CAUTION !
11. Charge an equal amount of new compressor oil Use Cleaning Agent Correctly!
com-paring to the leaked oil, in the method referring to
the “Compressor Oil Charging”. Follow manufacturer’s guidance for cleaning agent
when cleaning coil to avoid the coil damage, personal
12. Charge a rated amount of refrigerant injury and environmental pollution.
Evaporator Oil Return Pipe Filter Re-

place-ment Water-side Heat Exchanger Main-
When the temperature difference is obvious between the tenance
upstream and downstream of the filter, suggest to replace it
as following procedures:
NOTICE
1. Close both ball valve and solenoid valve at two ends of
the filter.
Treat Water Properly!
The use of untreated or improperly treated water may
2. Discharge the oil and refrigerant inside the filter pipe
result in scaling, erosion, corrosion, algae or slime. It
with the pin valves on the top of ball valves.
is recommended that the services of a qualified water
3. Replace with a new oil filter. treatment specialist is required to determine what water
treatment, if any, is required. The TRANE Company
4. Perform leak test with pressurized Nitrogen, then vacu- assumes no responsibility for equipment failures which
um. result from untreated or improperly treated water, sa-
line or brackish water.
5. Open both ball valves and let the pipe be filled with
liquid. Water-side heat exchanger is maintained based on following
requirements:
● Nondestructive testing for the tubes of the heat ex-chang-
Coil Cleaning er at least once every 3 years.
Outdoor coils should be cleaned at least annually. If the unit
Note: design a reasonable frequency for testing accord-
presents in a relatively dirty environment, the cleaning fre- ing to the actual conditions of unit
quency should be increased to ensure the unit operating per-
formance. The suggestion is the chemical cleaning method. ● Water-side heat exchanger is a closed circulation and
does not generate obvious fouling ordinarily. When unit is
regarded as comforting air conditioner, if the approaching
temperature difference (temperature difference between
cooling outlet water and saturated evaporation) is above
5.6 oC, then the tubes of water-side heat exchanger re-
122 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
quire cleaning. Generally, chemical cleaning is performed 4. Water box reinstallation. Before installation, check
first, followed by mechanical cleaning. whether sealing rings and gaskets of water box connec-
tions are intact; if damaged, it should be replaced with a
new one after thorough washing of the sealing surface.
Chemical Cleaning of Water-side Heat Ex-
Then tighten the bolts of water box.
changer
Note: Tighten bolts in a star pattern.
Consult qualified experts in water treatment to confirm the
appropriate chemical cleaning method to avoid unit dam-
5. Reinstall and reconnect the outside water pipes.
age. Figure 73 shows a typical case of chemical cleaning of
reverse external circulation. All of the materials used in the 6. Perform water pipes leak test and repair the damaged
external circulation system, the quantity of the solution, the insulation.
duration of the cleaning period, and any required safety pre- Note: the pressure of leak test should refer to the name-
cautions should be approved by the company furnishing the plate of heat exchanger.
materials or performing the cleaning. Mechanical cleaning
shall be performed after completing the chemical cleaning.
Tubes Replacement of Water-side Heat Ex-
changer
If the tubes of water-side heat exchanger requires re-
place-ment, following these steps:
1. With the unit off, disconnect and lock unit power sup-
plies.
2. Recover the refrigerant and confirm the pressure inside
heat exchanger has already been released before next
step.
3. Remove the side water boxes of heat exchanger.
4. Refer to Figure 15, pull and replace the heat exchange
Figure 73. Chemical Cleaning tubes in the correct pulling direction.
5. Leak Test of refrigerant side.
Mechanical Cleaning of Water-side Heat 6. Reinstall the water box, connect external water pipes,
Exchanger and perform leak test of water side
The method of mechanical cleaning is adopted for cleaning
sludge or fouling of tubes. The cleaning steps are shown as NOTICE
following: Heat Exchanger Tubes Damage!
1. Disconnect and uninstall the water pipes connecting to The heat exchanger tubes have protections at both
water box (may be supported with lifts). ends and in the center. When replacing tubes, pay
attention to ensure that the tubes are at the right loca-
Note: Avoid damaging the temperature sensors and insu- tions, in order to prevent damage to the tubes or affect-
lation. ing system performance.
2. Uninstall and remove watet box.
! WARNING Compressor Replacement

Heavy Objects! If a compressor needs to be replaced follow the procedures
Must pay full attention when uninstalling the water box, listed below.
in order to prevent death or serious injury from falling
1. Disconnect power to the chiller. Remove the electrical
heavy objects
junction box cover and disconnect the wires and high
3. Heat exchanger tubes cleaning. After removing the pressure switch etc. component.
water box, use the specialized round nylon brush (1 inch
size) to clean the inner surface of heat exchanger tubes.
It is forbidden to use steel wire brush to avoid tube dam-
age. Thoroughly flush the water tubes with clean water.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 123
WARNING ! Fan Replacement

Voltage Hazards! Fan replacement should follow the procedures listed below:
Disconnect all electric power sources, including re- 1. Disconnect and lock power supplies.
mote breakers connecting the unit before maintenance.
2. Disconnect wiring in the terminal box of malfunctioned
Follow proper lockout / tag out (LOTO) procedures to
ensure the power cannot be accidentally connected. fan.
Failure to do so can result in death or serious injury. 3. Remove the fixing bolts of the guard and orifice of mal-
functioned fan.
2. Recover the refrigent
4. Dismantle the components of the malfunction fan and
3. Disassemble the vertical pillar and slanted channel on
replace with a new set, tighten the surrounding fixing
the compressor side, and use vertical pillar as tempo-
bolts of the guard.
rary supporting if necessary.
5. Reconnect the electrical wirings. Ensure the line marks
4. After confirming the internal pressure of compressor
are correct and the seal ring should cover on the electri-
has been released, disassemble all parts connecting
cal wirings without wrinkle. The wirings should be fixed
the compressor, including suction and discharge flang-
on the guard with cable ties.
es, angle valves of main oil pipes. Prepare container to
collect and weight the oil drained from the compressor Note: The water-proof nuts of fan terminal box should be
before unscrewing the return oil pipe connector on the tightened to prevent short circuit from moisture.
bottom.
6. Confirm the fan blades can freely rotate before power
5. Dismantle the terminal box on top of compressor. Re- on for trial running.
move the 3 fixing bolts at the bottom of compressor,
steadily remove the compressor from the base frame 7. Confirm the correct fan rotation after running
with a forklift which should support the weight of the
compressor
Coil Assembly or Single Coil Re-
6. Take samples of the collected oil for analyses. If the oil
has deteriorated, completely drain and weight the oil placement
inside the oil separator and oil pipes. Coil replacement should follow the procedures:
7. Install the new compressor. Reinstall all pipelines, con- 1. Disconnect and lock power supplies.
nections, wires, and screws/bolts. Open the main-ten-
ance (service) valves. 2. Recover the refrigerant.
8. Reassemble the vertical pillar. 3. After the pressure in system has been completely re-
leased, disconnect the gas and liquid connection pipe of
9. Vacuum and recharge the oil and refrigerant after per- the coil.
forming the leak tests.
4. Open the control panel, disconnect the fan power cable
Note: the weight of oil charged = the weight of oil have from the contactor, and remove the fan assembly on the
drained + 0.8kg. coil to be replaced.
10. Power on for trial running. Check the suction and dis- Note 1: For single coil replacement, may not need this
charge pressure of compressor whether within the step.
range of Table 41 after the compressor has stabilized its
operation. Note 2: Record the connection position before discon-
nect.
WARNING !
5. Fix the coil to the lift through lifting holes on the top
Compressor Damage! metal plate of coil. The lifting capacity of each rope must
Incorrect wiring will result in the compressor rotating in exceed the published weight of coil.
reverse and damaging the compressor.
6. Remove the malfunction coil stably and replace with a
new one.
124 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
and fix it.
! WARNING
Heavy Objects! 7. Connect all the pipes to refrigeration system (may need
welding), related connection fittings. And connect all the
Be aware to use proper lifting methods. Incorrect han- electrical or sensor cable.
dling may result in equipment damage, personal injury
or death from failing heavy objects. 8. Check or replace the filter element of the drying filter
according to the method of “Refrigerant Filter Replace-
7. Weld the connecting pipes of new coil, and implement ment Procedure”.
pressure leakage test, then reinstall the metal plates.
9. Leak detection, vacuum extraction and filling of the
WARNING !
refrigerant side.
Brazing Required! 10. Connect water loop pipes and check leaks.
• Only qualified personnel is allowed to undertake 11. After passing steps 1~15 of “Pre-Start Checkout”, the
the work. unit can be started by follow the Unit Start UP Proce-
dure.
• Maintain good ventilation in the jobsite.
• Do not perform electric or flame welding to weld
re-frigerant pipelines and cooling components,
unless the unit is free of any gaseous or liquid re-
frigerant/mixture. The refrigerant will product toxic
fume once contact with flame.
• Must prepare proper protection measures corre-
sponding to the unit. Ensure fire extinguishers are
available if a fire has started.
• Nitrogen purge is required during the brazing.
8. Vacuum and recharge the refrigerant.

9. Power on for trial running. Check the evaporator ap-
proach and condenser approach whether within the
range of Table 41 after the compressor run stably.
Water side heat exchanger re-

placement
For water side heat exchanger replacement, please follow
the following steps:
1. Follow steps 1~6 of the “Coil Assembly or Single Coil
Replacement” , remove the coil group smoothly.
2. Close the cut-off valve in water loop, drain the water
out of the heat exchanger, and dismantle the water loop
connection from inlet and outlet flange of water port on
heat exchanger.
3. Remove the power cable of the electrical heater in the
water chamber and heat exchanger shell. Disconnect
the temperature sensor from the bus.
4. Break the pipes connection with refrigeration system
in two circuits, include: suction pipes, refrigerant inlet
pipes, oil return pipes, etc.
5. Use the spars to lift and move the water side heat ex-
changer smoothly.
6. Hoist the new water-side heat exchanger into the unit
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 125
Drive
Drive
TL390 Series Drive Overview
Originally, TL390 series drive were used for all premium and standard seasonal efficiency units except 440 premium unit and
TL390 series drive overview
all VFD -high temperature units. Now, they have been replaced with CA300 series.
Product
TL390 seriesInformation
drive used for all premium and standard seasonal efficiency units except 440 premium unit and all VFD
-high temperature units.
Designation Rules and Nameplate
Designation Rules and Nameplate
TL390 T 90 G
TL390
Drives series
ID Voltage
T
,' Motor Types
3P 380V
G General
-5T 3P 460V
Identification 90 110 Ă 160 Ă
Motor (kW) 90 110 Ă 160 Ă
5DWLQJ1DPHSODWH
Drive Model MODEL˖ TL390T90G
Rang Input INPUT˖ 3PH AC380V 184A 50/60Hz
Rang Output OUTPUT˖ 3PH AC0-380V 176A 0-300Hz 90kW
Serial Number S/N:
Figure
Figure76.
75.Designation
DesignationRules
Rulesand
andNameplate
Nameplate example
example
Drive
Drive Outline Sizing
Outline Sizing
Outline Sizingfor
Outline Sizing forDrives
Drives90KW-160KW
90KW-160KW
Figure 76. Drive Outline Sizing
126 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Figure 77. Drive Outline Sizing

RTAG-SVX001J-EN 127
Drive
Drive Components Layout
Components Layout for Drive 90KW-160KW
Figure 77. Components Layout for 90KW–160KW
Drive Model Table

Power Input Current Output Current Motor Weight
Model
(kW) (A) (A) (kW) (kg)
TL390T90G 90 184 176 90 104
TL390T110G 110 221 212 110 107
TL390T132G 132 270 260 132 113
TL390T160G 160 328 315 160 115.5
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 127
Drive
Mechanical and Electrical Installation Lifting

TRANE Drive has four mounting holes for lifting lugs (M8 for
Mechanical Installation 90-160kW). During lifting, mount the lifting lugs into mounting
hole.It is highly recommended to lift perpendicular to bottom
Installation Environment Requirements mounting face with four lifting lugs tied with lifting rope.For
Item Requirements detailed lifting lugs’ mounting locations, refer to Figure 79.
Ambient -10oC to 52oC
temperature
Heat dissipa- Install the AC drive on the surface of an incombustible object,
tion and ensure that there is sufficient space around for heat dissi-
pation.
Install the AC drive vertically on the support using screws.
Mounting Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
location Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6 g
Far away from the punching machine or the like
Protective The TL390 series AC drive of plastic housing is a built-in
enclosure product and needs to be installed in the final system. Only
the operation panel exposes on the final cover for the user to
perform operations. The final system must have the required
fireproof cover, electrical protective cover and mechanical
protective cover, and satisfy the regional laws & regulations
and related IEC requirements.
Installation Clearance Requirements

The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the
power class of the TL390, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 79. Lifting Locations for 90–160kW Drive
Wiring for Power Terminals

Power Terminals of Three Phase Drive Main Loop please
refer to Table 45
Table 45. Power Terminals of Drive Main Loop

Terminals Terminals Name Purpose
Marking
R,S,T Three Phase AC Power Connection to Three Phase AC
Input Power Input
P(+) Terminals for External Connection to External Reactor
Reactor
U,V,W Drive Output Terminals Connection to Three Phase
Motor
PE Connection to Ground
* Only applied for drive between 110kW~200kW
Power terminals on TRANE drive have corresponding markings

shown by Figure 80. Customers could use Cable or Copper bar for
connection to Power terminals based on differentapplications needs.
For 90-160kW: M12x30 screws for R/S/T and U/V/W terminals, and
M8x20 screws for PE terminals is suggested.
Figure 78. Clearance around of 90–160kW
128 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
LOCAL/REMOT: OFF Operation panel control
LOCAL/REMOT: ON Terminal control
LOCAL/REMOT: blinking Communication control
● FWD/REV
ON indicates reverse rotation, and OFF indicates forward
rotation.
● TUNE/TC
When the indicator is ON, it indicates torque control
mode. When the indicator is blinking slowly, it indicates
the auto-tuning state. When the indicator is blinking
quickly, it indicates the fault state.
● Unit Indicators
means that the indicator is ON, and means that the
indicator is OFF.
Hz: unit of frequency

A: unit of current
V: unit of voltage
Figure 80. Power terminals for 90-160kW
RPM: unit of motor speed
Operation and Display %: percentage

● Digital Display
Operation Panel The 5-digit LED display is able to display the frequency
You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status reference, output frequency, monitoring data and fault
and start or stop the TL390 by operating the operation panel, codes
as shown in the following figure.
Function Codes
Structure of Function Codes

TL390 has three groups for function code, they are F group,
A group, U group.
Table 46. function codes description

Code Group Code Name Description
F0 ~ FP General Code Basic parameter setting for VFD and
motor
A0 ~ AC Extend Code Multi motor data,AI/AO calibration,Opti-
mal control,PLC card,extension function
U0 ~ U3 Status Code Show the status of running
In the function code display state, select the required func-

tion code by pressing the key ,as shown in the following
figure:
Figure 81. Diagram of the operation panel
Description of Indicators
● RUN
ON indicates that the AC drive is in the running state, and
OFF indicates that the AC drive is in the stop state.
● LOCAL/REMOT
It indicates whether the AC drive is operated by means of
operation panel, terminals or communication.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 129
Drive
Fans Replacement
Possible Failure Cause: Bearing Wear or Leaf Aging,
Diagnosis Criteria: Crack on Fan Leaf or Abnormal sound
when drive starts up.
Fan Replacement Steps for 90KW—160KW

1. Remove air duct cover plate of fans (All nine M6
screws),
Figure 82. Function code operation
Maintenance Figure 83. Remove air duct cover plate of fans

Tool and Torques 2. Remove Power wiring of Fan (Ellipse shown in Fig-
ure 84),
The Screw drivers for M4 ~ M6 screws
3. Remove M4 Fastening screws for fans (Circle shown in
The sleeve and the wrench for M8 ~ M12 screws Figure 84),
Torques for fastening piece: 4. Take fans out.
Fastening Torques unit(N.M)
5. Install new fans; reconnect the power wires and install
Steel Screw Grade
Screw Types
4.8 8.8 12.9
air duct cover plate of fans according to the sequence
M3 0.55 1.25 2.15 from steps 4 to step 1.
M4 1.2 2.9 4.95
M5 2.5 5.5 9.5
M6 4 9.5 16.5
M8 10.5 20 40
M10 20 45 80
M12 35 80 140
Figure 84. Remove Power Wires and Fans
130 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Electrolytic Capacitors Replacement Middle loop of TRANE drive utilizes multiple electrolytic
capacitors whose life depends on drive load and ambi¬ent
Possible failure cause: temperature. Capacitors’ life could be prolonged by decreas-
ing ambient temperature.
● Bad input power supply quality
Capacitor failure could be predicted. In general, capacitor
● High ambient temperature
failure comes from main circuit fuse blows or breakdown trip-
● Frequent load changes ping. Don’t replace capacitors by yourself and please contact
TRANE service if capacitors have to be replaced
● Electrolyte aging
Diagnosis Criteria: Safety Information and Precautions

● Liquid leakage Read this chapter carefully so that you have a thorough
understanding, and perform all operations such as installa-
● Safe Valve protrusion
tion, commissioning or maintenance by following the notices
● Electrostatic capacity determination in this chapter. Trane will assume no liability or responsibility
for any injury or loss caused by improper operation.
● Insulation resistance determination
Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

! • Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage, component missing or damage upon unpacking.
Before DANGER • Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not conform to the product you received.
installation • Handle the equipment with care during transportation to prevent damage to the equipment.
!
• Do not use the equipment with any damaged or missing component. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.
WARNING • Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to comply may result in static electricity damage.
• Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure
!
to comply may result in a fire.
DANGER • Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially the screws with red mark.
During
• Do not drop wire end or screw into the equipment. Failure to comply will result in equipment damage.
installation
! • Install the AC drive in places free of vibration and direct sunlight.
WARNING • When two AC drives are laid in the same cabinet, arrange the installation positions properly to ensure the cooling
effect.
• Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply
may result in unexpected accidents.
!
• A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the equipment. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
DANGER • Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
• Ground the equipment properly according to the requirements. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
At wiring • Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the AC drive. Pay attention to the marks of the
wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply will result in equipment damage.
! • Never connect the braking resistor between the (+) and (-) terminals of the DC bus. Failure to comply may result in
WARNING a fire.
• Use cables with dimensions recommended in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Use a shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the shield is reliably grounded.
• Check that the following requirements are met:
• The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the AC drive.
• The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected.
! • No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
DANGER • The wiring is secured.
Before power-on • Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
• Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the AC drive because such test has been done in the
factory. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
• Cover the AC drive properly before power-on to prevent electric shock.
!
• All peripheral devices must be connected properly under the instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply
WARNING may result in accidents
! • Do not open the cover after power-on. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
DANGER • Do not touch any I/O terminal of the AC drive. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
After power-on • P revent personal injury during motor rotation if motor auto-tuning is required. Failure to comply may result in acci-
!
dents.
WARNING • Do not change the factory parameters of the AC drive to prevent equipment damage.
• Signal detection during running must be performed only by qualified personnel. Failure to comply may result in
!
personal injury or equipment damage.
DANGER • Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature. Otherwise, you may get burnt
During operation
• Prevent dropping objects into the AC drive during drive running. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage.
!
• Do not start or stop the AC drive by turning on or off the contactor. Failure to comply will result in equipment dam-
WARNING age.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 131
Drive
Use Stage Safety Grade Precautions

• R epair or maintenance of the AC drive may be performed only by qualified personnel. Failure to comply may result
in personal injury or equipment damage.
• Do not repair or maintain the AC drive at power-on. Failure to comply will result in electric shock.
! • Repair or maintain the AC drive at least ten minutes after the AC drive is powered off. This allows for the residual
During DANGER voltage in the capacitor to discharge to a safe value. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
• Ensure that the AC drive is disconnected from all power supplies before starting the repair or maintenance work.
maintenance
• All the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only after power-off.
• Set and check the parameters again after the AC drive is replaced.
• The rotating motor generally feeds back power to the AC drive. As a result, the AC drive is still energized, even if
!
the motor stops, and the power supply is cut off. Thus ensure that the AC drive is completely disconnected from the
WARNING motor before starting the repair or maintenance work.
Common Faults and Solutions

Table 47. Solution to the faults of the TL390
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Inverter unit Err01 1. The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 1. Eliminate external faults.
protection 2. The cable between the motor and the AC drive is too 2. Install a reactor or an output filter.
long. 3. Check that the air filter and the cooling fan work properly.
3. The module overheats. 4. Connect all cables properly.
4. The internal connections become loose. 5. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
5. The main control board is faulty.
6.The drive board is faulty.
7. The inverter module is faulty.
Overcurrent during Err02 1. The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 1. Eliminate external faults.
acceleration 2. Motor auto-tuning is not performed. 2. Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3. The acceleration time is too short. 3. Increase the acceleration time.
4. Customized torque boost or V/F curve is not appropri- 4. Adjust the manual torque boost or V/F curve.
ate. 5. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
5. The voltage is too low. 6. E
nable the catching a spinning motor funcion or start the motor
6. The motor is started during rotating. after it stops.
7. A sudden load is added during acceleration. 7. Remove the added load.
8. The AC drive size is small. 8. Replace a large drive.
Overcurrent during Err03 1. The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 1. Eliminate external faults.
deceleration 2. Motor auto-tuning is not performed 2. Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3. The deceleration time is too short. 3. Increase the deceleration time.
4. The voltage is too low. 4. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
5. A sudden load is added during deceleration. 5. Remove the added load.
6. The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed. 6. Install the braking unit and braking resistor.
Overcurrent at Err04 1. The output circuit is grounded or short circuited. 1. Eliminate external faults.
constant speed 2. Motor auto-tuning is not performed. 2. Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3. The voltage is too low. 3. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
4. A sudden load is added during operation. 4. Remove the added load.
Overvoltage during Err05 1. The input voltage is too high. 1. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
acceleration 2. An external force drives the motor during acceleration. 2. Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor.
3. The acceleration time is too short. 3. Increase the acceleration time.
Overvoltage during Err06 1. The input voltage is too high. 1. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
deceleration 2. An external force drives the motor during deceleration. 2. Cancel the external force or install the braking resistor.
3. The deceleration time is too short. 3. Increase the deceleration time.
Overvoltage at Err07 1. The input voltage is too high. 1. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
constant speed 2. An external force drives the motor during deceleration. 2. Cancel the external force or install the braking resistor.
Control power Err08 The input voltage is not within the allowable range. Adjust the input voltage to the allowable range.
supply fault
Undervoltage Err09 1. Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power 1. Reset the fault.
supply. 2. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
2. The AC drive’s input voltage is not within the allowable 3. Contact the agent or Inovance.
range.
3. The bus voltage is abnormal.
4. The rectifier bridge and buffer resistor are faulty.
5. The drive board is faulty
AC drive overload Err10 1. The load is too heavy or locked-rotor occurs on the 1. Reduce the load and check the motor and mechanical conditions.
motor. 2. Replace a large drive.
2. The AC drive size is small.
132 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Motor overload Err11 1. F9-01 is set improperly. 1. Set F9-01 correctly.
2. The load is too heavy or motor standstill occurs. 2. Reduce the load and check the motor and mechanical conditions.
Power input phase Err12 1. The three-phase power input is abnormal. 1. Eliminate external faults.
loss 2. The drive board is faulty. 2. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
3. The lightening protection board is faulty.
Power output Err13 1. The cable connecting the AC drive and the motor is 1. Eliminate external faults.
phase loss faulty. 2. Check whether the motor three-phase winding is normal.
2. The AC drive’s three-phase outputs are unbalanced 3. Contact the agent or Inovance.
when the motor is running.
3. The drive board is faulty
4. The module is faulty.
Module overheat Err14 1. The ambient temperature is too high. 1. Lower the ambient temperature.
2. The air filter is blocked. 2. Clean the air filter.
3. The fan is damaged. 3. Replace the damaged fan.
4. The thermally sensitive resistor of the module is dam- 4. Replace the damaged thermally sensitive resistor.
aged. 5. Replace the inverter module.
5. The inverter module is damaged.
External equipment Err15 1. External fault signal is input via DI. Reset the operation.
fault 2. External fault signal is input via virtual I/O.
Communication Err16 1. The host computer is in abnormal state. 1. Check the cabling of host computer.
fault 2. The communication cable is faulty. 2. Check the communication cabling.
3. F0-28 is set improperly. 3. Set F0-28 correctly.
4. The communication parameters in group FD are set 4. Set the communication parameters properly.
improperly.
Contactor fault Err17 1. The drive board and power supply are faulty. 1. Replace the faulty drive board or power supply board.
2. The contactor is faulty. 2. Replace the faulty contactor.
Current detection Err18 1. The HALL device is faulty. 1. Replace the faulty HALL device.
fault 2. The drive board is faulty. 2. Replace the faulty drive board.
Motor auto-tuning Err19 1. The motor parameters are not set according to the 1. Set the motor parameters according to the nameplate properly.
fault nameplate. 2. Check the cable connecting the AC drive and the motor.
2. The motor auto-tuning times out.
Encoder fault Err20 1. The encoder type is incorrect. 1. Set the encoder type correctly based on the actual situation.
2. The cable connection of the encoder is incorrect. 2. Eliminate external faults.
3. The encoder is damaged. 3. Replace the damaged encoder.
4. The PG card is faulty. 4. Replace the faulty PG card.
EEPROM read- Err21 1. The EEPROM chip is damaged. 1. Replace the main control board.
write fault
AC drive hardware Err22 1. Overvoltage exists. 1. Handle based on overvoltage.
fault 2. Overcurrent exists. 2. Handle based on overcurrent.
Short circuit to Err23 The motor is short circuited to the ground. Replace the cable or motor.
ground
Accumulative Err26 The accumulative running time reaches the setting value. Clear the record through the parameter initialization function.
running time
reached
User-defined fault Err27 1. The user-defined fault 1 signal is input via DI. Reset the operation.
1 2. User-defined fault 1 signal is input via virtual I/O.
User-defined fault Err28 1. The user-defined fault 2 signal is input via DI. Reset the operation.
2 2. The user-defined fault 2 signal is input via virtual I/O.
Accumulative Err29 The accumulative power-on time reaches the setting Clear the record through the parameter initialization function.
power-on time value.
reached
Load lost Err30 The AC drive running current is lower than F9-64. Check that the load is disconnected or the setting of F9-64 and F9-
65 is correct.
PID feedback lost Err31 The PID feedback is lower than the setting of FA-26. Check the PID feedback signal or set FA-26 to a proper value.
during running
Pulse-by-pulse Err40 1. The load is too heavy or motor standstill occurs. 1. Reduce the load and check the motor and the machine.
current limit fault 2. The AC drive size is small. 2. Replace a large drive.
Motor switchover Err41 Change the selection of the motor via terminal during Perform motor switchover after the AC drive stops.
fault during running running of the AC drive.
Speed feedback Err42 1. The encoder parameters are set incorrectly. 1. Set the encoder parameters properly.
error too large 2. The motor auto-tuning is not performed. 2. Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3. F9-69 and F9-70 are set incorrectly. 3. Set F9-69 and F9-70 correctly based on the actual situation.
Motor over-speed Err43 1. The encoder parameters are set incorrectly. 1. Set the encoder parameters properly.
2. The motor auto-tuning is not performed. 2. Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3. F9-69 and F9-70 are set incorrectly. 3. Set F9-69 and F9-70 correctly based on the actual situation.
Motor overheat Err45 1. The cabling of the temperature sensor becomes loose. 1. C
heck the temperature sensor cabling and eliminate the cabling
2. The motor temperature is too high. fault.
2. L
ower the carrier frequency or adopt other heat radiation mea-
sures.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 133
Drive
Initial position fault Err51 The motor parameters are not set based on the actual Check whether the motor parameters are set correctly and whether
situation. the setting of rated current is too small.
Filter Over Err61 1. Bad contact from Filter output terminals to Drive Input 1. Check wiring and terminals from Filter output to drive input;
Temperature Terminals (DI1 & COM) 2. Check root cause of over load;
2. Filter over load 3. Trane to contact Filter vendor to check reason why over tempera-
3. Filter over temperature function abnormal ture function abnormal.
4. Filter Fan can’t provide enough air volume 4. Clean Fans to keep enough air volume.
HPC Err62 1. Bad contact from emergency switch to STO Terminals; 1.Check wiring and terminals from ST;
2. STO board abnormal. 2.Check STO board.
DC BUS Hall Err63 1. Bad contact from BUS current sensor to Drive Input 1. C heck wiring and terminals from BUS current sensor to Drive
sensor fault Terminals(AI2 & GND); Input Terminals(AI2 & GND);
2. BUS current sensor abnormal. 2. Check BUS current sensor.
Common Faults and Solutions

You may come across the following symptoms during the use of the AC drive. Refer to the following table for simple analysis.
Table 48. Common Faults and Solutions

SN Symptom Possible Causes Solutions
1 There is no display at power- 1. There is no power supply to the AC drive or the power 1. Check the power supply.
on. input to the AC drive is too low. 2. Check the bus voltage.
2. The power supply of the switch on the drive board of the 3. Re-connect the 8-core and 28-core cables.
AC drive is faulty. 4. C
heck the contact from DC reactor to BUS capacitors and
3. The rectifier bridge is damaged. Check the DC reactor.
4. DC Reactor abnormal. 5~6 Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
5. The control board or the operation panel is faulty.
6. The cable connecting the control board and the drive
board and the operation panel breaks.
2 “HC” is displayed at power- 1. The cable between the drive board and the control 1. Re-connect the 8-core and 28-core cables.
on. board is in poor contact. 2. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
2. Related components on the control board are damaged.
3. The motor or the motor cable is short circuited to the
ground.
4. The HALL device is faulty.
5. The power input to the AC drive is too low.
3 “Err23” is displayed at power- 1. The motor or the motor output cable is short-circuited to 1. Check insulation status of the motor and the output cable with
on. the ground. a megger.
2. The AC drive is damaged. 2. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
4 The AC drive display is normal 1. The cooling fan is damaged or locked-rotor occurs. 1. Replace the damaged fan.
upon power-on. But after 2. The external control terminal cable is short circuited. 2. Eliminate external fault.
running the AC drive displays
“HC” and stops immediately.
5 Err14 (module overheat) is 1. The setting of carrier frequency is too high. 1. Reduce the carrier frequency (F0-15).
reported frequently. 2. The cooling fan is damaged, or the air filter is blocked. 2. Replace the fan and clean the air filter.
3. Components inside the AC drive are damaged (thermal 3. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
coupler or others).
6 The motor does not rotate 1. Check the motor and the motor cables. 1. C
heck that cabling between the AC drive and the motor is
after the AC drive runs. 2. The motor parameters are set improperly. normal.
3. The cable between the drive board and the control 2. Replace the motor or rectify mechanical faults.
board is in poor contact. 3. Check and set the motor parameters again.
4. The drive board is faulty.
7 The DI terminals are disabled. 1. The related parameters are set incorrectly. 1. Check and set the parameters in group F4 again.
2. The external signal is incorrect. 2. Re-connect the external signal cables.
3. The jumper across OP and +24 V becomes loose. 3. Re-confirm the jumper bar across OP and +24 V.
4. The control board is faulty. 4. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
8 The motor speed is always 1. The encoder is faulty. 1. Replace the encoder and ensure the cabling is proper.
low in CLVC mode. 2. The encoder cable is connected incorrectly or in poor 2. Replace the PG card.
contact. 3. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
3. The PG card is faulty.
4. The drive board is faulty.
9 The AC drive reports 1. The motor parameters are set improperly. 1. Set the motor parameters or perform motor auto-tuning again.
overcurrent and overvoltage 2. The acceleration/deceleration time is improper. 2. Set proper acceleration/deceleration time.
frequently. 3. The load fluctuates. 3. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
10 Err17 is reported upon power- The soft startup contactor is not closed. 1. Check whether the contactor cable is loose.
on or running. 2. Check whether the contactor is faulty.
3. Check whether 24 V power supply of the contactor is faulty.
4. Contact the agent or Inovance for technical support.
11 is displayed upon power-on. Related component on the control board is damaged. Replace the control board.
12 HPC fault Emergency switch is not reset Reset the emergency switch.
134 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
CA300 Series Overview
Product Information
Nameplate And Model Description
CA300 - 4T 160 - TL
TL Trane
- Default
Mark 75 90 … 220
Application Motor (kW) 75 90 … 220
Voltage Class Three phase 380 to 480V
AC Drive Series
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 135
Drive
Description of Parts
Figure 85. AC drive components (75 to 160kW)
Figure 86. AC drive components (200 to 220kW)
136 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Technical Specifications
Table 49. Product models and electrical parameters
Power Capacity Input Current Output Current Motor

Model
(kVA) (A) (A) (kW)
CA300-4T75 131 136 150 75
CA300-4T90 153 162 177 90
CA300-4T110 181 194 212 110
CA300-4T132 219 238 260 132
CA300-4T160 270 291 315 160
CA300-4T200 328 365 395 200
CA300-4T220 375 394 426 220
Table 50. Technical specifications
Item Description
Output frequency 0 Hz to 500 Hz
Carrier frequency 2 kHz to 8 kHz, automatically adjusted with the load
• Digital setting: 0.01 Hz
Input frequency resolution
• Analog setting: Maximum frequency x 0.025%
• SVC
Control mode
• V/F
Overload capability 110% of rated current for 60s
• Auto boost
Torque boost
• Customized boost 0.1 % to 30.0 %
• Straight-line V/F curve
• Multi-point V/F curve
V/F curve • Square V/F curve
• Complete V/F separation
• Half V/F separation
• Straight-line ramp
Ramp mode • S-curve ramp
Standard functions • Four separate acceleration/deceleration time settings in the range of 0.0s to 6500.0s
Frequency range of jog running: 0.00 Hz to 50.00 Hz
Jog running
Acceleration/Deceleration time of jog running: 0.0s to 6500.0s
Onboard multiple preset speeds The system implements up to eight speeds by using controlterminals.
The system implements the proportional-integral-derivative (PID) function in the closed-loop
Onboard PID
control.
The system maintains a constant output voltage automatically when the grid voltage changes
Automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
through the permissible range.
The system limits the output current and voltage automatically during operation to prevent
Overvoltage and overcurrent stall control
frequent or excessive trips.
Overcurrent fast prevention The system minimizes overcurrent faults to ensure normal drive operation.
Load feedback energy compensates for any voltage reduction, allowing the drive to continue
Power dip ride-through to operate for a short time during power dips. The RUN indicator on the operating panel blinks
after power dip ride-through is enabled.
Overcurrent fast prevention This function helps to avoid frequent overcurrent faults.
Timing control Time range: 0.0 minutes to 6500.0 minutes
Communication bus Modbus is supported.
LED display ws parameters.
Keys on the control panel can be locked or partially locked electronically to prevent
Keypad &
accidental operation.
display(format) Key locking and function selection
The range of some functions can be limited to a permitted range to prevent incorrect
settings.
Motor short-circuit detection upon power-on, input/output phase loss protection, overcurrent
Protection - protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, overheat protection, and overload
protection.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 137
Drive
Item Description
Allows different methods of switching between command sources:
• Operating panel (keypad & display)
Command source
• Terminal I/O control
• Serial communication
Supports up to 10 frequency reference setting channels and allows different methods of
switching between frequency reference setting channels:
Main frequency reference setting • Digital setting
• Analog voltage reference
channel • Analog current reference
• Pulse reference
• Communication reference
Running
Supports up to 10 auxiliary frequency sources, and allows fine tuning of the auxiliary frequency
Auxiliary frequency reference
and main & auxiliary calculation.
• Seven DI terminals with 100 Hz maximum input frequency
Input terminals • Three AI terminals that support 0 V to 10 V/0 mA to 20 mA
• input and PT100 input
• Four DO terminals
• Three relay output terminals, one of which has NO and NC
Output terminals • contacts and the other two have NO terminals
• Three AO terminals that support 0 mA to 20 mA current
• output or 0 V to 10 V voltage output
Communication terminal One RS485 communication terminal
• Below 1500 m
• The AC drive runs properly when the altitude is below 1500 m. If the altitude exceeds 1500 m,
Altitude
de-rate the AC drive by 1% with increase of every 100 m.
• Max. 3000 m for LVD directive requirement.
• -20°C to +55°C
Environment Operation temperature
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, de-rate the drive by 1% with increase of every 1°C.
Humidity Less than 95% RH non-condensing.
Vibration 2 g for boards, conformance to transport standards.
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C
IP rating IP20/IP22
Mains Applicable mains TN or TT
138 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Outline Dimensions
Figure 87. Outline dimensions (75 to 160kW)
Figure 88. Outline dimensions (200 to 220kW)
Mounting Hole Mounting

Dimensions (mm) Weight
Model (mm) Diameter d
(kg)
A B W W1 H H1 D (mm)
CA300-4T75
CA300-4T90
CA300-4T110 415 433.6 383 445 550 581.5 320 10 42
CA300-4T132
CA300-4T160
CA300-4T200
594 600 550 630 700 745 320 12 89
CA300-4T220
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 139
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Drive
Wiring
2.2 Wiring
Standard Wiring
2.2.1 Standard Wiring
DC reactor
R (+)1 (+)2
U
Three-phase
S
AC current V M
T CA300
W
J9 J10
OP OP +24V COM
OP CME External keypad
+24V J7
COM interface
DI 1 DI1 J3
I V AO1
DI 2 DI2 J4 AO2
I V AO
J5 AO3 0 to 10 V/0 to 20 mA
DI 3 DI3 I V
GND
DI 4 DI4 COM
DI 5 DI5 CME
DO1
DI 6 DI6
DI 7 DI7 DO2
Multifunctional open
COM
collector output
DO3 0 to 24 V/0 to 50 mA
+10 V Frequency reference power

3 +10 V/10 mA
2 0 to 10 V DC DO4
1 to 5 kΩ AI1 AI 1
1 0 to 10 V DC/
0 to 20 mA J1
AI2 AI 2
0 to 10 V DC/ I V CME
0 to 20 mA J2
AI3 AI 3
I V
GND
T/C1
PE
T/B1
COM T/A1
T/C2 Fault output

250 V AC, above 10 mA, below 3 A
30 V DC, above 10 mA, below 1 A
485+ T/A2
RS485
485- T/C3
communi
cation
CGND T/A3
● To avoid accidental operation resulting from noise interference, separate the signal cable
Caution and power cable by more than 10 cm, and configure the input and output of the main circuit
separately.
! CAUTION
• To avoid accidental operation
● Doresulting
not drop anyfrom
cablenoise
cuttingsinterference,
into the AC driveseparate
during the the signal
wiring cable
process. and
Failure power cable by
to comply
may result in errors, faults, and accidental operation.
more than 10 cm, and configure the input and output of the main circuit separately.
• ● Keepinto
Do not drop any cable cuttings the AC
thedrive
ACclean.
drivePrevent
during cuttings and dust
the wiring from entering
process. the AC
Failure todrive when drilling
comply may result in er-
mounting holes
rors, faults, and accidental operation. on the control cabinet and other devices.
- 10 -
• Keep the AC drive clean. Prevent cuttings and dust from entering the AC drive when drilling mounting holes on
the control cabinet and other devices.
140 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Main Circuit Terminals
Type Mark Name Function

R, S, and T Three-phase power input Connected to the mains supply
U, V, and W AC drive output Connected to the motor
Main Circuit
(+1) and (+2) AC reactor connection Connected to the DC reactor
Grounding terminal Grounding
Control Circuit Terminals
Internal power supply for the STO board
STO1+ and STO2+ are connected by NC contacts to the positive pole of the 24 V power supply. STO1- and STO2- are direct-
ly connected to the negative pole. When contacts are closed, the AC drive runs properly with 24 V input. When contacts are
open, the AC drive executes an emergency stop.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 141
Chapter 3 Display and Commissioning
Chapter
Drive
3 Display and Commissioning
Panel Operation
Introduction
3.1 Operating Panel
Using the operating panel, you can set and modify parameters, monitor working status, and perform running control (start/stop)
of the AC drive. You can also equip an external panel using the option LED operating panel (MD32NKE1) or LCD operating
The LED operating
panel panel allows you to monitor system operation, modify parameters and start or stop the AC drive.
(MDKE9).
Figure 3-1 Details of the operating panel
Command source Running direction

indicator indicator
Tuning/
Running status Torque control/
indicator RUN LOCAL/ REMOT FED/ REV TUNE/TC Fault indicator
LED display for

parameters Parameter unit
indicator
Hz A V
RPM %
Increment key
Program key
PRG ENTER Confirm key
Menu mode Shift key

QUICK
selection key
Decrement key
STOP
Run key RUN MF.K Stop/Reset key
RES
Multi-function
selection key
Figure
--ON; 89. Details
--OFF;of the operating panel
--FLASHING
RUN LOCAL/ REMOT
LED status onRUN
Keysindicators
LED operating Panel
at the top of the operating panel.
Function of keys on the LED operating panel
Indicator Status Description Indicator Status Description
Key Key Name Function
RUN
Programming Used to enter or exit the level-1 menu. OFF : forward
OFF: STOP status FWD/REV
RUN
Confirm FED/REV
Used to enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the parameter setting.
motor rotation
Running
Running direction
status Increment Used to increase the displayed data or parameter number. ON : reverse
ON : RUNNING status indicator
indicator RUN motor rotation
Decrement Used to decrease the displayed data or parameter number. FED/REV
Used to select the displayed parameters
Hz in turn in the stop or running
A state and select the
V digit to be modified
Shift OFF: under operating panel Frequency unit
during parameter modification.
RPM % Hz
LOCAL/ LOCAL/ REMOT control
RUN Used to start the AC drive in the operating panel control mode.
REMOT Hz A V
Stop/Reset Used to stop the AC drive when it is in the running status or reset the AC drive when it is in the faulty status.
ON : under terminal control RPM % Current unit A
Command LOCAL/ REMOT
Multifunction Used to switch over between functions.
source
Used to switch over between menu Hz modes as defined by the
A setting of FP-03 (Selection of individualized
indicator FLASHING
Menu mode selection : under serial V
parameter display). By default, one menu mode is set. Voltage unit V
RPM %
LOCAL/ REMOT communication control
Hz A V Speed unit
142 OFF: normal running RPM % RTAG-SVX001K-EN
TUNE/TC RMP
TUNE/TC Hz A V
ON: torque control mode RPM % Percentage %
Tuning/ TUNE/TC
Torque
FLASHING SLOWLY:
Drive
Function Indicators
Indicates the light turns on, indicate the light turns off, and indicate the lignt flashes.
Table 51. Indicators on the operating panel
Indicator Status Description
OFF: STOP status

RUN RUN
Running status indicator
ON : RUNNING status
RUN
OFF: under operating panel control

LOCAL/ REMOT
LOCAL/ REMOT
ON : under terminal control
Command source indicator LOCAL/ REMOT
FLASHING : under serial communication control

LOCAL/ REMOT
OFF: normal running

TUNE/TC
ON: torque control mode

TUNE/TC TUNE/TC
Tuning/ Torque control/ Fault indicator

FLASHING SLOWLY: indicates auto-tuning status (once a second)
TUNE/TC
FLASHING QUICKLY: indicates a fault condition (four times a second)

TUNE/TC
OFF : forward motor rotation

FWD/REV FED/REV
Running direction indicator
ON : reverse motor rotation
FED/REV
Frequency unit : Hz
Current unit : A
Voltage unit : V
Speed unit : RPM
Percentage %
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 143
Drive
Trouble Shooting
Fault Display and Reset

Faults are handled prior to alarms.
● Example of fault code displayed:

● Example of alarm code displayed:
When a fault occurs during running, the AC drive stops output immediately, the fault indicator flashes, and contact of the
faulty relay acts. The following table lists faults and solutions for reference. Perform troubleshooting according to the descrip-
tions and do not repair or modify the AC drive randomly. If the fault cannot be rectified, contact us or the agent.
Stage Solution Remarks
Check operating panel for detailed information of recent three faults, View this information via F9-14 to F9-46.
After the fault such as fault type and frequency, current, bus voltage, DI/DO state,
occurs accumulative power-on time and accumulative running time, IGBT
temperature, and fault subcode at occurrence of the faults.
Before the fault is Find and remove cause of the fault. Then follow steps below to reset Troubleshoot the fault according to section "Symptoms and
reset the fault. Diagnostics".
Fault resetting through a DI terminal
Allocate a DI terminal with function 9 "Fault reset (RESET)" by setting

any of F4-00 to F4-04 to 9.
Fault resetting via operating panel
Press the STOP key on operating panel.
Fault resetting
method
Automatic resetting
Disconnect the power supply. Until the fault code disappears, connect
the power supply again.
Fault resetting via host computer
Confirm that F0-02 = 2 and write "7" (fault reset) to communication

address 2000H.
144 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Symptoms And Diagnostics
You may come across the following symptoms during the use of the AC drive. Refer to the following table for simple analysis.
Table 52. Symptoms and diagnostics
No. Fault Description Cause Possible Solution

The mains voltage is not input or too low. Check the power supply.
There is no display while The switching power supply on drive board of the AC drive is
power-on. Check bus voltage.
1 faulty.
Control board or operating panel is faulty.
Contact us or the agent.
Rectifier module is damaged.
Related components on control board are damaged.
“HC” is displayed while power-
on. The motor or motor cable is short circuited to ground.
2 Contact us or the agent
The hall is damaged.
The mains voltage is too low.
“E23.00” is displayed at power- Use a megger to measure insulation resistance of
Motor or motor output cable is short circuited to ground.
on. motor and motor cable.
3
The AC drive is damaged. Contact us or the agent
The display is normal while The cooling fan is damaged or locked-rotor occurs. Replace the fan.
power-on. But after running,
“HC” is displayed and the drive
4 stops immediately.
Short circuit exists in wiring of control terminals. Eliminate short circuit fault in control circuit wiring.
E14.00 (IGBT overheat) is The setting of carrier frequency is too high. Reduce carrier frequency (F0-15).
detected frequently. The cooling fan is damaged, or ventilation is clogged. Replace the fan or clean the ventilation.
5
Components inside the AC drive are damaged (thermistor or
Contact us or the agent
others).
Check that wiring between AC drive and motor is
It is motor or motor cable problem.
normal.
Restore the factory parameters and re-set the
following parameters properly:
Motor ratings, such as rated motor frequency and
The motor does not rotate after
6 rated motor speed
the AC drive runs. Related AC drive and motor parameters are set improperly.
Motor 1 control mode (F0-01) and command source
selection (F0-02)
F3-01 (torque boost) in V/F control under heavy-
load start.
The drive board is faulty. Contact us or the agent
Related parameters are set incorrectly. Check and set parameters in group F4 again.
External signals are incorrect. Re-connect external signal cables.
7 DI terminals are disabled.
Jumper across OP and +24 V becomes loose. Re-confirm the jumper bar across OP and +24 V.
The control board is faulty. Contact us or the agent
Set motor parameters or perform motor auto-tuning
The AC drive detects Motor parameters are set improperly.
again.
8 overcurrent and overvoltage
Acceleration/Deceleration time is improper. Set proper acceleration/deceleration time.
frequently.
Load fluctuates. Contact us or the agent
The motor coasts to stop or
braking is disabled during If braking resistance is configured, disable voltage
9 Voltage limit is enabled.
deceleration or deceleration to limit (F3-23 = 0).
stop.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 145
Drive
Faults And Diagnostics
Table 53. Faults and diagnostics
Operating Panel
Fault Name Cause Possible Solution
Display
Check whether the main circuit is powered on.
The AC drive has abnormal current sampling.
Check whether the hall sensor or current sampling circuit is damaged.
Hardware fault If yes, contact us or the agent.
The contactor is faulty. Check the contactor.
Check that the braking resistor is normal and its model matches the
The braking resistor is short- circuited.
AC drive model.
Check whether short circuit occurs on the motor, motor cable or
Ground fault or short circuit exists in the output circuit.
contactor.
Control mode is SVC but motor auto-tuning is not Set motor parameters according to motor nameplate and perform
performed. motor auto-tuning.
Acceleration time is too short. Increase acceleration time.
Ensure that current limit is enabled (F3-19 = 1).
The setting of current limit level (F3-18) is too large. Adjust it between
Overcurrent The overcurrent stall prevention parameters are set
110% and 140%.
during improperly.
The setting of current limit gain (F3-20) is too small. Adjust it between
acceleration 5 and 20.
Customized torque boost or V/F curve is not
Adjust the customized torque boost or V/F curve.
appropriate.
Enable the catching a spinning motor function or start the motor after it
The spinning motor is started.
stops.
View historical fault records. If the current value is far from the
The AC drive suffers external interference. overcurrent level, find interference source. If external interference
does not exist, it is the drive board or hall device problem.
contactor.
Deceleration time is too short. Increase deceleration time.
Overcurrent
during The overcurrent stall prevention parameters are set
110% and 140%.
deceleration improperly.
5 and 20.
Braking unit and braking resistor are not installed. Install braking unit and braking resistor.
contactor.
The overcurrent stall prevention parameters are set
110% and 140%.
Overcurrent at improperly.
constant speed
5 and 20.
If output current exceeds rated motor current or rated output current
The AC drive power class is small. of the AC drive during stable running, replace a drive of larger power
class.
146 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Operating Panel
Display
Input voltage is too high. Adjust input voltage to normal range.
Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor.
An external force drives motor during acceleration. The setting of frequency rise threshold during voltage limit (F3-26) is
too small. Adjust it between 5 Hz and 15 Hz.
Overvoltage Ensure that the voltage limit function is enabled (F3-23 = 1).
during The setting of voltage limit (F3-22) is too large. Adjust it between 700
The overvoltage stall prevention parameters are set
acceleration V and 770 V.
improperly.
The setting of frequency gain for voltage limit (F324) is too small.
Adjust it between 30 and 50.
Acceleration time is too short. Increase acceleration time.

Ensure that the voltage limit function is enabled (F3-23 = 1).
The setting of voltage limit (F3-22) is too large. Adjust it between 700
V and 770 V.
improperly.
The setting of frequency gain for voltage limit (F324) is too small.
Overvoltage Adjust it between 30 and 50.
during Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor.
deceleration An external force drives motor during deceleration. The setting of frequency rise threshold during voltage limit (F3-26) is
Deceleration time is too short. Increase deceleration time.
Ensure that the voltage limit function is enabled (F3-23 = 1).
The setting of voltage limit (F3-22) is too large. Adjust it between 700
V and 770 V.
improperly.
Overvoltage at The setting of frequency gain for voltage limit (F3-24) is too small.
constant speed Adjust it between 30 and 50.
Cancel the external force or install a braking resistor.
An external force drives motor during running. The setting of frequency rise threshold during voltage limit (F3-26) is
Pre-charge Input voltage is not within the permissible range, Adjust the voltage to normal range to ensure that bus voltage
resistor overload causing frequent ON/OFF of contactor. fluctuation does not cause frequent contactor ON/OFF.
Instantaneous power failure occurs. Enable the power dip ride through function (F9-59 ≠ 0).
The AC drive’s input voltage is not within the
Adjust the voltage to normal range.
permissible range.
Undervoltage
The bus voltage is abnormal. Contact us or the agent.
The rectifier bridge, the inverter drive board or the
inverter control board is abnormal.
Load is too heavy or locked-rotor occurs on motor. Reduce load or check motor and mechanical conditions.
The AC drive power class is small. Replace a drive of larger power class.
AC drive
overload
Reduce the setting of F3-01 (torque boost) by 1.0% gradually, or set it
The control mode is V/F.
to 0 (auto torque boost).
Pulse-by-pulse Load is too heavy or locked-rotor occurs on motor. Reduce load or check motor and mechanical conditions.
current limit fault The AC drive power class is small. Replace a drive of larger power class.
F9-01 (Motor overload protection gain) is set

Set F9-01 correctly.
Motor overload improperly.
Load is too heavy or locked-rotor occurs on motor. Reduce load or check motor and mechanical conditions.
R phase is lost. Check whether input phase loss occurs.

Check whether input cable is broken.
S phase is lost.
Check that DI terminals are properly connected.
Input voltage T phase is lost. Check the hardware voltage detection circuit.
fault
Overvoltage occurs on input phase. Adjust the voltage to normal range.
Check whether input phase loss occurs. Check the hardware voltage
Voltage imbalance occurs on input phase.
detection circuit.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 147
Drive
Operating Panel
Display
Check resistance between motor wires. Replace motor if winding is
Motor winding is damaged.
damaged.
Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected
The cable connecting the AC drive and the motor is
Output phase properly.
abnormal.
loss Correct wiring.
The AC drive’s three-phase outputs are unbalanced
Check whether the motor three-phase winding is normal.
when the motor is running.
The drive board or the IGBT is abnormal. Contact us or the agent.
The ambient temperature is too high. Lower the ambient temperature.
The ventilation is clogged. Clean the ventilation.
IGBT overheat The cooling fan is damaged. Replace the fan.
Thermally sensitive resistor of IGBT is damaged.
IGBT is damaged.
Confirm that the mechanical condition allows restart (F8-18) and reset
External fault signal is input via NO DI.
the operation.
External fault
Confirm that the mechanical condition allows restart (F8-18) and reset
External fault signal is input via NC DI.
the operation.
Check whether the RS485 cable is correctly connected.
Communication
Modbus communication timeout Check whether the setting of Fd-04 and PLC communication cycle are
fault
proper.
Auto-tuning of pole position angle of synchronous

It is possible the motor is not connected, or output phase loss occurs.
motor is faulty.
Auto-tuning of initial pole position angle of Increase the setting of F2-29 (initial position angle test current of
synchronous motor is faulty. synchronous motor).
Check whether the motor is not connected.

Stator resistance auto-tuning is faulty. Ensure that rated motor current (F1-03) is set according to motor
nameplate.
Check whether the motor is not connected or output phase loss

Auto-tuning of instantaneous leakage inductance of
occurs.
asynchronous motor is faulty.
Ensure that the motor is connected.
Ensure that rated motor current (F1-03) is set according to motor
nameplate.
Inertia auto-tuning is faulty.
Increase the setting of inertia auto-tuning and dynamic speed
reference (F2-43).
Motor auto-
tuning fault
Check whether the motor is not connected or output phase loss

Auto-tuning times out. occurs.
Ensure that the motor is disconnected from load.
Auto-tuning of installation angle of no-load

Check the Z feedback signal.
synchronous motor times out.

Auto-tuning of pole position of synchronous motor is nameplate.
faulty. Decrease the setting of F2-29 (initial position angle test current of
synchronous motor).
Auto-tuning of instantaneous leakage inductance of Check whether the AC drive power class is small,and replace an AC
asynchronous motor is incorrect. drive of proper power class based on motor power.
For parameters written to EEPROM, check RAM addresses and

EEPROM read address mapping. For details, see the address expression rules in the
EEPROM read and write is abnormal.
and write fault Appendix.
If the EEPROM chip is damaged, replace the main control board.
148 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Operating Panel
Display
Stator resistance is not within the permissible range. Check whether rated motor voltage and current are incorrectly set,
Asynchronous motor rotor resistance is not within the and set F1-02 and F1-03 according to motor nameplate.
permissible range. Check that auto-tuning is performed after the motor stops.
No-load current and mutual inductive reactance of
asynchronous motor are not within the permissible
range. If such an alarm is generated, the AC drive
Set motor parameters in group F1 according to motor nameplate.
Abnormal motor calculates no-load current and mutual inductive
Before auto-tuning, ensure that the motor has no load.
auto-tuning result reactance based on known parameters. The
calculated values may be different from optimal
values.
Ensure that rated motor voltage (F1-02) is set according to motor
Synchronous motor back EMF is not within the
nameplate.
permissible range.
Before auto-tuning, ensure that the motor has no load.
Inertia auto-tuning is faulty.
nameplate.
Short circuit to
Motor is short circuited to the ground. Replace cable or motor.
ground
Motor phase-
Check whether two-phase short circuit occurs in three-phase (U, V, W)
to-phase short Phase-to-phase short circuit occurs on motor.
output.
circuit
Accumulative
running time Accumulative running time reaches the setting value. Clear the record through parameter initialization.
reached
Accumulative
Accumulative power-on time reaches the setting
power-on time Clear the record through parameter initialization.
value.
reached
The output current of AC drive is smaller than F9-64 Check whether load is disconnected or the setting of F9-64 and F9-65
Load loss
(load loss detection level). (load lost detection time) satisfies actual running condition.
PID feedback lost PID feedback is smaller than the setting value of FA-
Check PID feedback or set FA-26 properly.
during running 26 (detection level of PID feedback loss).
Motor auto-tuning is not performed. Perform motor auto-tuning.
Speed feedback
lost error F9-69 (detection level of speed error) and F9-70
Set F9-69 and F9-70 correctly based on actual condition.
(detection time of speed error) are set incorrectly.
Encoder parameters are set improperly. Set encoder parameters properly.
Motor over- Motor auto-tuning is not performed. Perform motor auto-tuning.
speed
F9-67 (Over-speed detection level) and F9-68 (Over-
Set F9-67 and F9-68 correctly based on actual condition.
speed detection time) are set incorrectly.
Cable connection of temperature sensor becomes
Check cable connection of temperature sensor.
loose.
Motor overheat The motor temperature is too high. Decrease carrier frequency or take other measures to cool the motor.
The setting of F9-57 (motor overheat protection
Increase the setting of F9-57 (90° C to 100° C for common motor).
threshold) is too small.
Synchronous
control Check whether the slave option is selected for A8-10, A8-50, and A8-
More than two slave types are set.
parameter setting 70.
fault
STO fault The STO card is faulty. Check STO wiring.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 149
Drive
Maintenance
Rountine Maintenance
Check the following items daily to ensure normal running and prevent damage to the AC drive. Copy this checklist and sign the
“Checked” column after each inspection.
Inspection Item Inspection Points Solutions Checked

• Check whether the mechanical connection is normal.
Inspect whether the abnormal sounds
Motor • Check whether output phase loss occurs on the motor.
and vibration occur on the motor.
• Check whether retaining screws of the motor are tightened.
• Check running of the cooling fan of the AC drive.
Inspect whether the cooling fan of the • Check whether the cooling fan of the motor is normal.
Fan • Check whether the ventilation is clogged.
AC drive and motor work abnormally. • Check whether the ambient temperature is within the permissible
range.
• Check input and output cables for damaged insulation.
Inspect whether the cabinet and cable • Check for vibration of the hanging bracket.
Installation environment
duct are abnormal. • Check whether ground bars and terminals become loose or get
corroded.
• Check whether motor parameters are set properly.
Inspect whether the running currentof the
• Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Load AC drive exceeds the rated current of the
• Check whether the mechanical vibration is severe (allowed
AC drive and motor for a certain period.
range: < 1 g).
Inspect whether the power voltage ofthe
• Check that the input voltage is within the allowed range.
Input Voltage main and control circuits is within the
• Check whether start of heavy load exists.
allowed range.
Service Life of Wear Parts

The service life of fans and electrolytic DC bus capacitors is related to the operating environment and maintenance status. The
general service life is listed as follows.
Components Service Lift [1]
Fan > 5 years
Electrolytic capacitor > 5 years
[1] You can determine when to replace these parts according to the actual operating time.
• Ambient temperature : 40 oC
• Load rate : 80%
Replacing Cooling Fans

1. Possible damage causes: bearing worn and blade aging
2. Judging criteria: whether there is crack on the blade; whether there is abnormal vibration noise upon startup; whether the
blade runs abnormally
3. Replacement method:
Removing the Fans
①. Disconnect the fan power cables (marked by blue circles in the following figure).
②. Remove the M4 screws (marked by red circles in the following figure) from the fan cover.
③. Remove the fan and fan cover.
Installing the Fans

①. Install the fan in a reverse procedure to removal. Pay attention to the direction of the fan.
②. After the replacement is completed, check that the air flow direction is upright.
150 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Drive
Function Code
Table 54. Function code
Cir 1 Cir 2
Para. No. Para. Value Description Para. No. Para. Value Description
F0-01 2 V/F control F0-01 2 V/F control
F0-02 2 Serial comms. F0-02 2 Serial comms.
F0-03 9 Communication setting F0-03 9 Communication setting
F0-10 50 Max. frequency F0-10 50 Max. frequency
F0-12 50 Frequency upper limit F0-12 50 Frequency upper limit
F0-14 30 Frequency lower limit F0-14 30 Frequency lower limit
F0-15 2 Carrier frequency F0-15 2 Carrier frequency
F0-17 6 Acceleration time F0-17 6 Acceleration time
F0-18 20 Deceleration time F0-18 20 Deceleration time
F1-01 Power F1-01 Power
F1-02 Voltage F1-02 Voltage
F1-03 Current Parameters on the motor nameplate F1-03 Current Parameters on the motor nameplate
F1-04 Frequency F1-04 Frequency
F1-05 Speed F1-05 Speed
A4-00 1 DC power calculation enabled A4-00 1 DC power calculation enabled
A4-01 97.3 Power correction coefficient A4-01 97.3 Power correction coefficient
DI2 filter overtemperature protection. DI2 filter overtemperature protection.
1) If the overtemperature protection 1) If the overtemperature protection
contact of the filter is connected between contact of the filter is connected between
F4-01 0 DI2 and COM, set F4-01 to 52. In this F4-01 0 DI2 and COM, set F4-01 to 52. In this
case, Err62 is reported when no signal is case, Err62 is reported when no signal is
connected. connected.
2) Set to 0 by default. 2) Set to 0 by default.
F5-02 1 TA/TC running status output F5-02 1 TA/TC running status output
PA/PC filter control signal. 1) Control filter PA/PC filter control signal. 1) Control filter
capacitance; set to 52; PA/PC connected capacitance; set to 52; PA/PC connected
F5-03 0 F5-03 0
for filter control in serial 2) Set to 0 by for filter control in serial 2) Set to 0 by
default. default.
Fd-00 9 Baud rate: 115200 bps Fd-00 9 Baud rate: 115200 bps
FD-01 1 Modbus data format: 8-E-1 FD-01 1 Modbus data format: 8-E-1
FD-02 1 Local address FD-02 2 Local address
Set to 1 by default to enable the STO Set to 1 by default to enable the STO
F8-54 1 F8-54 1
function. function.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 151
Free Cooling
Overview the air, and then flows to the evaporator. The blue arrow in
Figure 90 indicates the direction of fluid flow. When unit is
Free cooling is a supplement to the RTAG standard unit. operating at pure mechanical cooling mode, the black arrow
Please refer to the unit standard IOM for the unit operation represents the direction of fluid flow. Valve A and valve B are
except for the free cooling part. electric butterfly valves designed to switch fluid flow direc-
tions, to reduce fluid pressure drop during pure mechanical
TRANE RTAG chiller adopts copper tube aluminum fin type
refrigeration.
coil as free cooling heat exchanger, which has slightly small-
er size than the cooling system coil and is mounted on the Glycol-free free cooling has a separate internal circulation
outside of the cooling system coil. loop build by plate heat exchanger, water pump, water coil
and pipe. Antifreeze fluid (glycol or propylene glycol, etc.)
reciprocated in this loop driven by the pump, releases heat at
System Schematic of Two Types the free cooling coil to the air, absorb heat from brazed plate
Free Cooling heat exchanger from coolant. The user can use water as a
circulating coolant if ambient temperature is suitable, which
RTAG free cooling options has two categories: direct free first flows through the brazed plate heat exchanger and
cooling and glycol-free free cooling. Direct free cooling releases heat, and then flows to the evaporator. The electric
as shown in Figure 90. Glycol-free free cooling system is butterfly valve A and B in the glycol-free free cooling system
shown in Figure 91. are optional. With valve A can reduce user side coolant pres-
Direct free cooling option, users must use antifreeze fluid sure drop during the mechanical refrigeration mode. Valve B
(ethylene glycol or propylene glycol, etc.) as the coolant. can improve the reliability of unit starting and stopping in free
When the unit is running at free cooling mode, the coolant cooling mode and improve the anti-freezing ability when unit
first flows through the free cooling coil and releases heat into is off.
Figure 90. Direct Free Cooling System Schematic
152 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
Figure 91. Glycol-free Free Cooling System Schematic
General Data of Free Cooling

Table 55. Direct-Free cooling - Fixed Speed Compressor Units
Model RTAG 255X 285X 310H 340H 375H 400H
Fan power kW/per 1.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 463/231 530/287 563/280 563/280 510/510 550/550
Compr+Fan+Control)
Unit start up amps A 647/446 743/542 774/534 774/534 731/725 764/758
Shipping weight lb 22597 24663 22994 22994 26063 26385
Operation weight lb 24760 27068 25225 25225 28506 28863
FC side inner volume l 828.2 918.7 828.2 828.2 905.5 905.5
Dimension
Length inch 399 445 399 399 445 445
Width inch 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2
Height inch 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6
Model RTAG 125X 145X 155X 170X 190X 205X 225H

Fan power kW/per 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 327 377 413 449 496 536 536
Compr+Fan+Control)
Unit start up amps A 504 587 687 787 828 861 861
Shipping weight lb 14063 14559 14908 15278 17247 17685 17685
Operation weight lb 15016 15527 15904 16817 18909 19403 19434
FC side inner volume l 309 307 323 547 632 632 632
Dimension
Length inch 263 263 263 263 298 298 298
Width inch 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1
Height inch 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5
Note:
This table is only list free cooling units which are different from standard configuration parameters. For the parameters not listed here, please refer to the corresponding base unit general
data table.
Direct free cooling units FC side inner volume is the sum of water coils and connection tubes, which don’t include the evaporator coolants side inner volume. To estimate free cooling
glycol quantity, please plus the evaporator water storage in General data Table 1 ~ Table 7 and user side tube inner volume.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 153
Free Cooling
Table 56. Direct Free cooling- Variable Speed Compressor Units
Model RTAG 310P 340P 375P 400P

Fan power kW/per 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 563/280 563/280 510/510 550/550
Compr+Fan+Control)
Unit start up amps A 774/276 774/276 648/648 764/758
Shipping weight lb 23766 23766 27276 27597
Operation weight lb 25997 25997 29974 30075
FC side inner volume l 828.2 828.2 905.5 905.5
Dimension
Length inch 409 409 455 455
Width inch 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2
Height inch 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6
Model RTAG 125P 145P 155P 170P 190P 205P 225P

Fan power kW/per 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 327 377 413 449 496 536 536
Compr+Fan+Control)
Dimension
Length inch 269 269 269 269 304 304 304
Width inch 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1
Height inch 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5
Note:
Direct free cooling units FC side inner volume is the sum of water coils and connection tubes, which don’t include the evaporator coolants side inner volume. To estimate free cooling
glycol quantity, please plus the evaporator water storage in General data Table 1 ~ Table 7 and user side tube inner volume.
Table 57. Glycol-Free Free cooling- Fixed Speed Compressor Units
Model RTAG 255X 285X 310H 340H 375H 400H

Fan power kW/per 1.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 463/231 530/287 563/280 563/280 510/510 550/550
Compr+Fan+Control)
Unit start up amps A 647/446 743/542 774/534 774/534 731/725 764/758
Shipping weight lb 24050 26325 24628 24628 28246 28567
Operation weight lb 26292 28832 26974 26974 30944 31301
FC side inner volume l 862.2 962.5 877.2 877.5 1015 1015
Dimension
Length inch 399 445 399 399 445 445
Width inch 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2
Height inch 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6
Model RTAG 125X 145X 155X 170X 190X 205X 225H

Fan power kW/per 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 327 327 413 449 496 536 536
Compr+Fan+Control)
Dimension
Length inch 263 263 263 263 298 298 298
Width inch 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1
Height inch 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5
154 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
Table 58. Glycol-Free cooling- Variable Speed Compressor Units
Model RTAG 310P 340P 375P 400P

Fan power kW/per 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 563/280 563/280 510/510 550/550
Compr+Fan+Control)
Unit start up amps A 774/276 774/276 648/648 764/758
Shipping weight lb 25399 25399 29458 29780
Operation weight lb 27745 27745 32157 32514
FC side inner volume l 877.2 877.5 1015 1015
Dimension
Length inch 409 409 455 455
Width inch 114.2 114.2 114.2 114.2
Height inch 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6
Model RTAG 125P 145P 155P 170P 190P 205P 225P

Fan power kW/per 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Fan speed RPM 970 970 970 970 970 970 970
Unit Max RLA(Max
A 327 377 413 449 496 536 536
Compr+Fan+Control)
Dimension
Length inch 269 269 269 269 304 304 304
Width inch 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1 105.1
Height inch 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5 98.5
Installation and Operating An- NOTICE

nouncement Equipment Damage!
The foundation requirement of the free cooling option units For all free cooling units, the concentration of anti-
is the same as that of the standard one. Although the overall freeze in the free cooling coils should be selected
according to the lowest historical ambient tempera-
width of the unit increases, the width of the base remains the
ture where the units are operating and stored (without
same, so the foundation remains the same. Please refer to
drainage). RTAG operating range allows the application
the standard machine installation requirements. of the lowest temperature must be equipped with 40%
Each free cooling coil has a vent valve on top, which ethylene glycol or propylene glycol, if choosing other
is used to drain air in the free cooling coil when filling with antifreeze, please ensure that its freezing point tem-
glycol coolant and daily maintenance. perature is lower than -20oC.
It is necessary to check the sight glasses on the top of the In winter when the machine is shut down for a long time, to
coil regularly to confirm whether there is air in the coil and drain the coolant in the evaporator, besides the drainage
drain it in time. For Glycol-free free cooling unit, there is a valve on the evaporator water box, it must open the drainage
sight glass before pump, which can be used to check air in valve on the water coil main pipe and drain valve at each
system also. Air in system can decrease unit capability and water coil. see Figure 92 and Figure 93. The glycol-free free
damage water pump. cooling system must open the drain valve at inlet pipe bot-
tom of the user side brazed plate heat changer. If glycol-free
NOTICE free cooling system needs to release the antifreeze in the
Equipment Damage! closed loop, there are multi¬ple outlets in the loop, please
make sure that each outlet is open to prevent the accumula-
For the glycol-free free cooling system, user must tion of liquid in loop See Figure 92 and Figure 94.
install a filter ≥ 40 mesh at the inlet of the unit in order
toprevent the brazed plate heat exchanger blocking. When the ambient temperature is <0oC during long-term
operation or shutdown, always ensure that the coolant in the
user side is above its freezing point temperature, and make
good pipe insulation. Besides, the evaporator shell and wa-
ter box are equipped with anti-freeze electric heater as the
standard unit. For the glycol-free cooling system, the user
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 155
Free Cooling
side water pipe and brazed plate heat exchanger are also
equipped with anti-freeze electric heater. Its power supply is
220V individual city electricity, which should supplies pow-
er alone.Customer or technician must monthly inspect
heater function.
The concentration of antifreeze should be tested regularly for
free cooling unit, and it is strongly recommended to test once
every two weeks. When it is found that the concentration is
different from the original concentration, timely supplement is
needed. The corresponding freezing points of ethylene glycol Drain valve
and propylene glycol concentrations are shown in Table 59.

Each water coil box has a drain valve like this.
Figure 92. Free Cooling Coil Box Drain Valve
Drain valve
Drain valve
Drain valve
Drain valve on Evap waterbox is still exist.

NTON<255ton, headers are on the same side
Figure 93. Free Cooling – Direct System drain valve
Drain valve on Evaporator waterbox is still exist.

NTON<255ton, headers are on the same side
Glycol side drain valve User side Drain valve
Units NTON>340 have dual brazed plate heat exchanger , and 1 more drain valve at glycol side.
Figure 94. Free Cooling – Glycol Free drain valve
156 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
Table 59. Freezing point temperature of antifreeze liquid
Ethylene glycol Propylene glycol
Concentration
Freezing point °C Density @20°C kg/m3 Freezing point °C Density @20°C kg/m3
15 -5.5 1026 -5.1 1021
20 -7.9 1034 -7.1 1026
22 -8.9 1037 -8.1 1029
24 -10.0 1040 -9.1 1031
26 -11.3 1043 -10.2 1033
28 -12.6 1046 -11.4 1035
30 -13.9 1049 -12.7 1037
32 -15.4 1052 -14.1 1039
34 -17.0 1055 -15.6 1041
36 -18.7 1058 -17.3 1042
38 -20.4 1061 -19.1 1044
40 -22.3 1064 -21.1 1046
45 -27.6 1072 -26.7 1050
50 -33.8 1079 -33.5 1054
Lifting
The lifting operation shall be carried out according to the lifting instruction Figure 95, all others shall refer to the unit standard
IOM. The weight of each lifting point and the unit center of gravity are shown in Table 60.
G,H (H at opposite)
E,F (F at opposite)
C,D (D at opposite)
Y
A,B (B at opposite)
X
Figure 95. Unit Lifting Schematic
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 157
Free Cooling
Table 60. Free Cooling Unit Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions
Shipping
Unit Free Cooling A B C D E F G H Xcg Ycg Zcg
(kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) (kg) weight
Type Type (mm) (mm) (mm)
(kg)
Glycol Free 1540 1435 1518 1559 1312 1403 982 1160 10909 4750 944 -1140
255X
Direct 1212 1281 1457 1516 1229 1331 1008 1217 10250 4965 965 -1175
Glycol Free 1705 1553 1589 1654 1467 1503 1081 1389 11941 5501 968 -1135
285X
Direct 1243 1303 1620 1705 1343 1416 1124 1433 11187 5780 990 -1169
Glycol Free 1595 1479 1558 1597 1341 1437 985 1178 11171 4755 936 -1143
310H
Direct 1224 1299 1492 1550 1249 1356 1017 1242 10430 4965 957 -1177
Glycol Free 1693 1576 1547 1587 1340 1437 1075 1266 11521 4762 930 -1142
310P
Direct 1322 1397 1481 1541 1248 1356 1105 1330 10780 4966 950 -1175
Glycol Free 1595 1479 1558 1597 1341 1437 985 1178 11171 4755 936 -1143
340H
Direct 1224 1299 1492 1550 1249 1356 1017 1242 10430 4965 957 -1177
Glycol Free 1693 1576 1547 1587 1340 1437 1075 1266 11521 4762 930 -1142
340P
Direct 1322 1397 1481 1541 1248 1356 1105 1330 10780 4966 950 -1175
Glycol Free 1762 1559 1702 1685 1932 1834 1209 1128 12812 5336 921 -1071
375H
Direct 1096 1256 1773 1791 1623 1651 1422 1211 11822 5684 946 -1110
Glycol Free 1857 1717 1813 1752 1692 1730 1500 1300 13362 5347 910 -1073
375P
Direct 1250 1409 1758 1772 1616 1648 1564 1355 12372 5680 933 -1110
Glycol Free 1714 1572 1840 1793 1723 1766 1372 1177 12958 5346 918 -1072
400H
Direct 1110 1259 1805 1810 1644 1680 1433 1228 11968 5689 942 -1110
Glycol Free 1845 1724 1849 1775 1717 1763 1514 1320 13508 5355 908 -1073
400P
Direct 1255 1413 1790 1791 1637 1677 1575 1380 12518 5685 930 -1110
125X Direct 925 819 861 845 909 865 630 525 6379 3061 999 -1015
145X Direct 934 825 877 914 928 950 641 535 6604 3084 983 -1020
155X Direct 961 824 910 922 966 961 672 546 6762 3084 983 -1020
170X Direct 978 855 928 962 984 1000 677 546 6930 3072 972 -1030
190X Direct 1013 840 1024 1045 1097 1071 914 819 7823 3393 994 -1026
205X Direct 1029 872 1050 1088 1120 1121 912 830 8022 3379 983 -1034
225H Direct 1029 872 1050 1088 1120 1121 912 830 8022 3379 983 -1034
125P Direct 1100 1123 861 761 940 905 604 483 6777 2892 980 -1022
145P Direct 1110 1129 878 830 962 989 620 485 7003 2909 971 -1042
155P Direct 1134 1129 913 840 1003 998 651 494 7161 2922 965 -1026
170P Direct 1153 1159 932 877 1018 1041 656 494 7329 2915 956 -1035
190P Direct 1176 1155 1029 956 1134 1108 893 772 8222 3231 978 -1031
205P Direct 1194 1178 1050 1008 1158 1158 903 772 8421 3222 968 -1038
225P Direct 1194 1178 1050 1008 1158 1158 903 772 8421 3222 968 -1038
125X Glycol Free 898 751 902 919 945 815 756 924 6909 3279 962 -1051
145X Glycol Free 908 757 919 987 966 903 767 935 7141 3283 955 -1070
155X Glycol Free 924 735 967 1019 1013 893 842 1051 7444 3344 938 -1059
170X Glycol Free 938 772 985 1059 1031 935 847 1047 7613 3328 930 -1066
190X Glycol Free 992 798 1040 1103 1166 1092 1003 1160 8353 3563 963 -1059
205X Glycol Free 1019 830 1055 1152 1190 1144 1008 1155 8552 3546 953 -1066
225H Glycol Free 1019 830 1055 1152 1190 1144 1008 1155 8552 3546 953 -1066
125P Glycol Free 1070 1055 905 835 982 861 730 872 7308 3110 946 -1055
145P Glycol Free 1080 1061 924 903 997 945 746 883 7539 3119 939 -1073
155P Glycol Free 1094 1040 971 935 1046 936 825 998 7843 3184 925 -1062
170P Glycol Free 1113 1069 989 975 1065 982 825 994 8012 3171 917 -1069
190P Glycol Free 1155 1124 1040 1008 1208 1124 982 1113 8752 3404 949 -1062
205P Glycol Free 1168 1138 1066 1061 1239 1180 998 1103 8951 3391 940 -1068
225P Glycol Free 1168 1138 1066 1061 1239 1180 998 1103 8951 3391 940 -1068
158 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
Isolator installation
The layout of the isolator and the specific horizontal position are shown in Figure 96 and Table 61, and Table 62.
W2 W4 W6 W8 W10 W12 W14

Control panel 1
Control panel 2
W1 W5 W7 W9 W11 W13
Figure 96. Isolator location

Detail dimension of rubber isolator:
A B C D E H L M W
Part number Color
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
X10140305640 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Charcoal
X10140305630 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Lime
X10140305620 76.2 12.7 127 14.2 9.7 69.9 158.8 40.6±6.35 117.6 Brick Red
Figure 97. Isolator dimension

Table 61. Free Cooling Unit Isolators Location
Free Cooling Isolator location at X axis (mm)

Unit Type Quantity
Type W1, 2 W3, 4 W5, 6 W7, 8 W9, 10 W11, 12 W13, 14
Glycol Free 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 12
255X
Direct 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 11
Glycol Free 1350 3000 4500 5550 8850 10200 -- 12
285X
Direct 1350 3000 4500 5550 8850 10200 -- 11
Glycol Free 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 12
310H
Direct 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 11
Glycol Free 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 12
310P
Direct 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 11
Glycol Free 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 12
340H
Direct 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 11
Glycol Free 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 12
340P
Direct 1000 2250 3400 4400 7800 9000 -- 11
Glycol Free 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 14
375H
Direct 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 13
Glycol Free 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 14
375P
Direct 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 13
Glycol Free 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 14
400H
Direct 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 13
Glycol Free 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 14
400P
Direct 1120 2000 3350 4450 7800 9100 10200 13
125X Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
145X Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
155X Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 159
Free Cooling
Free Cooling Isolator location at X axis (mm)
Unit Type Quantity
Type W1, 2 W3, 4 W5, 6 W7, 8 W9, 10 W11, 12 W13, 14
170X Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 / -- -- 8
190X Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
205X Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
225H Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
125P Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
145P Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
155P Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
170P Direct 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
190P Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
205P Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
225P Direct 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
125X Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
145X Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
155X Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
170X Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
190X Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
205X Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
225H Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
125P Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
145P Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
155P Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
170P Glycol Free 700 2400 4100 5800 -- -- -- 8
190P Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
205P Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
225P Glycol Free 700 2150 3000 4550 6800 -- -- 10
Table 62. Free Cooling Unit Isolators Part Extension Color

Free Cooling Isolator Color at Each Location
Unit Type Quantity
Type W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14
Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick Char-
Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime - - 12
coal Red Red coal coal coal coal Red coal
255X
Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick Char-
Direct Lime - Lime - - 11
coal Red coal coal coal coal coal Red coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Glycol Free Lime Lime - - 12
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal coal
285X
Char- Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Direct - Lime - - 11
coal coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick Char-
Glycol Free Lime - - 12
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal Red coal
310H
310P
Char- Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Direct - Lime Lime - - 11
coal coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick Char-
Glycol Free Lime - - 12
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal Red coal
340H
340P
Char- Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Direct - Lime Lime - - 11
coal coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick
Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime 14
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal Red
375H
Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick
Direct Lime - Lime Lime Lime 13
coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal Red
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime 14
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal
375P
Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick
Glycol Free Lime Lime 14
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal Red
400H
Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Brick
Direct - Lime Lime 13
coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal Red
160 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
Free Cooling Isolator Color at Each Location
Unit Type Quantity
Type W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime 14
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal
400P
Char- Brick Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char- Char-
coal Red coal coal coal coal coal coal coal
Brick Char- Brick Brick
125X Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
Red coal Red Red
Brick Char- Char- Brick Brick
145X Direct Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
Red coal coal Red Red
190X Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red
Brick Char- Brick Brick Char-
205X Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red coal
Brick Char- Brick Brick Char-
225H Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick
125P Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
coal coal Red Red
Char- Char- Char- Brick Brick
145P Direct Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
coal coal coal Red Red
190P Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char-
205P Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char-
225P Direct Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red coal
Brick Char-
125X Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
Red coal
Brick Char- Char-
145X Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
Red coal coal
Brick Char- Char-
Red coal coal
Brick Char- Char-
Red coal coal
190X Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red
Brick Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char-
205X Glycol Free Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red coal coal coal coal
Brick Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char-
225H Glycol Free Lime Lime - - - - 10
Red coal Red Red coal coal coal coal
Char- Char-
125P Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
coal coal
Char- Char- Char-
145P Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - - - 8
coal coal coal
Char- Char- Char-
coal coal coal
Char- Char- Char-
coal coal coal
190P Glycol Free Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char-
205P Glycol Free Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal
Char- Char- Brick Brick Char- Char- Char- Char-
225P Glycol Free Lime Lime - - - - 10
coal coal Red Red coal coal coal coal
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 161
Free Cooling
Operation Mode perature, which depends on the chiller set temperature. The
whole chiller cooling capacity can be provided by the free
There are 3 types operation mode of RTAG free cooling cooling system. At this point, the compressor does not have
units: to run because the free cooled coil provides the required
coolant temperature. Cooling control logic is described in the
1. Compressor mechanical refrigeration mode
following section. In this mode, only the fan runs.
In this operating mode, the ambient temperature is higher
than (temperature of evaporator inlet water - free cooling tar-
get offset), free cooling is not enabled, and the compressor Free Cooling Working Condition
is running. The fan/compressor control logic is the same as
Free Cooing can be enabled/disabled from user interface
the base unit control logic
TD7 or Trane service tool TU.
2. Mechanical refrigeration + free cooling mode
After Free Cooling is enabled, unit will monitor the active wa-
In this operating mode, free cooling will be enabled when ter temperature setpoint, ambient temperature and entering/
the ambient temperature is below value of the evaporator leaving water temperature to select compressor mechanical
entering water temperature - the free cooling target offset. cooling or free cooling automatically.
The control logic is described later. The free cooling system
Below conditions need to be meet for Free Cooling, see
operates in conjunction with the compressor. Most of the
below Figure 98.
time, free cooling provides only part of the required capacity.
In other words, the chilled water flowing from the free cooling 1. Unit is in cooling mode
system will continue to be cooled in the mechanical cooling
2. Outdoor air temperature is less than Free Cooling Enter-
system.
ing Water Temperature - Free Cooling Target Offset.
3. Full free cooling mode
When the ambient temperature is lower than a certain tem-
1 deg. C
Free Cooling Active
Free Cooling Inactive

Free Cooling Target Offset
Chiller Entering Water Temperature
Outdoor Air Temperature
Free Cooling Activation Target
Figure 98. Free Cooling Active/Inactive
To avoid free cooling cycle, a temperature deadband (1 deg. Note: When unit is running in free cooling mode, control-
C) is applied in the free cooling active/inactive control logic, ler Symbio800 will not lock compressors, but when
this deadband is a fixed value. ambient temperature is lower than “Cooling Low
Ambient Lockout”, which default is -10 ºC, then
If free cooling is enabled, free cooling becomes the first controller Symbio800 will lock compressors. In oth-
stage of cooling. Free cooling is the first stage to engage for er words, when ambient temperature is lower than
cooling capacity loading and the last stage to consid¬er in “Cooling Low Ambient Lockout”, free cooling is the
capacity unloading. only way to provide cooling capacity.
162 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Free Cooling
User Interface
Table 63. Free cooing parameters and range
Description Description Default Range
Reports->Evaporator Free Cooling Capacity / /
Reports->Evaporator Free Cooling Entering Water Temperature / /
Reports->Evaporator Free Cooling Entering Glycol Temperature / /
Reports->Evaporator Free Cooling Glycol Flow Status / /
Reports->Evaporator Free Cooling Glycol Pressure / /
Settings->Chiller Settings Front Panel Free Cooling Command Auto Auto/Off
Settings->Chiller Settings Free Cooling Offset Target 3°C 1 ~ 15°C
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Rated Capacity 100% 20 ~ 1000%
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Valve Control Fan Speed 10% 100%
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Cycle Time - Pump On 10 Min 1 ~ 60 Min
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Cycle Time - Pump Off 720 Hr 1~2000 Hr
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Low Glycol Pressure Setpoint 110 Kpa 10 ~ 400 Kpa
Settings->Service Settings Free Cooling Glycol Pressure Hysteresis 160 Kpad 50 ~ 400 Kpad
Settings->Service Settings Low Glycol Temperature Cutout -15 °C -18 ~ 2.78 °C
Settings->Service Settings Low Glycol Temp Limit Fan Prop Gain 2.0 0.1 ~ 10.0
Settings->Service Settings Low Glycol Temp Limit Fan Reset Time 60 s 1 ~ 300 s
Settings->Manual Control Settings Free Cooling Valve Override Auto Auto/Manual
Settings->Manual Control Settings Free Cooling Bypass Valve Override Auto Auto/Manual
Settings->Manual Control Settings Free Cooling Pump Override Auto Auto/Manual
Diagnsotics of Free Cooling

Table 64. Diagnsotics
Diagnostic Name Description
Free Cooling Entering Water Temperature Bad Sensor or LLID
Free Cooling Entering Glycol Temperature Bad Sensor or LLID
Free Cooling Glycol Pressure Bad Sensor or LLID
Continual loss of communication between the MP and the Functional ID has occurred for a 30
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Entering Water Temperature
second period.
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Entering Glycol Temperature
second period.
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Valve
second period.
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Bypass Valve
second period.
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Pump
second period.
Comm Loss: Free Cooling Glycol Pressure
second period.
The Free Cooling Entering Temp dropped below the Low Glycol Temperature Cutout Setpoint
Low Glycol Temperature Free Cooling for 480 ºF-sec while Free Cooling was running. Once diagnostic is annunciated, the free cooling
pump shall be commanded off
The glycol pressure for free cooling has dropped below the Free Cooling Low Glycol Pressure
setpoint for more than 30 seconds. Glycol pump should be commanded off. This diagnostic can
Low Glycol Pressure Free Cooling
be manually cleared if the pressure is above the setpoint but below the setpoint + hysteresis
during more than 30 seconds.
Will be annunciated if the Free Cooling Glycol Pressure do not equalize to Free Cooling Glycol
Free Cooling Glycol Pressure Equalization Overdue Pressure Equalization Setpoint and the differential pressure between pump on and off do not
achieve 4 psid with in 2 minutes of free cooling pump startup.
Once the glycol pump is required to start, check the pressure_pump_run and pressure_pump_
stop.
If Pressure_Pump_stop - Pressure_Pump_run > 4 psid and Pressure_Pump_run > 20 psia, then
flow proving.
Free Cooling Glycol Flow Lost If Pressure_Pump_stop - Pressure_Pump_run < 2 psi after flow is proving during free cooling is
active, then no flow.
A. The free cooling glycol flow status is no flow for more than 6 contiguous seconds. B. This
diagnostic does not de-energize the free cooling glycol pump output but rather force it on. C. 6
seconds of contiguous flow shall clear this diagnostic.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN 163
Schematic Diagram List
Typical field connection diagram, electrical schematics drawing list for the RTAG units are shown in this section.
Unit Nominal Tonnage Unit Type Schematic EC Fan Schematic AC Fan Field Wiring Diagram
PSE/SSE 23114568 --
RTAG 085-230
H/X 23114594 23114594
23114578
PSE/SSE 23115015 / 23115927* --
RTAG 255-440
H/X 23115031 / 23115978* 23115016
* means EC fan with integrated drive
164 RTAG-SVX001K-EN
Trane - by Trane Technologies (NYSE: TT), a global climate innovator - creates comfortable, energy efficient
indoor environments for commercial and residential applications. For more information, please visit trane.com
or tranetechnologies.com.
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specifications without
notice. We are committed to using environmentally conscious print practices.
RTAG-SVX001K-EN Dec 2022 ©2022 Trane

Supercedes RTAG-SVX001J-EN (Aug 2022)

IOM RTAG+50Hz 572517440002 K

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IOM RTAG+50Hz 572517440002 K

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IOM RTAG+50Hz 572517440002 K

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation, Operation and Maintenance

RTAG Air-Cooled Helical

Dec 2022 RTAG-SVX001K-EN

! CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situ- USING PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIP-

Important Environmental Concerns

Important Responsible Refrigerant

©2022 Trane RTAG-SVX001K-EN

Unit Description................................................... 13 Figure 10. Dimension - RTAG 340 Extra

Figure 2. Dimension- RTAG 100 High, Isolator Installation.............................................. 40

Table 19. Electrical data – Extra Efficiency at Home Screen................................................ 66

Unit Voltage Phasing......................................... 109 Water-side Heat Exchanger Maintenance......... 122

Digit 1-4 - Unit Model C = Chinese Pressure Vessel Code

CHHW Compressor Model Number

RTAG air cooled screw chiller (50Hz) have totally 19 mod- ● C

Unit Identification - Nameplates

Unit Nameplate Figure 1. Unit Nameplate

Unit nameplate include following information, as Figure 1

Model RTAG 125 145 155 170 190 205

Figure 2. Dimension- RTAG 100 High, 085/100 Extra/Premium efficiency unit

Figure 3. Dimension - RTAG 125/145/155/170 High/Standard efficiency unit

Figure 4. Dimension- RTAG 125/145/155/170 Extra/Premium , 190/205 High/Standard efficiency unit

Figure 5. Dimension - RTAG 190/205/225 Extra/Premium efficiency unit

Figure 6. Dimension - RTAG 225/230 Extra/Premium efficiency unit

Figure 7. Dimension - RTAG 255/285 High/Premium efficiency unit

Figure 8. Dimension - RTAG 255 Extra, 310/340 High/Premium efficiency unit

RTAG 285 X 150PSI 450 1120 5058 1593 6" 11310

Figure 9. Dimension - RTAG 285/310 Extra efficiency unit

Figure 10. Dimension - RTAG 340 Extra efficiency unit

Figure 11. Dimension - RTAG 375/400 High/ Premium efficiency unit

150PSI 453 1120 3582 3582 8" 11810 ---

Type Trane Provide Trane Provide Field Provide

Attention Items evaporator.

Note: Report any damage incurred during handling or

Working clearance per National

No obstructions recommended. Area required for

No obstructions recommended. Area required for

Figure 15. Installation clearance

NOTICE Unit Lifting

Figure 17. Unit lifting schematic (6 points)

Table 9. Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions - Non-copper fins

A B C D E F G H Shipping Xcg Ycg Zcg

Premium-H* premium units with VFD High temperature starter type

Table 10. Lifting Weights and CG Dimensions - Copper fins

A B C D E F G H Shipping Xcg Ycg Zcg

Premium-H* premium units with VFD High temperature starter type

Not for 6 fans

6 fans & 8 fans isolator location 10 fans isolator location

12 fans & 14 fans isolator location

16 fans isolator location

18 fans isolator location

W1 W3 W5 W7 W9 W11 W13 W15

Figure 19. Isolator location

Figure 20. Ruber isolator dimension

Table 11. Unit Isolators

Fan Isolator location at X axis (mm) Isolator

Table 12. Unit Isolator Selections - Non-copper Fins

Isolator color at each location Isolator

100H Brick Brick Brick Brick

Brick Brick Brick